JP7358076B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that can play games.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is fired into a game area by a firing device, and when the game ball enters a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There are things that can be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as "fluctuation") of identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of identification information on the variable display device becomes a specific display result, the gaming state (game There are machines (so-called pachinko machines) that are configured to give a predetermined gaming value to the player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled).

Note that gaming value refers to the state of the variable winning ball device installed in the gaming area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to hit a winning ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. This means that rights are generated, and that the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily established.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole. A “jackpot” occurs when the Note that the derivation display means to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a jackpot occurs, for example, a jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times and the game enters a jackpot game state in which it is easy to hit a winning ball. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes are won in the big winning hole, the big winning hole is closed. The number of times the big prize opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Note that an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the grand prize opening will be closed when the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big prize opening may be referred to as a round. Moreover, a game in a round is sometimes called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display device, a symbol other than the final stop symbol (for example, the center symbol among the left center right symbols) is stopped and shaken continuously for a predetermined period of time in a state that matches a specific display result. The jackpot may occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, scaling, or deformation, or multiple symbols are changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. A performance performed in a state where sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called a reach performance. In addition, the reach state and its appearance are called the reach mode. Furthermore, a variable display that includes a reach effect is referred to as a variable reach display. Then, if the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes a "miss" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying finding out how to generate a jackpot.

Among such gaming machines, some are configured to be controllable to a special state that is different from an advantageous state. For example, as shown in Patent Document 1, it is possible to play a small winning game in which large winning openings are opened in a predetermined pattern, and a game in which the result of determination as to whether or not to play the small winning game is notified by performance symbols. machine is proposed.

JP2018-33787A (Figure 18)

Regarding a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state as described in Patent Document 1, there is room to improve the interest of the game.

This invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the interest of playing a game in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
a game area where game media can be fired;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
a performance control means for controlling the performance;
A gaming machine comprising an image display means,
The gaming area includes a first gaming area and a second gaming area,
The gaming state control means is configured to control a normal state, an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a special state different from the advantageous state, a special state in which a gaming value is more likely to be awarded due to the special state, and a different state from the special state. is controllable to a predetermined state;
In the normal state, it is more advantageous for game media to be fired into the first game area than to fire game media to the second game area,
In the predetermined state and the special state, it is more advantageous for game media to be fired into the second game area than to fire game media into the first game area,
The special state is a state in which the execution frequency of the second variable display of the first variable display and the second variable display is higher than the normal state,
The performance control means is
The image display means is capable of controlling one of a plurality of types of performance modes based on the player's actions in the special state and the predetermined state, and displays a notification display to notify the selected performance mode. It is possible to display the
A predetermined effect can be executed when controlled in the special state,
It is possible to vary the aspect of the predetermined performance that is executed when a gaming value is given depending on the performance mode,
When controlled to the special state, a background image that can be displayed when controlled to the predetermined state and a special display that is not displayed when controlled to the predetermined state are displayed on the image display means. It is possible to
The notification display can be displayed in common when the special state is controlled and when the predetermined state is controlled,
When controlled to the special state, the notification display can be displayed superimposed on a part of the special display,
The special display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with a pending display area in which a pending display indicating the number of pending executions of the second variable display is displayed.
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of means A1 is
It is equipped with a game state control means (CPU 103) that controls the game state and a performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that controls the performance, and has a disadvantageous set value (for example, 1 to 3) and a player's A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can set any setting value from among a plurality of setting values including advantageous setting values (for example, 4 to 6) that are highly advantageous to the player,
The gaming state control means (CPU103)
An advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (jackpot gaming state), a special state that is different from the advantageous state (small winning gaming state), and a special state in which gaming value is more likely to be awarded due to the special state (high probability/second KT state) and can be controlled to,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
In the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), multiple types of performance modes (cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode) are selected based on the player's actions (the player operated the push button 31B). Can be controlled to any of the production modes,
It is possible to vary the predetermined effects corresponding to the control of the special state according to the effect mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A1) to (A3), when the effect mode is cloudy mode, When the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "Small hit", the special symbol 18TM050 (small win symbol with the word "OPEN" indicated on the oval object) is fixed and stopped in the symbol display area 5C. As shown in Figures 11-4 (B1) to (B3), when the production mode is rain mode, when the fluctuating display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit", the symbol The combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") that is the order of the odd-numbered symbols is fixed and stopped in the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (C1) to (C3). , When the production mode is typhoon mode, when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit", the effect image 18TM060 (in this example, a musical note type) is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. image) is fixed and stopped the combination of overlapping decorative patterns),
moreover,
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 14) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Based on the determination result of the determining means, a mode including a specific performance (for example, a cut-in performance of pattern CI-3) and a suggestive performance (for example, a reach performance) that suggests that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state. Suggestive effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7 after executing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 15-18) that can be executed in a manner in which the present invention is not performed;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
When the setting value is set to the disadvantageous setting value and the determining means has not determined that the control is to be made into the advantageous state, the suggesting performance including the specific performance cannot be performed (for example, in FIG. 15 -21 (B), if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is off, the cut-in effect is changed to pattern CI-3. ),
When the setting value is set to the advantageous setting value and the determining means has not determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggesting effect including the specific effect can be executed (for example, in FIG. 15 As shown in -21 (C) to Figure 15-21 (E), if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6 and the variable display result is a failure, (Part where cut-in effect can be executed with pattern CI-3),
When the suggestion effect is executed, a special pattern in which it is once suggested that the control will not be controlled to the advantageous state and then it is announced that the control will be controlled to the advantageous state (a super pattern that executes the resurrection effect shown in FIG. 15-6) It has a reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5)),
In the case where the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the suggestion effect including the specific effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the suggestion effect is performed in the mode not including the specific effect. Low (For example, as shown in Figures 15-21 (A) to 15-21 (E), when performing a variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes a resurrection effect, the resurrection effect is executed. (The part where the rate of executing cut-in effects with pattern CI-3 is set lower than when executing variable display with the variable pattern of Super Reach γ Jackpot)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the performance mode can be selected by the player's actions, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state. In addition, if a suggested effect including a specific effect is executed and it is suggested that the player will not be controlled to an advantageous state, even though the player recognizes that an advantageous setting value has been set, the special pattern may cause the player to be in an advantageous state. By being notified that the game will be controlled, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game due to an error in the recognition.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
The gaming machine of means A1,
Equipped with variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display),
The variable display means (performance control CPU 120) can perform variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120) can vary the display mode of decoration identification information depending on the performance mode (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A2), when the performance mode is In the case of cloudy mode, a number pattern (in this example, "0" to "9") is used as a decorative pattern, and a special pattern 18TM050 (a small winning pattern in which the word "OPEN" is shown on an oval object) is displayed. As shown in Fig. 11-4 (B2) and Fig. 11-5 (C2), when the production mode is rain mode or typhoon mode, a numerical pattern (in this example) is displayed as a decorative pattern. , "0" to "9").
A gaming machine characterized by:
It is possible to vary the manner in which the decoration identification information is variably displayed depending on the performance mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
The gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
Equipped with variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of performing variable display (variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols),
The variable display means (performance control CPU 120) is configured to variably display first decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) and variable display (small display) of second decoration identification information whose visibility is lower than that of the first decoration identification information. It is possible to perform (fluctuation display of symbols),
The manner in which the second decoration identification information is variably displayed is the same regardless of the production mode (as shown in Figure 11-2, the second small design is a number symbol from "0" to "9" regardless of the production mode). (The area where the second small symbol is displayed is the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 regardless of the production mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the manner in which the second decoration identification information is variably displayed can be made common regardless of the performance mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the second decoration identification information even if the performance mode is switched. becomes possible.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3,
A variable display means (CPU 103) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols);
Suspended display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying the number of suspended displays (first suspended memory number, second suspended memory number) corresponding to the number of variable displays that have not been executed (variable display of special symbols); Prepare,
The manner of the number of pending displays is the same regardless of the production mode (as shown in Figure 11-2, the display format of the first pending memory number and the display format of the second pending memory number are the same regardless of the production mode. The first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 and the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025 are common regardless of which production mode is controlled.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the number of pending displays can be standardized regardless of the performance mode, so the player can accurately grasp the number of pending displays even if the performance mode is switched. .

The gaming machine of means A5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
Equipped with variable display means (CPU 103) capable of executing variable display (variable display),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120) responds to the player's operation (the push button 31B is operated by the player) during the variable display (during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed). (As shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-11, the presentation mode selection icon 18TM300 displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 [Cloudy mode] is switched to [Typhoon mode], and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the [Typhoon mode] shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is switched. ] is different from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode), so change the production mode from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode) to the production mode (typhoon mode) shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300. has been changed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the production mode based on the player's actions during the variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to the production mode.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120) can change the performance mode based on the player's operation (the player operated the push button 31B) in the advantageous state (jackpot game state). (As shown in Figure 11-7, during the performance mode selection period of the jackpot ending period (period T1 to T4 shown in Figure 11-6), cloudy mode and rain mode are selected as performance modes that are controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. mode and typhoon mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the performance mode can be selected by the player's actions, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120) can display a special display corresponding to the special state regardless of the performance mode (if the cloudy mode is selected as the performance mode, the display shown in FIG. 11-11) As shown in (B1) to (B5), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state), a high A special display 18TM100 with the word "RUSH" corresponding to the confirmation/2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed superimposed, and the production mode is changed and typhoon mode is selected as the production mode. 11-11 (B7) to (B8), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state), the image display device 5 A special display 18TM100 with the letters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed on the upper right and lower left of the screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to specify the special state regardless of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120) can display a gaming value display corresponding to the given gaming value regardless of the performance mode (FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5). As shown in , regardless of which production mode is being controlled, the number of balls awarded during consecutive small hits is displayed in a common display format at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the display mode and display area of the game value display can be made common in each performance mode, so that the player can accurately understand the game value display even when the performance mode is switched. .

The gaming machine of means A9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8,
A variable display means (CPU 103) that can perform variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. Prepare,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120), in the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), variably displays the first specific identification information (of the first special symbol) corresponding to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). It is possible to perform a specific response performance (jackpot countdown performance) that corresponds to the variable display).
A gaming machine characterized in that the aspect of the specific corresponding performance (jackpot countdown performance) is the same regardless of the performance mode.
According to such a configuration, in the special state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game regarding the specific corresponding performance corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) comprising a gaming state control means (CPU 103) that controls a gaming state and a performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that controls a performance,
The gaming state control means (CPU103)
An advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (jackpot gaming state), a special state that is different from the advantageous state (small winning gaming state), and a special state in which gaming value is more likely to be awarded due to the special state (high probability/second KT state) and can be controlled to,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
It is possible to perform a corresponding production (variable display of decorative patterns) that corresponds to variable display (variable display of special symbols),
In the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), there are multiple types of performance modes (symbol display area 5L) with different modes of the corresponding performance based on the player's action (the player operated the push button 31B). , 5C, and 5R, variations between numerical symbols (in this example, "0" to "9") and special symbols 18TM050 (small winning symbol with the word "OPEN" shown on an oval object) as decorative symbols. Cloudy mode in which display is performed, rain mode and typhoon mode in which fluctuating numerical symbols (in this example, "0" to "9") are displayed as decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Can be controlled to either production mode,
When changing the production mode, it is possible to execute a special production that reduces the visibility of the corresponding production (as shown in Figure 11-11 (B6), when changing the production mode, the production mode change production is By superimposing and displaying the mode change image 18TM310 on which the characters "MODE CHANGE" are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the variation of the decorative pattern is changed so that the display mode is different before and after the production mode is changed. (reducing display visibility)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when changing to the production mode, it is possible to prevent confusion among players due to different modes of corresponding production.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
The gaming machine of means B1,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
As the corresponding performance, it is possible to perform variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The mode of variable display of decoration identification information differs depending on the production mode (when the production mode is cloudy mode, a numerical pattern (in this example, "0" ” to “9”) and special symbol 18TM050 (a small winning symbol with the word “OPEN” displayed on an oval object) is displayed, and when the production mode is rain mode or typhoon mode, , in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, numerical symbols (in this example, "0" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner as decorative symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The gaming machine of means B3 is
The gaming machine of means B1 or means B2,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
As the corresponding effects, variable display of first decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) and variable display of second decoration identification information (variable display of small patterns) whose visibility is lower than that of the first decoration identification information are provided. is feasible and
The manner in which the second decoration identification information is variably displayed is the same regardless of the production mode (as shown in Figure 11-2, the second small design is a number symbol from "0" to "9" regardless of the production mode). (The area where the second small pattern is displayed is the second small pattern display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 regardless of the production mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the manner in which the second decoration identification information is variably displayed can be made common regardless of the presentation mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the second decoration identification information even if the presentation mode is switched. becomes possible.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3,
Equipped with a pending display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying the number of pending displays (first pending memory number, second pending memory number) corresponding to the number of variable displays (variable displays) that have not been executed,
The number of pending displays is the same regardless of the production mode (as shown in Figure 11-2, the display format of the first pending memory number and the display format of the second pending memory number are the same regardless of the production mode). The first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 and the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025 are common regardless of which production mode is controlled.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the number of pending displays can be standardized regardless of the production mode, so the player can accurately grasp the number of pending displays even if the production mode is switched. .

The gaming machine of means B5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120) responds to the player's operation (the push button 31B is operated by the player) during the variable display (during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed). (As shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-11, the presentation mode selection icon 18TM300 displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 [Cloudy mode] is switched to [Typhoon mode], and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the [Typhoon mode] shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is switched. ] is different from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode), so change the production mode from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode) to the production mode (typhoon mode) shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300. has been changed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the production mode based on the player's actions during the variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to the production mode.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B5,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120) can change the performance mode based on the player's operation (the player operated the push button 31B) in the advantageous state (jackpot game state). (As shown in Figure 11-7, during the performance mode selection period of the jackpot ending period (period T1 to T4 shown in Figure 11-6), cloudy mode and rain mode are selected as performance modes that are controlled after the jackpot game state ends. mode and typhoon mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the performance mode can be selected by the player's actions, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B6,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120) can display a special display corresponding to the special state regardless of the performance mode (if the cloudy mode is selected as the performance mode, the display shown in FIG. 11-11) As shown in (B1) to (B5), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state), a high A special display 18TM100 with the word "RUSH" corresponding to the confirmation/2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed superimposed, and the production mode is changed and typhoon mode is selected as the production mode. 11-11 (B7) to (B8), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state), the image display device 5 A special display 18TM100 with the letters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed on the upper right and lower left of the screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to specify the special state regardless of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B7,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120) can display a gaming value display corresponding to the given gaming value regardless of the performance mode (FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5). As shown in , regardless of which production mode is being controlled, the number of balls awarded during consecutive small hits is displayed in a common display format at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the display mode and display area of the game value display can be made common in each performance mode, so that the player can accurately understand the game value display even when the performance mode is switched. .

The gaming machine of means B9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B8,
The gaming state control means can perform variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. can be,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120), in the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), variably displays the first specific identification information (of the first special symbol) corresponding to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). It is possible to perform a specific response performance (jackpot countdown performance) that corresponds to the variable display).
A gaming machine characterized in that the aspect of the specific corresponding performance (jackpot countdown performance) is the same regardless of the performance mode.
According to such a configuration, in the special state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game regarding the specific corresponding performance corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) comprising a gaming state control means (CPU 103) that controls a gaming state and a performance control means (performance control CPU 120) that controls a performance,
The gaming state control means (CPU103)
An advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (jackpot gaming state), a special state that is different from the advantageous state (small win gaming state), and a gaming state that is controlled after the end of the advantageous state and that increases the gaming value due to the special state. can be controlled into a special state (high certainty/second KT state) in which it is easy to be given, and a predetermined state (high certainty/first KT state) which is a gaming state that is controlled after the end of the advantageous state and is different from the special state. and
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
A common predetermined display ("cloudy" as a background image) is displayed when the special state (high precision/second KT state) is controlled and when the predetermined state (high precision/first KT state) is controlled. images,” “rain images,” and “typhoon images.”
When controlled in the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), a special display corresponding to the special state (special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH") can be displayed. A gaming machine.
A predetermined display can be shared between the special state and the predetermined state, and the special state and the predetermined display can be specified by the special display, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
It can be controlled to one of multiple types of performance modes (cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode),
It is possible to control to a common production mode when controlled to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state) and when controlled to the predetermined state (high precision/first KT state) (Fig. As shown in 11-2, when the game is controlled in either the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) or the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the common performance mode is It is possible to control the cloudy mode, and even when the game is controlled in either the high-accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) or the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the rain mode is a common production mode. Typhoon mode can be controlled as a common performance mode even when the game is controlled in either the high accuracy / 1st KT state (variable probability state) or the high accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state). )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to control to a common performance mode when the special state is controlled and when the predetermined state is controlled, and the materials of the performance mode are common regardless of the game state. It is possible to reduce development costs.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The gaming state control means (CPU103)
Depending on the type of advantageous state (6R probability variable jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot), the game state is controlled to be either the special state or the predetermined state (as shown in FIG. 10-29, [ If a 10R certain variable jackpot] or [2R certain variable jackpot] occurs, after the end of the jackpot game, it will move to the high certain/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and if a [6R certain variable jackpot] occurs, , after the end of the jackpot game, it will move to the high certainty/first KT state (variable probability state))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the game state is controlled to be either a special state or a predetermined state depending on the type of advantageous state, so that the player pays attention to the type of advantageous state and the interest of the performance related to the advantageous state is increased. can be improved.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the special state (high accuracy/second KT state) is controlled and when the predetermined state (high accuracy/first KT state) is controlled, the player's action (the player presses the push button 31B) (as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-11, the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 [Cloudy mode] shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 displayed in is switched to [Typhoon mode], and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 Since the [typhoon mode] shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 is different from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode), select the production mode from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode). It has been changed to the production mode (typhoon mode) shown in icon 18TM300)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the production mode based on the player's actions when the control is in the special state and when the control is in the predetermined state, and the performance mode can be changed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the control is in the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state), one of the plurality of production modes is selected based on the player's action (the player operated the push button 31B). (As shown in Figures 11-7 (B1) to (B3), during the performance mode selection period of the jackpot ending period (period T1 to T4 shown in Figure 11-6), after the jackpot game state ends, The controlled production mode can be selected from cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode).
When the control is in the advantageous state, the special display can be displayed (as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B4), during the performance mode selection period of the jackpot ending period, the typhoon mode image on the image display device 5 On the upper right and lower left of the 18TM200C, a special display 18TM100 with the letters "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed superimposed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily specify that the vehicle is being controlled to a special state when the vehicle is being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C5,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the special state (a RUSH suggestion effect that suggests that it will be controlled to a high certainty/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the jackpot) )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when selecting the performance mode.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C6,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103) performs variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. is feasible and
In the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), the performance control means (performance control CPU 120) is configured to variably display first specific identification information (first special symbol It is possible to perform a specific response performance (jackpot countdown performance) corresponding to the fluctuation display of
A gaming machine characterized in that the aspect of the specific corresponding performance (jackpot countdown performance) is the same regardless of the performance mode.
According to such a configuration, in the special state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game regarding the specific corresponding performance corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state.

For example, in JP-A-2018-033787 (paragraphs 0040,0088), it is possible to perform a variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is determined to be almost a small hit, and the probability is variable. It is stated that if the player hits right in the gaming state, the small winning game will be repeated. Furthermore, there are some that are configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. For example, in JP-A-2010-200902 (paragraphs 0069, 0085, 0090, FIG. 12), the display of effects is controlled based on set values, and the process of displaying character images of giraffes, elephants, and lions is performed using a predetermined process. It is stated that it should be executed at the appropriate timing. By combining the gaming machines described in JP-A No. 2018-033787 and JP-A No. 2010-200902, it is possible to configure a setting suggestion performance in a game configured to be controllable in a special state. However, in a game configured to be controllable in a special state, simply executing the setting suggestion effect cannot sufficiently improve the interest of the game. Therefore, the invention according to the means D1 to D7 aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

(Means D1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of playing games, and can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine that can be set to a value, and is capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, an advantageous state control means (for example, executing steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100) A special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control a special state (for example, a small winning game state) that is a state different from an advantageous state. , special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps 052IWS2208, S2210, S2211, S2212, and S2213 in the game control microcomputer 100 ), and a setting suggestion performance that can execute a setting suggestion performance (for example, a small winning prize suggestion performance) in response to a gaming medium (for example, a game ball) passing through a specific area (for example, a special winning opening). The present invention is characterized in that it includes an execution means (for example, a portion of the performance control CPU 120 that executes 052IWS323 and S324). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

(Means D2) In the means D1, the advantageous state control means is capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. Yes, the special state control means controls the special state (e.g., small winning game state) when a special display result (e.g., small winning symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. Display result determining means that determines the display result of the variable display using a determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining the display result of the variable display. (For example, a part that executes steps 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, and S64B in the game control microcomputer 100), and the judgment value includes a value for determining to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display. A specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) and a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display a special display result as a display result of the variable display. A setting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (a part that executes steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620), and the number of special determination values may be the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). According to such a configuration, appropriate gameplay can be realized.

(Means D3) In the means D1 or D2, the setting suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing the setting suggestion performance in response to control to the special state (for example, a small hit occurs during the high probability/second KT state). Based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the special winning hole, it may be possible to perform a small hit winning suggestion presentation or a prize ball number display suggestion presentation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the control to the special state.

(Means D4) In any of the means D1 to D3, when controlled to an advantageous state or controlled to a special state, the variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning ball device 7, etc. Variable means that can control the ball device 17) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can easily enter and an difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter. The setting suggestion performance execution means includes a control means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S122 to S124, S126, and S127), and the setting suggestion performance execution means responds to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state. , it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is in an open state and a game ball enters the big winning hole or the special winning hole) Based on this, it may be configured such that it is possible to execute a small hit winning suggestion presentation and a prize ball number display suggestion presentation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the control of the variable means.

(Means D5) In any of the means D1 to D4, the setting suggestion performance execution means is configured to control the setting suggestion performance when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of a jackpot game, from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state)), it is configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, change the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display in step 052 IWS624). You can leave it there. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the switching of control of the gaming state.

(Means D6) In any of the means D1 to D5, the setting suggestion performance execution means calculates the number of times the special state is controlled during the special state, the total gaming value given by the special state during the special state, or Depending on the number of executions of the variable display during the special state, setting suggestion effects can be executed with different selection ratios (for example, if the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666) In response to reaching the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls display suggestions A to F are executed with different selection ratios.Alternatively, for example, the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state, or the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state It may be configured such that the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios depending on the number of executions of the variable display executed during the execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the number of times the special state is controlled, the total gaming value, or the number of times the variable display is executed.

(Means D7) In any of the means D1 to D6, the special state control means selects, as the special state, an advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state for the player compared to the advantageous special state. The setting suggestion performance execution means can control the specific area when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special condition and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special condition. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance with a different selection ratio depending on when the medium passes (for example, only when the game ball hits the special prize opening due to a small hit during the second KT state, the suggestion at the time of small hit winning can be executed) It may be configured such that it is possible to perform a presentation or a presentation suggesting the number of prize pitches. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the type of special state.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to gaming machines of means A10 to A18 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, it has been possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, and which setting There were some that were able to execute a performance (specific performance) that suggested whether a value was set. In such gaming machines, the variable display result does not become a jackpot (it is not controlled to an advantageous state) by executing a specific performance and the variable display result becomes a loss (it is not controlled to an advantageous state). ) Instead, it is conceivable to notify the player that the setting value set in the gaming machine is an advantageous setting value (advantageous setting value) for the player, thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest. However, some gaming machines are capable of executing an effect (special pattern) that once indicates that the variable display result will be a loss and then again indicates that the variable display result will be a jackpot. For this reason, in such a gaming machine, even if a specific effect is executed and the variable display result suggests that the variable display result is a loss, if the variable display result is again announced as a jackpot, the setting value that is advantageous to the gaming machine will be changed. There is a problem in which, even though the player recognizes that the setting is set, if the recognition is incorrect, the player's interest in playing the game decreases. provision is required.

The gaming machine of means A10 is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, and includes a disadvantageous setting value (for example, 1 to 3) and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous setting value (for example, , 4 to 6) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including,
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 14) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Based on the determination result of the determining means, a mode including a specific performance (for example, a cut-in performance of pattern CI-3) and a suggestive performance (for example, a reach performance) that suggests that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state. Suggestive effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7 after executing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 15-18) that can be executed in a manner in which the present invention is not performed;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
When the setting value is set to the disadvantageous setting value and the determining means has not determined that the control is to be made into the advantageous state, the suggesting performance including the specific performance cannot be performed (for example, in FIG. 15 -21 (B), if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is off, the cut-in effect is changed to pattern CI-3. ),
When the setting value is set to the advantageous setting value and the determining means has not determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggesting effect including the specific effect can be executed (for example, in FIG. 15 As shown in -21 (C) to Figure 15-21 (E), if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6 and the variable display result is a failure, (Part where cut-in effect can be executed with pattern CI-3),
When the suggestion effect is executed, a special pattern in which it is once suggested that the control will not be controlled to the advantageous state, and then it is announced that the control will be controlled to the advantageous state (a super pattern that executes the revival effect shown in FIG. 15-6) It has a reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5)),
In the case where the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the suggestion effect including the specific effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the suggestion effect is performed in the mode not including the specific effect. Low (For example, as shown in Figures 15-21 (A) to 15-21 (E), when performing a variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes a resurrection effect, the resurrection effect is executed. (The part where the rate of executing cut-in effects with pattern CI-3 is set lower than when executing variable display with the variable pattern of Super Reach γ Jackpot)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a suggestive performance including a specific performance is executed and it is suggested that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state, even though the player recognizes that an advantageous setting value has been set, the special pattern is By notifying the player that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game due to an error in the recognition.

The gaming machine of means A11 is the gaming machine described in means A10,
The advantageous setting value includes a first advantageous setting value (for example, 4 or 5) and a second advantageous setting value (for example, 6) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous setting value,
The suggestive performance execution means sets the first advantageous setting value if the determining means does not determine that the control is to be in the advantageous state when the second advantageous setting value is set. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect in an aspect including the specific effect at a higher rate than when the determining means has not determined that the advantageous state is controlled (for example, in FIG. 15-21). C) ~ As shown in Figure 15-21 (E), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, a variable display is executed with a variation pattern in which the super reach γ is off. In this case, when the setting value set in pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the cut-in effect is most likely to be executed in pattern CI-3, and the setting value set in pachinko game machine 1 is the highest. When the setting value is 4, the cut-in effect is set to the lowest rate in pattern CI-3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific effect is executed with high frequency and is not controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to make the player expect that the second advantageous setting value is set, thereby improving the interest in the game. can.

The gaming machine of means A12 is the gaming machine described in means A10 or means A11,
No matter which setting value is set, the rate at which the special pattern is executed when the determining means determines that the control is to be in the advantageous state is the same (for example, As shown in 15-13(A), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using the jackpot variation pattern determination table 1 regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. (the part that determines the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the rate at which the special pattern is executed follows the set value that determines the rate at which it is decided that the special pattern will be controlled in an advantageous state. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A10 to means A12,
A special performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a special performance (for example, a cut-in performance of pattern CI-4) that is a performance different from the specific performance and that notifies that the control will be controlled to the advantageous state. After executing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 15-18, the variable display process shown in FIG. 7 is executed.
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A and jackpot B) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot C). including;
When the special effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-4). When executed in , the variable display result will always be a jackpot and the part will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state of jackpot C),
When the suggested effect including the specific effect is executed and the system is controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 15-21 and 15- As shown in 22, when the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, when the variable display result becomes a jackpot, the part is controlled to be in the jackpot game state of jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the special performance will be executed, and also because the suggestive performance including the specific performance may be executed and controlled to the second advantageous state. It is possible to reduce the decline in game interest when a suggested performance including a specific performance is executed when a set value is set and is not controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A10 to means A13,
In addition to a first suggestion performance (for example, a reach performance of super reach γ) that can be executed in a manner including or not including the specific performance, the suggestive performance execution means may also perform a similar performance that is the same as the specific performance. A second suggestion production (for example, a reach production of super reach δ) that can be executed in a manner including production (for example, a battle production in which an ally character and an enemy character fight) is executable as the suggestion production,
When the second suggestion effect is executed, the advantageous state is controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-22, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of super reach δ). If so, the variable display result will always be a jackpot)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variation of suggestion effects increases, and attention is drawn to whether or not the suggestion effect to be executed is a second suggestion effect in which a similar effect similar to the specific effect is executed and is controlled to be in an advantageous state. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A10 to means A14,
The suggestive effect execution means does not execute the suggestive effect in a mode including the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state by the special pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-33 (A) as modification example 208SG-1). ) ~ As shown in Figure 15-33 (E), when executing a variable display in the variable pattern (PB1-5) that executes a revival effect, cut-in effects cannot be executed in pattern CI-3. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a suggestive performance including a specific performance is executed and it is suggested that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state, a special pattern is displayed even though the player recognizes that an advantageous setting value has been set. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to notification that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A10 to means A15,
A first predetermined performance (for example, pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) and a first predetermined performance (for example, pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) are used as a predetermined performance (for example, a preview performance) that is different from the specific performance and suggests that the control will be in the advantageous state. A second predetermined effect (for example, pattern YE-3) that suggests control to the advantageous state at a higher rate than the first predetermined effect. 15-25 and then executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 7),
The predetermined effect executing means executes the suggested effect in a manner including the specific effect when the advantageous setting value is set and the determining means does not determine that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state. When executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. If the in-performance is decided to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot, when executing the preview performance, exclude patterns YE-3 and YE-4, which have a high expectation of a jackpot. Decide the performance pattern from the performance pattern (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even though the control is not in an advantageous state, the specific performance and the second predetermined performance are executed, thereby excessively increasing the player's expectation that the control will be in an advantageous state. can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A10 to means A16,
A special performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a special performance (for example, a preview performance of pattern YE-4) that is a performance different from the specific performance and that notifies that the control will be in the advantageous state. After executing the preview effect determination process shown in FIGS. 15-25, the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7 is executed.
The special performance execution means limits the execution of the special performance when the suggestive performance including the specific performance is executed when the system is controlled to be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-26(A) As shown in , when the variable display result is a jackpot and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4, which is a performance pattern with high expectation of a jackpot, a preview effect is executed. If so, the performance pattern is determined from the performance patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, which have high jackpot expectations)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the special performance will be controlled to an advantageous state in advance by executing the special performance when the specific performance is executed. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game will be played, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of means A18 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A10 to means A17,
As gaming states different from the advantageous states, there are a first gaming state (for example, a low probability low base state and a low probability high base state) and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, (high accuracy high base state), and a game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect in the first gaming state and the second gaming state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-13 and 15-14, when the CPU 103 is in the gaming state Regardless of the variation pattern of super reach (selectable part),
When the advantageous setting value is set and the determining means has not determined that the advantageous state is controlled, the suggested performance including the specific performance is executed in the second gaming state. The percentage of execution of the suggested presentation including the specific presentation in the first gaming state is higher than the percentage of execution of the suggested presentation including the specific presentation (for example, as shown in FIG. If the value is between 4 and 6, and the variation pattern is a variation pattern outside of super reach γ (PA2-4), if the set values are the same, cut-in effect will be performed in a high-accuracy, high-base state. (The part where the rate at which cut-in effects are executed in pattern CI-3 is set higher than the rate at which cut-in effects are executed in pattern CI-3 in the low-accuracy low base state and the low-accuracy high base condition)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second gaming state, it is easier to execute a suggested performance including a specific performance that is not controlled to an advantageous state indicating that an advantageous setting value is set, than in the first gaming state. The interest of the second game state can be improved.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of accessory control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram showing the output period of a security signal. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting change flag is set when the power is turned on. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power outage occurs before the set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power outage occurs after the set value is determined. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the configuration of the special variable winning ball device in the characteristic part 052IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 052IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a small hit fluctuation pattern table. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a special variable winning ball device. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning ball device and a special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning ball device and a special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning ball device and a special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows accessory control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart showing processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state changes. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric accessory release pre-processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of over-winning. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a suggestion performance determination table when over-winning. It is a flowchart showing the suggestion effect processing when winning a small hit. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a suggestion production determination table when winning a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows prize pitch number display suggestion production processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table. It is a flowchart which shows prize pitch number emphasis production processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a prize pitch number emphasizing effect determination table. 12 is a flowchart showing variable display start waiting processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a setting value suggestion performance determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows ending effect processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a performance mode of a setting value suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the performance aspect of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance. It is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of right-handed hitting information. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of the over-winning suggestion performance, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggestion production. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of the over-winning suggestion performance, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggestion production. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 1. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of a variable display when a small hit occurs in a variable display of the other special symbol while executing a variable display of one special symbol in Modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 2. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 3. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while executing the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in modification 4. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a hold display and an active display in a low probability state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a hold display and an active display in a high probability state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of performance aspects regarding various performances in cloudy mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of presentation modes regarding various presentations in the rain mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of presentation modes regarding various presentations in the typhoon mode. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects in a jackpot game state. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of performance aspects regarding various performances in a jackpot game state. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects in the high accuracy/first KT state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of presentation modes regarding various presentations in the high-accuracy/first KT state. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects in the high accuracy/second KT state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of presentation modes regarding various presentations in the high accuracy/second KT state. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for small hit. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for failure. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows random numerical value judgment processing at the time of winning. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows cut-in production decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows cut-in production decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows cut-in production decision processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing an execution decision rate of a cut-in performance, and a decision rate of a performance pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing an execution decision rate of a cut-in performance, and a decision rate of a performance pattern. It is an explanatory diagram of a performance pattern of cut-in performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution decision ratio in pattern CI-3 of cut-in effect. It is a flowchart which shows preview production decision processing. They are an explanatory diagram showing the execution ratio of the preview performance and the determination ratio of the performance pattern, and an explanatory diagram of the performance pattern of the preview performance. It is an explanatory diagram of a notice performance executable period for each variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram of a notice performance executable period for each variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram of a notice performance executable period for each variation pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a performance mode of a preview performance during variable display. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a cut-in presentation during variable display. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of the variable display result for every variation pattern. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of cut-in performance and the determination ratio of performance pattern in modification example 208SG-1. It is an explanatory diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the cut-in performance and the decision ratio of the performance pattern in modification 208SG-2. It is an explanatory diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the cut-in performance and the decision ratio of the performance pattern in modification 208SG-3. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the preview performance and the determination ratio of the performance pattern in modification example 208SG-4. It is an explanatory diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the cut-in performance and the decision ratio of the performance pattern in modification 208SG-5. It is an explanatory diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the cut-in performance and the decision ratio of the performance pattern in modification 208SG-6. It is a diagram showing the executable period of the setting value suggestion performance and the execution determination ratio of the setting value suggestion performance in modification example 208SG-7.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also referred to as a special game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right strike indicator 26 is provided to encourage a right strike operation in which a firing operation is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and its lighting is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In this example, a first hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and a second hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. Note that a display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 to display an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting notification LED 37 is provided to encourage a right-handed hitting operation. In addition, the lighting of the right hit notification LED 37 is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided below the image display device 5. The game ball that has entered the first starting prize opening is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

In addition, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first starting prize opening, and is configured to prevent game balls flowing down from the right side of the gaming area from entering the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 that prevents game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, it is possible to fire the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed shooting). The game ball is configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting prize opening only when the player performs the following operation.

In addition, this example shows a case in which the row of nails 19 is provided so that the game ball can be won in the first starting prize opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, but such a mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, the first starting winning hole may be provided on the left side of the gaming area so that a game ball can be won in the first starting winning hole only when a left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning hole may be configured such that a game ball can be won in the first starting winning hole. The opening may be provided on the left side of the gaming area, and the row of nails 19 may also be provided so that the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when a left-handed operation is performed.

A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

A special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the passage gate 41. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 extends in the left and right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member, which is formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game balls flow down, in the front and rear directions, thereby changing the bottom surface. A large prize opening located at the lower part of the member is changed into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in a jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Opening control is executed in which the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward toward the player, and the big winning opening, which is the winning area, is brought into the open state.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 that forms a special winning hole for small winnings, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning hole. As shown in , the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to it on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left and right direction in a slightly inclined state, and extend in the front and back direction with a plate-shaped bottom member that is formed as the bottom of the channel through which the game ball flows down. By moving forward and backward, the special winning hole and the second start winning hole located below the bottom member can be put into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize, and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. ). The special variable winning ball device 17 controls the bottom member in a small winning game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small winning pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Opening control is executed in which the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward, and the special winning opening, which becomes the winning area, is opened. In addition, when the variable winning ball device 6B hits the normal symbol display 20 and a symbol is derived and displayed, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, Opening control is executed to open the second start-up winning opening, which becomes the winning area.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so the game balls that fall onto the special variable winning ball device 7 If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right and falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B below.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. If the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are in the closed state, the game balls on the winning ball device 6B move from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B. Go. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged next to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not win and the variable winning ball device 6B does not win. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting prize opening is in the open state, the game ball that has fallen into the second starting prize opening will enter the second starting prize opening and become the special variable winning ball. Game balls do not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning hole is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning hole is in an open state, the game ball enters the special winning hole. Furthermore, if the special winning a prize opening is not also in an open state, the game ball will move on the bottom member of the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 and fall as it is toward the out opening.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a plurality of regulating pieces that reduce the speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member. There is. In this example, the regulation piece is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B, so that the game flows downward from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flowing direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanderes with a movement in the front-back direction component, and the time taken for the ball to flow down is delayed compared to when there is no regulating piece.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is placed on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is placed on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device starts from the variable winning ball device 6B. Since the game balls are configured to flow toward the player 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the grand prize opening is provided in the grand prize opening. When game balls are detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is in the open state, it will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to close and the grand prize opening is in a closed state, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the grand prize opening and obtain a prize ball, so it is difficult for the player to be in a disadvantageous condition.

A switch (second count switch 24) that can detect a game ball that has won a prize in the special winning hole is provided in the special winning hole. When game balls are detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning hole that is in the open state in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of prize balls is small compared to when the game ball enters the big winning hole. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) other winning holes such as the first starting winning hole 1 and the second starting winning hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to open and the special winning hole is in the open state, it will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to close and the special winning hole is in the closed state, it is impossible for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning hole. be in a disadvantageous condition.

In addition, a second starting opening switch 22B is provided in the second starting winning opening that can detect a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be collectively referred to as starting winning hole or starting opening.

In addition, this pachinko game machine 1 includes a passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole). is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when playing a jackpot game or in the KT state (so-called small winning time), the player can aim at the right side of the gaming area and perform a firing operation (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, since the normal symbol fluctuation display is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays the role of a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the game enters the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, so the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and furthermore, a frame LED 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. .

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
In this pachinko game machine 1, when the game state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the game area. When the player performs a left-handed hitting operation by rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, a first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, e.g. "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "jackpot". . Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "losing" symbol. In addition, even in the first special pattern game, it may be configured such that the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, resulting in a "small winning".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player on the condition that the game ball passes through a passage gate 41.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we have prepared multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, variable probability state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.). , jackpot types are set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), probability variable control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

In the KT state, KT control is executed which makes it easier to get a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to obtain a certain amount of prize balls even in the small winning game state, so it is an advantageous state for the player, although the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than in the jackpot playing state.

In the high base state, a control (time saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period of varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state (time saving state), and the "general symbol hit" in the regular symbol game is executed. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole is also executed by improving the probability that the game will occur more than the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

The variable probability state, KT state, and high base state continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the special symbol game being executed a predetermined number of times and the next jackpot game state being started. do. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (number-cutting probability variation, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state, and the display result in the special drawing game is a "jackpot" state. The probability that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed) It is a state in which

When the jackpot game is finished and the game state is controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-hand hitting operation by rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal symbol game on the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, e.g. "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "jackpot". If a predetermined special symbol (a small prize symbol, for example "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small prize". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player on the condition that the game ball passes through a passage gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the small winning game state, the special winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed).

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or dots on the frame LED 9 are performed. etc./turning off the light, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting port switches (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B), count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, and solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100, and converts it into a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or a solenoid for a big prize opening door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further performs audio control of a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-hand hit notification LED 37. It supplies it to the board 13, and supplies an LED signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing mode of the LED) to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the frame LED 9 and right-handed hitting notification LED 37, and drives the frame LED 9 and right-handed hitting notification LED 37 based on the LED signal in the manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-hand hit notification LED 37 are turned on/off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the LED.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of LED lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and LED signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 serves as an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). By the CPU 103 executing the first special symbol process process every timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the first special symbol game is realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes a second special symbol process process (step S25B). By the CPU 103 executing the second special symbol process process every timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the second special symbol game is realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol simultaneously and in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process for each timer interrupt, control of the jackpot game state, the small win game state, the game state, etc. are realized (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is used to output a test signal so that the control status of the game machine can be checked from outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 also performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period in which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the KT state during a jackpot game, a small win game based on the variable display of the second special symbol. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control to output the right-handed test signal during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a first starting winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning into the first starting winning opening, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the first pending storage number. When a starting prize enters the first starting winning hole, a random number value for determining the display result (including jackpot type) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information in the first pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. be done. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the first pending memory number, a transmission is performed to send a production control command to the production control board 12 for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the first pending memory number, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. Settings are made. The performance control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is controlled from the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted to the board 12.

After executing the first starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the first special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, it is determined whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win", or whether it is a "jackpot". The type of jackpot in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a loss symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. . After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, multiple types of fluctuation patterns are created using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or "small hit". It includes processing to decide on one or the other. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". This first special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts varying. It includes processing to do. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the first special symbol variation process ends. do.

In addition, in this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process moves to the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) and the first While the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, a small win may occur in the variable display of the second special symbol and the game may be controlled to a small win game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is set before the small hit is released). Processing - Determine whether the value corresponds to the small winning end process), and if the small winning game is in progress, do not change the value of the first special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. Thus, if the small winning game is not in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during a small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts fluctuating may be interrupted (the timer may be The update may be suspended).

Further, for example, the small winning ending period as the small winning ending processing period may be configured to vary depending on the gaming state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be interrupted in the normal state, the interruption period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol and the interruption period become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the swinging of the decorative symbols, resulting in a performance that gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small winning ending period shorter than in the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small winning ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win in the small win control and no special performance is performed, so the small win ending period is shortened compared to the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since it is easy for the game ball to win in the small win control and an effect that emphasizes the small win control is executed, the small win ending period may be configured to be longer than in the first KT state. . In this case, for example, the small winning ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, while the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Furthermore, the length of the small win fanfare period as the small win opening pre-processing period may be varied depending on the gaming state, similarly to the above small win ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". This first special symbol stopping process includes stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and stopping displaying (deriving) a confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the first special symbol. Contains processing to perform settings. Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", a setting process for starting a jackpot game is performed. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off and the display result is "small win", processing for starting a small win game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is also updated if the number of times cut is completed when the game is controlled to a variable probability state, KT state, or high base state. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

Note that the process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is replaced with "second", the second special symbol process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first starting winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as pending information.

In addition, in this example, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed by moving to the second special symbol fluctuation processing. While the first special symbol is being displayed, a small win may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled as a small win game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is set before the small hit is released). Processing - Determine whether the value corresponds to the small hit end process), and if the small winning game is in progress, do not change the value of the second special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process. Thus, if the small winning game is not in progress, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted during a small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is resumed after the small winning game ends. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the second special symbol starts fluctuating may be interrupted (the timer may be The update may be suspended).

Regarding the small win control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small win fanfare period and the small win ending period may be configured to vary depending on the gaming state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process processing, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process of the accessory control process (steps S120 to S128), transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The accessory control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal processing, it is monitored whether or not the settings for starting the jackpot game have been made, and if the settings for starting the jackpot game have been made, the processing for starting the jackpot game is performed. , the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is "2". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start the round execution in the jackpot gaming state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the opening upper limit period for keeping the big winning hole open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". This jackpot opening processing includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a jackpot based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from an open state to a closed state. When returning the grand prize opening to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. , ends the jackpot opening process.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "4". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3". The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "5". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing for making various settings for starting control, KT control, and high base control. When such settings are made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

The small win release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the special winning opening to be open in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small win release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". This small hit opening process includes a process to measure the elapsed time since the special winning opening was opened, and a timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the special prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small winning end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light emitters such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Controls such as actions are performed to operate various production devices. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 8, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14 . Various performance controls during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/blinking the frame LED 9 and decorative LEDs, are executed by the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., a determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be explained. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1, for example. The pachinko game machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a firing control board, an interface board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A, a second starting port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected to the effect control board 12, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R and frame LED 9 are connected, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a main side control board, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, it is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in the board case 21TM201, and controls the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. It is equipped with various circuits for control. The main board 11 is mainly used for a function of setting random numbers used in the special figure game, a function of inputting signals from switches arranged at predetermined positions, and a sub-side control board consisting of an effect control board 12, etc. , a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and controls the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , and control the variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting/extinguishing/coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has control functions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and various winning information regarding winnings is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 is equipped with a microcomputer 100 for game control, which receives detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, as well as various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal. A switch circuit 110 for transmitting data to the terminal board 21TM016, and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

The main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, as shown in FIG. 9-3, and a display monitor 21TM029 is placed in the center of the main board 11. (for example, 7 segments), and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewed visually. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is open. This is the front when viewed visually, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) controls each winning opening (big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entering area") The number of game balls entering the game ball is tallied, and various winning information such as consecutive ratios and hand ratios based on the tally is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and this winning information is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to check various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the gaming hall. In other words, the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1 usually designs the game board surface so that the game ball enters the general winning hole at a predetermined frequency (so as to pass the test). In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether the game ball enters the general winning hole at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is checked what kind of adjustments have been made and whether the game balls are entering the general prize opening as often as designed as a result of the adjustments. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to the pachinko game machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and on the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, settings such as jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later, can be changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 when the pachinko game machine 1 is not supplied with power supply voltage, a clerk at the game parlor or the like operates the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, etc. operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) to be described later is performed. executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, power-on operation and initialization operation can be easily performed.

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened. It can only be operated by a store clerk who has a designated key. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, only the clerk at the game parlor who has a key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 is allowed to operate the lock switch 21TM051. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by using a predetermined key, but it is also possible to execute this switching operation and also to perform an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a push operation). It may be a possible switch.

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or OFF state even if no force is applied by an employee of the game parlor or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is configured such that a key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game parlor must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. You can prevent this from happening.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, at the bottom of the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, there are holes for discharging game balls that have entered each winning hole and game balls that have entered the out hole to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and within the nozzle is provided a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting game balls discharged from the pachinko game machine 1 (detecting fired game balls). ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

Control signals transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 are relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a production control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, frame LEDs 9, and decorations. Contains LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of LEDs.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and includes at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I/O port, etc. constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a payout control CPU21TM371, a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Further, the I/O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the bulb out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number counting switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number counting switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 includes a gaming machine frame open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and a gaming machine frame opening sensor that allows the front surface of the gaming board 2 to be opened and closed. A gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 comprising a door frame open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the frame is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine if an error has occurred. Note that the detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is capable of distinguishing and recognizing the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor that includes a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that game balls are jammed, that is, so-called ball biting. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 detects that the detection signal from the bulb out switch 21TM187 indicates the bulb is out, and the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank. and stops the ball payout process.

Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets a low level to the firing board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball firing from the batted ball firing device. Outputs a full tank signal. A firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one input side of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the ejection board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the ejection motor 21TM094) A signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting and outputting (sending and receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the microcomputer 100 for game control and the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control are connected via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted and received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) to confirm the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and sends a signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, it transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) notifying that to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and A ball request signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, it sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by differentiating a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and uses the set received ACK signal to play the game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (such as a ball borrowed, full tank, or out of ball error) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is changed. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of rented balls to the terminal boards (an external terminal board for the frame and an external terminal board for the board) via the output port 21TM372b. )21TM160. Note that a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but its illustration is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Furthermore, a signal for instructing lighting/extinguishment is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out of ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. Note that a detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Furthermore, the drive signal from the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Note that a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but its illustration is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine is equipped with a card unit control microcomputer. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connection stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball rental LED 21TM061, a ball rental switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

A ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are provided from the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050 in response to the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending possible display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball rental switch is operated and the ball rental switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to send a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on, upon receiving a payout command signal from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power is supplied from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided on the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. This will be prevented.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value. In detail, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. . The set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the most advantageous for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

FIGS. 9-4(A) to 9-4(F) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each setting value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. Each display result determination table has two cases: the variable special symbol designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, a determination value for determining a jackpot is set for each case where the second special symbol is subject to variable display.

As shown in Figure 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 1, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display. If the set value is ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', or ``6'', the probability of winning the jackpot will be lower (1/300). ing. In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/300) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in Figure 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/280) than in other cases. In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/280) than when the number is "2". In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 4, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", There is a higher probability (1/250) of winning the jackpot than in the case of "2" or "3". In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/250) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/235) than when the numbers are "2", "3", or "4". In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/235) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", The probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/220) than when the numbers are "2", "3", "4", or "5". In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second special symbol Even when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the subject of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot A to jackpot F). That is, winning the jackpot is determined with probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot. In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether to use the jackpot symbol or not.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F) to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. A common table is used to determine the jackpot in the case where the first special symbol is a variable display and the case where the second special symbol is a variable display, regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Good too.

In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The number of setting values that can be set may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion effect)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the setting value to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends depending on the specified setting value. FIGS. 9-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. Figure 9-5 (1) is an example where a "sunny" ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen, and Figure 9-5 (2) is an example where a "cloudy" ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the "rain" style ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 9-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 sends a setting command specifying a setting value to the production control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits a performance control command for executing an ending performance on the image display device 5 to the performance control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting values by storing the setting values specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on an effect control command that is sent when the jackpot gaming state ends, the image display device 5 stores it together with characters that notify that the jackpot gaming state has ended (the characters "BONUS END"). It becomes possible to display the ending image in a mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the setting values.

The table shown in Figure 9-5 (4) shows cases where the setting value specified by the setting command is "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , respectively, when the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), when the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (2), and when the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 5(3), a determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the production control CPU 120 suggests the setting of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium rate (for example, 40%), and (for example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the production control CPU 120 sets the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and at a medium level. (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the production control CPU 120 sets the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), and at a medium rate. (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by varying the determination ratio of each aspect of the setting suggestion performance depending on the setting value, the player becomes interested in the manner in which the setting suggestion performance is executed, and the setting suggestion It is possible to improve the interest of the performance. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending effect that is executed when the jackpot game state ends, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect what will happen.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be explained.
FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of a process executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value, for example, one of 0 to 5. (Step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are normal values as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, and six levels of setting values with different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 etc. described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 etc. described above, and the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 etc. described above. The setting value 5 in this example corresponds to the setting value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine manufacturer (before it is installed in the game parlor), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the above regular values is stored in the setting value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. Note that if the data in the setting value storage area is corrupted, the value may not be normal. If the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is checked whether the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting change flag is set when transitioning to a setting change mode to be described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 checks whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether it has been decided that RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state) will be executed, and if the value is 1, it has been decided that RAM clear will be executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, RAM clearing is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, RAM clearing is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and when the power is restored, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the gaming state will be initialized may be made before being controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, or may be notified after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, as will be described later. It is also possible to do so.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine slot 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine slot 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. , it is possible to separately recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Note that the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 sends a detection signal to the game control microcomputer 100 indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. In the case of a configuration in which a detection signal indicating that the By inputting the detection signal, it becomes possible to individually recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process moves to steps S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. When the setting change mode is entered, the setting values can be confirmed and changed, and when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the setting values can be confirmed.

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and no power interruption has occurred during the setting change, ( The setting value can be changed and/or provided that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070). Or confirmation becomes possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is selected. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (sending a setting command), which will be described later, without being controlled by the mode.

In this embodiment, in order to create a state in which change of the setting value is not permitted but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that both conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied through the determination processing in step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is further set based on (3) determining that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As described later, on the condition that the setting value is changed, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed.

As mentioned above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to check or change the setting value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, or there is some kind of unauthorized operation. There is a possibility that the setting value is about to be confirmed or changed by the means. It is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the setting values in such a state, so in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. and setting change mode.

In this embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. However, the control is not limited to this form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and setting change mode will be activated. It is also possible not to control any of them.

On the other hand, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, if both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, the process moves to step S21TM4760 (sending a setting command), which will be described later, without being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, if it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the control is not performed in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760 (described later) (Send configuration command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the values stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , the process moves to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the setting value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, the determination in step S21TM4010 is NO. Then, the process moves to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the conditions for transitioning to setting change mode (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) being met. It will be controlled by the mode. Furthermore, even if the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) (YES in step S21TM4010), if the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that conditions for transition to the setting change mode (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140, which will be described later) are satisfied. In addition, if the setting change mode was being controlled when the previous power-off occurred, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) are satisfied. It turns out.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). .

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 checks whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes from step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, in step S21TM4130, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), in step S21TM4140, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 detects that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal, without executing the processing from step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. A set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the production control CPU 120.

When receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the production control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message saying "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. In addition, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to first turn off the power (power switch 21TM055 is turned OFF) and then transition to a setting change mode when the power is turned on again (power switch 21TM055 is turned ON). notification to prompt the user to perform an operation to change the setting value (confirm the setting value). For example, a message such as "Please turn the power off and on again to enter the setting change mode" is displayed. Incidentally, similar notification may be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop process, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the CPU 103 displays the letter "E" on the display monitor 21TM029, thereby indicating that the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5). Even though there is a possibility, the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode (determined as YES in all steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) are not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not been made. Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on multiple gaming machines, a card unit or a call lamp device installed corresponding to the gaming machine, etc.) be done.

During the loop processing period, the letter "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display included in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a 4 ms wait, excessive heat is prevented from accumulating in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. Furthermore, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, an external device such as a hall computer can detect a predetermined event (in this example, the setting value is a normal value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal). ) may not have occurred, but the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode have not been satisfied and the change to the setting change mode has not occurred.

The loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 will continue until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and if a power outage occurs while changing the settings ( In other words, if the setting changing flag was set when the power was turned on and the determination is YES in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before proceeding to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to confirm the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to transition to setting change mode.

In this embodiment, in order to enter a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state, (3) Three conditions are required: the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied through the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be changed ( (setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) are not met, changes to the set value will not be permitted, and the set value in the set value storage area will not be fixed to the regular value. Therefore, it is not possible to proceed to normal game processing. Therefore, if a negative determination is made in any of the determination processes in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the process moves to the loop process described above (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220).

Once the loop processing (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) has been entered, it will not be possible to proceed to the normal game processing, so the staff at the gaming parlor must first turn off the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then turn it on again. No. In this way, if the conditions for transitioning to setting change mode are not met, turn off the power and make sure all conditions (1) to (3) are met the next time the power is turned on. Then, the setting value is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value in the setting value storage area is determined to be the normal value.

In addition, if any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in a predetermined manner. The light may be emitted in a power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

In this embodiment, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). Two conditions are required: (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even if the following two conditions are satisfied (YES in step S21TM4130), the setting confirmation mode will not be entered. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are met, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), The game is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, but is controlled to a gaming stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220).

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode will be explained using FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the process shown in FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 checks whether the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (in this example, any one of 0 to 5). Step S21TM4510). If a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process moves to step S21TM4530. If the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores "0", which has the lowest jackpot probability, as the regular value in the set value storage area. is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process moves to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530), and then executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power-off processing, the CPU 103 checks whether a power-off signal based on a power-off, including an unexpected power outage, etc., has been input, and if a power-off signal has been input, the CPU 103 interrupts the power supply. Immediately before operation becomes impossible due to a stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the repeated processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the repeated processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is performed), the power supply If a power failure occurs, a data check will be appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display values corresponding to the setting values (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area. Since the staff at the game parlor usually recognizes the range of set values as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as is on the display monitor 21TM029, the staff at the game hall will be able to understand the actual value. There is a risk that the setting value may be recognized incorrectly. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode is controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process moves to step S21TM4680. The performance control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on receiving the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is executed after the mode (setting change mode here) ends, the CPU 103 determines that the setting value has not been changed. A flag indicating that there is a possibility that the setting is being changed is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even if the power is turned off. Therefore, if power is cut off while being controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is set to 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command specifying that the setting change mode is controlled (step S21TM4590). The production control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on receiving the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting changeover switch information indicating whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and checks whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 moves to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Every time the game parlor clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled to the setting change mode (when the power was turned on or when the previous power was turned off) was 3. If so, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area will be updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the setting values will be updated on the display monitor 21TM029. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and send a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650), but send a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) and the state in which the setting value update (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (determined as NO in step S21TM4040, and the RAM clear flag is remains 0).

In addition, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and also to send a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the setting value (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

Note that the setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 sends the setting confirmation mode command, it sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that allows it to be identified that the setting confirmation mode command has been sent and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 sends the setting change mode command, it is configured to set a setting change mode command transmission flag that allows it to be identified that the setting change mode command has been sent and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , when the setting change in progress flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a 4 ms wait (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes from step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

In step S21TM4680, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal will continue to be output until the value of the security signal timer reaches 0ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the normal gaming process is started. will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and when it reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms, regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode The value of the security signal timer is set so that in response to the end of control in any of the modes, the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (it is determined which mode is being controlled). ) is executed as a common process. Furthermore, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is performed regardless of whether the control is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (it is not necessary to determine which mode is controlled). ) is executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by making the security signal output start control and output end control common between the settings change mode and the settings confirmation mode. , the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of a security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the output of the security signal is started in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping the game, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, a common value (1000 ms) is sent to the security signal in the case where the control is in the setting change mode and in the case where the control is in the setting confirmation mode. It's set on a timer. However, if the output start control and output end control of the security signal are made common between when controlled to the setting change mode and when controlled to the setting change mode, it is difficult to select which mode the external device is in. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not it is being controlled.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is sent in step S21TM4710. After setting the timer value to 1000ms, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770, which will be described later, the security signal timer value is reset (overwritten) to 30000ms in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in Figure 9-9 (2). If the control is in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation mode ends. This is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode, and if the setting change mode has been controlled, the timing is when 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, if the control is in the setting confirmation mode (RAM is not cleared and the security signal timer value is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is allowed. In processing (for example, information output processing), the security signal continues to be output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from 1000 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (RAM clearing is performed). (when the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000ms to 0ms in game control timer interrupt processing (for example, information output processing) after permission for interrupts. The security signal will continue to be output until In addition, when the control is in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer changes for a predetermined period of time (1000ms or 30000ms) before proceeding to the game control timer interrupt process. ) to 0ms, and after the output of the security signal is finished, the game control timer interrupt process may be started.

In this way, the security signal will continue to be output for at least 1 sec when the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished and when the control in the setting change mode is finished, and the control is changed to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal will continue to be output until 30 seconds have passed after the control in the setting change mode ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the output control of the security signal and to make the output period of the security signal different between when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the setting change mode is controlled.

As a result, it is also possible to determine whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or whether it is controlled to the setting change mode after the initialization process is executed. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode has been entered without initialization processing being executed, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode has been entered without executing the initialization process. It is possible to estimate that the setting change mode may have been controlled by executing the conversion process.

Note that the security signal is also output when the abnormality detection sensor detects a game stoppage error such as a magnetic abnormality. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until the gaming machine is powered off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area of the RAM 102 (an area cleared by initialization processing) based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored, a security signal is output for 4 minutes.

Here, if the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, RAM clearing is not executed, so the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output process and remains set. It is possible to output the security signal continuously for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to not limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode until one second has elapsed. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is selected when the power is restored, the RAM will be cleared, so the abnormality detection flag will be cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (when the power is turned off). As a result, the output period of the security signal is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have elapsed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second, but this is not the only option. The value of the security signal timer to be set may be at least a period that allows the external device to recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common value of 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process in step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Since the setting changing flag is cleared, if a power outage occurs after this point, it will be determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) when the power is restored. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any one of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in a setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Note that even if the device is not controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of setting values is 1 to 6, and the CPU 120 side for effect control uses the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) as it is in the image. If it is displayed on the display device 5, there is a risk that the player will misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command plus 1 as the setting value (1 to 6), and Within the range, an effect that suggests the set value is executed.

In addition, the CPU 103 is not limited to this form, and the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area to the setting command, and performs production control. The information may also be sent to the CPU 120 for personal use. As a result, the range of setting values specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. The effect control CPU 120 side displays the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command on the image display device 5 as is, or executes an effect that suggests the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command. By doing so, the setting value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Furthermore, it is not necessary for the performance control CPU 120 to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command, and the control burden on the performance control CPU 120 can be reduced.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, the setting value can be suggested by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the setting value to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends depending on the specified setting value.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), which means that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) and the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4010). YES in S21TM4020), and there is no power outage during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and furthermore, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to perform processing at the time of power-off recovery that does not involve clearing the RAM.

If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and executes the game control timer interrupt process (special (including pattern processing, etc.). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the setting confirmation mode control ends, the CPU 103 clears the RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clearing, a backup command is sent as a command at the time of power-off recovery, and a transition is made to normal game processing.

Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the performance control CPU 120 determines that recovery from the power outage has been performed based on the data at the time of power supply interruption (RAM has not been cleared). Recognize the following: Upon receiving the backup command, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 have been restored from the power outage based on the data at the time of the power supply stoppage. It is possible to notify that the RAM has not been cleared.

On the other hand, the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), which means that RAM clear was set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it was decided to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to perform power-on processing that involves clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes processing to set 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer, and processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , After permission for interruption, it is sufficient to proceed to game control timer interruption processing (including special symbol process processing, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, pending memory, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply stop, which is stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is is set, but the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are not cleared and remain unchanged from before the RAM clearing process. In addition, the area where each aggregate value (gaming information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base is stored for each setting value is not cleared, and each aggregate value for each setting value is not cleared. The value remains unchanged from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). Note that by the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, data on the count value of a counter for generating random numbers for normal symbol hit determination) is initialized to 0, but any value or predetermined value may be initialized. It may be initialized to . Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data on the count value of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol hit determination) may be left as is.

The reason why the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are not cleared in this RAM clearing process is as follows: (a) If the setting value storage area is not controlled by the setting change mode, the normal value will not be stored in the setting value storage area when the power is turned on. (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if the setting change mode is controlled, the value in the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or the value in the setting change mode is This is because a normal value is stored due to the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, the setting change mode cannot be controlled and there is no opportunity to change the values stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 in a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). Through the processing in step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a buffer for storing the total number of prize balls, a special symbol process flag, etc., are set to flags for selectively processing according to the control state. Initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, a jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command specifying that the initialization process was performed when the power was turned on (or when the setting change mode ended) (step S21TM1460). The performance control CPU 120 determines that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of this initialization command (RAM clearing has been performed without recovery from power failure based on the data at the time of power supply failure). be aware of what happened). When the performance control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the game state etc. have been initialized in the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 (data at the time of power supply stop). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovery from a power outage based on the following.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value of the security signal timer (1 second) that was set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Furthermore, if RAM clearing is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). The value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being performed. On the other hand, if RAM clearing is not executed (including when controlled to setting confirmation mode), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second set in step S21TM4710. It remains as it is.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, a security signal will be output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process), After that, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 executes a setting process for the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

Next, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). For example, the CPU 103 performs settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt occurs periodically every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, it is set to the interrupt disabled state (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, it is set to the interrupt enabled state. settings (step S21TM1540). Thereby, the game control timer interrupt process is shifted to the normal game process that can be executed. In this example, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a jackpot, or a random number for determining whether to set it as a reach when it is not a jackpot, and is a random number for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating display random numbers. In addition, the initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of a counter for generating the initial value random number. In this example, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of a counter (random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) for generating random numbers for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit. It is a random number to A game control process that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices provided in the game machine, such as the performance display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device) by itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer (also referred to as gaming machine control process), the count value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination When the counter is incremented by the number of numeric values between the minimum and maximum possible values), the initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. The process moves to the power-off recovery process without confirmation (regardless of the status of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), but the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), on the condition that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). ), the process may be shifted to the processing at the time of power-off recovery.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without checking (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process moves to the power-on process (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)), but in this form, However, if it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the condition is that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (gaming machine frame 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may proceed to the process when the power is turned on (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

As described above, when turning on the power, the clerk of the game parlor, etc. turns on the lock switch 21TM051 and turns on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, thereby putting the pachinko game machine 1 into the setting change mode. In addition to being able to control the game, it is also possible to initialize the gaming state, etc. (to execute RAM clearing). Moreover, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and also control the gaming state etc. It becomes possible to not initialize the RAM clear flag (not to set the RAM clear flag to 1 by making a NO determination in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). In this way, the clerk at the game parlor can select whether to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state, etc. There is.

As mentioned above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was set when the power was turned off, so the setting values are unstable. There is a possibility that the setting value that the game parlor is trying to confirm is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal gaming process based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), but puts the game in a stopped state (step A loop process from S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) can be controlled, and a security signal is output in response to the control to the gaming stop state (step S21TM4220).

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from starting with unstable set values (the timer interrupt processing for game control is executed), and also to prevent the power from being turned on when the power is turned on. When a power failure occurs, it is possible to notify an external device that the controller is in the setting change mode.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 sets the conditions ( If all of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES, a set value abnormality error command is sent (step S21TM4190), and the display monitor is activated in the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). An error message is displayed in 21TM029 by displaying the letter "E" (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality has occurred to the clerk at the game hall (in the setting change mode). This clearly indicates that a power outage may have occurred while the system was under control. In addition, upon receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the production control CPU 120 displays a message on the image display device 5 saying, "Please turn the power back on after the power is turned off and shift to the setting change mode." A store clerk, etc., must first turn off the power (power switch 21TM055 is turned OFF), and then when the power is turned back on (power switch 21TM055 is turned ON), the operation is to change the settings by changing the settings to the setting change mode. A notification is issued to prompt the user to perform the following steps (confirm the setting value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode are satisfied, that is, (i) when the gaming machine frame 3 is It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If the determination is YES), the setting change mode is entered. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the production control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after turning off the power. "Please move to setting change mode") will not be performed.

Here, the production control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) confirms that the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), it is possible to notify that the setting value can be changed. For example, it is possible to display a message on the image display device 5 such as "You are in setting change mode" or "Please perform a setting change operation to change the setting value." As a result, the staff of the game hall can understand that the control is in the setting change mode, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area can be changed. By changing the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing it to the planned setting value, the setting value can be confirmed and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition conditions for controlling to the setting change mode are not satisfied, that is, if any of the above (i) to (iii) If any of the conditions is not satisfied, the game is not controlled to the setting change mode, but is controlled to the gaming stop state (loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) after sending the setting value abnormal error command (step S21TM4190). . As a result, an error display is executed on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029), and a message is displayed on the production control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after turning off the power. "Please enter the settings change mode").

In this way, an error display is executed on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029), and a message is displayed on the production control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. ”) is also performed, the condition of the gaming machine is that even though the power was cut off during the settings change mode, the conditions for transitioning to the settings change mode after the power is restored are It will be reported that the condition is not established. In this case, the staff at the gaming parlor understands that the game is not being controlled by the setting change mode and is in a stopped state (it is necessary to turn the power back on to change the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off, the power is turned on again by performing operations such that conditions (i) to (iii) for transition to the setting change mode are all satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF. By switching to this state, the set value can be determined and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to normal game processing.

In this way, if a power failure occurs in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, in case (a) where the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are met when the power is restored, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed. This means that the setting change mode is automatically entered without being interrupted, and unnecessary error displays can be avoided and changes to the setting values can be appropriately prompted.

On the other hand, in case (b) where the conditions for transitioning to the settings change mode are not met when the power is restored, the system cannot transition to the settings change mode when the power is restored even though a power outage occurred during the settings change mode. Therefore, the game is forcibly controlled to a stopped state (loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is It will be done. Thereby, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not determined, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

Note that if the settings change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), if all of the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transitioning to the settings change mode are satisfied, and if the transition condition (i) ) to (iii) may not hold, a different command may be sent as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition conditions are met, the command indicates that the setting value may be abnormal, and the mode has been transitioned to setting change mode (or the conditions for transition are satisfied). When the production control CPU 120 receives this command, it displays the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "You will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode" as an image. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to send the setting value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the transition to normal game processing occurs, when the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated. (changed from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 to the performance control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch )21TM052 is operated (changed from OFF state to ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from game control microcomputer 100 to production control CPU 120.

The production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) is controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on receiving the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation to change a setting value has been performed even though the setting value has not been set, and to notify that fact. For example, based on reception of a lock switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification is executed to display the words "Lock switch operation has been detected" on the image display device 5. Furthermore, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification is executed to display the words "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." As a result, game parlor staff, etc. can clearly understand that an operation to change the setting value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can prevent unauthorized use. You can check whether this is being done.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to normal game processing, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated or not. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without checking whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game processing (timer interrupt processing for game control) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for checking the setting value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine slot 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120); ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), the setting change mode is entered (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not only in this form, but as shown in Figure 9-11, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are met. It is also possible to set the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150) and shift to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without checking whether this is true.

In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) or if the setting value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the settings are changed. The process is different from the process shown in FIG. 9-6 in that it is controlled in the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and is not controlled in the game stop state (processing corresponding to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). The other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in this case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting change mode is entered based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of a game machine when a power failure occurs during a change.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the setting change mode is set (NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value in the setting value storage area can be changed.) On the other hand, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether the three conditions are satisfied or not, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power outage occurs while the control is in the settings change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) will be applied based on the fact that the settings change flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically being controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting value is established, it is possible to improve the work efficiency for determining the setting value.

Here, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting It will be controlled by the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state. (Steps S21TM4610 to S21TM4620 in FIG. 9-7).

As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the clerk at the game parlor who has performed the operation to change the setting value must first turn the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state in order to confirm the setting value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the conditions for starting control in the setting change mode are determined depending on whether the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). While the conditions for terminating the control in the setting change mode are made different, the conditions for terminating the control in the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common, thereby clarifying the conditions for terminating the control in the setting change mode. The game is appropriately transitioned to normal game processing.

Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030), a notification prompting the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned on may be provided. good. For example, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150, and sends a setting value abnormal error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). After receiving the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110), the production control CPU 120 says, "Turn the lock switch ON once, and then switch it OFF after changing the set value." The message may also be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and FIG. 9-11, it is not possible to proceed to the normal game process while the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the game machine manufacturer ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before it is installed in the game hall), it is possible to set the setting change flag in advance. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is ended, the pachinko game machine 1 cannot be played. Thereby, when installing the pachinko game machine 1 at a game parlor, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform a setting change operation, and take measures to confirm the set value.

(Set value memory control in case of power outage while changing set values)
Next, setting value storage control when a power outage occurs while changing a setting value will be explained using FIGS. 9-12. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed.

First, FIG. 9 shows the control when the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode). This will be explained using -12(1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is stored as the setting value in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and 1 is added to the read setting value. The sum of "1" will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is set to "0" based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. "2" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the set value after the change. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state. Furthermore, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area becomes "1". is changed to "2", and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation to end the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored in the setting value storage area. In the power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is the value that was stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, as the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and 1 is added to the read setting value. The sum of "3" will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Note that when the power is turned on in order 6, the setting change flag is set, so when applying the control shown in Figure 9-11, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in order 6 and order 7 may be in the OFF state.

In this way, if the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off (without terminating the setting change mode), when the power is restored, , the setting value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the planned setting values may have already been set, and in this case, the arcade staff can exit the setting change mode without having to perform an operation to change the setting values again. Since it is only necessary to shift the game machine to normal game processing by using the above command, work efficiency can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the setting value change operation is performed during the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends), This will be explained using FIG. 9-12 (2).

Orders 1 to 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-12(1), and their explanation will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, thereby ending the setting change mode. As a result, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3", which is the determined set value plus 1, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, an operation is performed to turn off the power switch 21TM055, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and 1 is added to the read setting value. The sum of "3" will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

As shown in Figure 9-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the settings change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the settings change mode is controlled. In either case, when the power is restored, the setting values that have been changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the setting values that were stored in the setting value storage area immediately before the power was turned off, are restored. , is a valid setting value (the setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

Note that the storage control of setting values is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 9-12. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is activated. 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is ended (turning on the lock switch 21TM051). The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area, and the setting value is confirmed based on the fact that an operation for switching from the state to the OFF state has been performed. It's okay. In this case, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. According to the change in the setting value stored in the display monitor 21TM029, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 will also change.

With such a configuration, even if the power is turned on and the setting change mode is activated and a setting change operation is performed (the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the settings will not be changed. If the power is cut off without completing the operation to end the change mode (without the lock switch 21TM051 being switched to the OFF state), the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 will be lost to the power supply. This means that it has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the setting values that were stored in the setting value storage area when the power was last turned on are still held. Therefore, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode after the power is restored are stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was last turned on. The value corresponds to the setting value that was previously set.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value in the event that power is cut off while the device is controlled in the setting change mode. Furthermore, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, changes to the set value can be restricted.

The controls related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiments are provided for a gaming machine that has a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) and has different jackpot probabilities depending on the setting values. This is applicable, but is not limited to this.Although multiple setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is the same regardless of the setting value (for example, for all setting values 0 to 5) It is also applicable to gaming machines (where the jackpot probability is 1/300).

Furthermore, the following invention is disclosed in this feature section 21TM.

As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Furthermore, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "jackpot signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding gaming machines such as those described in JP-A No. 2010-200902 (Paragraph 0007), when changing setting values, etc., it is necessary for the external device to understand the control state related to the settings. However, even if the conventional gaming machine signal output technology described in JP-A-2014-200506 (Paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to understand this. be. The inventions related to means O1 to means O4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately notify the outside of the gaming machine of the control state related to the settings.

The gaming machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination). ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed;
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode in which setting values can be confirmed;
Specific signal output means (gaming control microcomputer 100 that outputs the security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode; ,
A setting means (gaming control microcomputer 100 that sets the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value related to the period during which the specific signal is output (value of the security signal timer),
The setting means is capable of setting a common predetermined value when controlled to the setting change mode and when controlled to the setting confirmation mode (setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value has elapsed in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in the setting confirmation mode). When the setting confirmation mode ends, the security signal will continue to be output until 1 second has elapsed from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting change mode has ended, the security signal will continue to be output until 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode. do)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the settings can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Initialization means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150),
The initializing means initializes the gaming state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (in the case of being controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clearing is executed after being controlled to the setting change mode);
The setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value after setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). (If RAM clearing is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of the control in the settings change mode until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses (from the end of the settings change mode due to the end of the settings change mode). (The security signal will continue to be output until 30 seconds have passed.)
It is characterized by
According to this, a specific signal is output for at least a period corresponding to a predetermined value in both cases when control in the setting change mode ends and when control in the setting confirmation mode ends. When the mode is controlled, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so while the setting process by the setting means is standardized, different outputs are output in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. It becomes possible to set a period.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without a specific operation (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680) to end the setting change mode. In the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting changing mode, and the setting changing mode is terminated. A game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on this,
When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored) ), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off, based on the fact that the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are not satisfied). It is characterized by being able to.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The gaming machine of means O4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes game control timer interrupt processing) that controls the progress of the game;
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for controlling execution of the performance,
The game control means is
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
The setting change mode control means (gaming control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation to end the setting change mode (without detecting an operation to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). In the backup area of the specific information storage means (RAM 102) that stores specific information when the mode is stopped, a setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and when the setting change mode has ended, a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 based on the
When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored) ), it is possible to execute an error notification in the display means and send an error command to the production control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and the display monitor is displayed in error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter “E” on 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the production control means issues a notification prompting an operation to change the setting value (the image display device 5 displays the message "After the power is turned off, turn the power back on and enter the setting change mode"). Please let me migrate." message will be displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the staff at the gaming parlor, and the operator can be prompted to perform an operation to change the setting value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in JP-A No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a setting value. The inventions related to means P1 to means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. It is about providing.

The gaming machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination). ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can identify that the setting change mode is controlled (a setting change in progress flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated) a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above;
The specific information storage means is capable of storing the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102);
When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored) The present invention is characterized by further comprising an error notification means (game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error display in step S21TM4210 when the conditions for transition to the setting change mode are not satisfied) capable of executing error notification (in case of the above). .
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change conditions are satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (the setting The setting change mode can be controlled based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 being in the ON state;
When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored) ), the setting change mode can be controlled without executing the error notification based on the setting change condition being met (when the power is turned on, all steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 Based on the determination of YES, the process moves to the setting change mode without moving to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the conditions for controlling to the setting change mode are met, the setting change mode is controlled without executing an error notification, thereby avoiding unnecessary error notifications and appropriately changing the setting value. Can encourage change.

The gaming machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored) (If the conditions for transition to the setting change mode are not met when the power is turned on, the error notification is executed and the game is stopped. If the determination is NO in step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without moving to setting change mode)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of means P4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes game control timer interrupt processing) that controls the progress of the game;
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for controlling execution of the performance,
The game control means is
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
The setting change mode control means (gaming control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
and the specific information storage means,
When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored) ), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and send an error command to the production control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and the error notification is displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter “E” on monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the production control means issues a notification prompting an operation to change the setting value (the image display device 5 displays the message "After the power is turned off, turn the power back on and enter the setting change mode"). Please let me migrate." message will be displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the staff at the gaming parlor, and the operator can be prompted to perform an operation to change the setting value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in JP-A-2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a setting value. The inventions related to Means Q1 to Means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. It's about doing.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination). ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can identify that the setting change mode is controlled (a setting change in progress flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated) a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above;
The specific information storage means is capable of storing the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102);
The setting change mode control means is configured to control when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration) when power supply to the gaming machine is started. control to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is in the ON state). (Settings changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, which is automatically controlled to setting change mode, regardless of whether the condition for moving to setting change mode is met or not.)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined when power supply is stopped in the setting change mode that involves initialization of the gaming state.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, the RAM It may further include a game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410).

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means is configured to control the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Control is made to the setting change mode (if the setting changing flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Yes, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). If the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied, and if the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the Control to setting change mode (if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the conditions for transitioning to setting change mode are met or not, (automatically controls the setting change mode).
According to this, if a power outage occurs during setting change mode control, based on the fact that specific information is stored when the power is restored, the setting change mode will be activated even when the setting change conditions are not met. Since it is controlled, work efficiency can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
The gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the setting changing flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine slot 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. It is possible to control to the setting change mode based on the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode (that is, 1) is executed), and when controlled to the setting change mode. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on a specific operation (confirming that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680),
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when controlled to the setting change mode (sets a setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), and stores the specific information when controlled to the setting change mode (sets a setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), erase the specific information when the setting change mode ends based on (clear the setting change flag at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends);
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change mode control means changes the setting change mode to the specified information regardless of whether or not the transition operation has been performed. Control is performed to set the setting change mode (if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are satisfied or not. automatically control the setting change mode), and terminate the setting change mode based on the specific operation (terminate the setting change mode based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680) )
It is characterized by
According to this, the conditions for terminating the control in the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
Equipped with a setting value storage means (a setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting values are stored) for storing the setting values (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage means,
The setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the changing operation when the setting change mode is controlled (if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610) change the setting values stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled in the setting change mode (when it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680). exit the settings change mode based on the
The setting value storage means may be configured to change the setting value by the changing operation in the setting changing mode when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed when the gaming machine is controlled in the setting changing mode. (The setting value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is stored continuously. The settings stored in the settings themselves will be changed, so even if the power is cut off during settings change mode, the settings after the changes are retained.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is resumed, the set value changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power outage is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value according to the set value is stored in the set value storage means. Since control is executed, work efficiency can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
Equipped with a setting value storage means (a setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting values are stored) for storing the setting values (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage means,
The setting change mode control means performs a change operation when controlled in the setting change mode (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area). (changing only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the setting value currently stored), and changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on a specific operation after the changing operation; The setting change mode is ended (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area) to confirm the settings as valid settings and exit the settings change mode).
The setting value storage means is configured to perform the changing operation in the setting changing mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed when the gaming machine is controlled in the setting changing mode. (If the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area will be saved.) is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled by setting change mode will be retained.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 052IW)
Next, the characteristic part 052IW will be explained. First, the gaming state in this feature section 052IW will be explained. First, the gaming states in this feature section 052IW include a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small win time) where small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, the first KT state and the second KT state, and in this characteristic part 052IW, the gaming state includes a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state). There are two cases: controlled to a low probability and first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and controlled to a high probability and first KT state (high probability/first KT state). , and may be controlled to a high probability and second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

Of the KT states, in the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is open for an extremely long time, and a small hit is likely to occur. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases in which a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to be in a state where small hits are likely to occur, and it is also controlled to be in a high base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In addition, in the second KT state, as described later, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to be in a state where small hits are likely to occur, and it is also controlled to be in a low base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be short.

Furthermore, the KT state is a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in this characteristic part 052IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state due to a hit is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. Then, when the first special symbol changes, the percentage of small hits is determined to be low, while when the second special symbol changes, the percentage of small wins is determined to be high (however, as will be described later). (excluding the case of a forced loss), the KT state is a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits occur frequently mainly by changing the second special symbol, resulting in a gaming state advantageous to the player.

Note that the configuration for making the KT state a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state due to a normal symbol is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes By configuring the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain period of time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may also be possible to create a gaming state in which it is easier to win a small hit.

In addition, this feature section 052IW is configured such that the time required from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 until it reaches the variable prize winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group that forms the falling path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, in this characteristic part 052IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, and in the first KT state described later, the game ball passes through. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, it reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Since this is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, if one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state and the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, The game balls can be entered into the variable winning ball device 6B as they are.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in this feature part 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 052IW108 that is formed as the bottom of the channel through which the game balls flow. By moving the bottom member 052IW108 backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward, the grand prize opening which becomes the winning area is brought into the open state. The game ball that has entered the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the game ball that has won in the big winning hole is further guided to a guide path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guide route 052IW100 further branches into two routes 052IW102, 103, and the game ball guided to the guide route 052IW100 is guided to the left route 052IW102 or the right route 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball enters the ejection area 052IW105 and is detected by the ejection area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left route 052IW102, and when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the open state, the game guided to the guiding route 052IW100 The ball enters the left path 052IW102 and can enter the V area 052IW104. Further, when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guide path 052IW100 enters the right side path 052IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the game area.

In addition, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the jackpot game is controlled, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106, and after the jackpot game ends. Controlled in a variable state.

Note that the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the ejection area switch 052IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In this case, it may be determined that there is a large winning opening input/output mismatch error, and the configuration may be configured to notify the error. In this case, since it takes a certain amount of time for the winning game ball to reach the V area 052IW104 or the ejection area 052IW105 just before the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, it may be configured to determine that there is a large winning hole input/output mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in this feature section 052IW. In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 23 and the second count switch 24)), the detection signals from the V area switch 052IW106 and the discharge area switch 052IW107 are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 81 for the big prize opening door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special prize opening, it is transmitted to the solenoid 052IW109 for the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101.

(Jackpot probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and small win probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 10-3 shows the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 10-4 shows the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, this example shows a configuration in which the settings can be changed in six steps from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the settings can be changed in 6 stages, but may be configured so that the settings can be changed in 2 to 5 stages, or the settings can be changed in 7 stages or more, for example.

First, using FIG. 10-3, the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be explained. In the example shown in Figure 10-3 (A), in the non-probability variable state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "247/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players. In addition, in the example shown in Figure 10-3 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the overall probability of winning the jackpot is 10 times higher than in the non-variable state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is the lowest, "2050/65536", and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2470/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in Figures 10-3 (A) and (B), regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", The small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536" regardless of whether the state is a variable state (state) or a variable probability state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining a small hit is common regardless of the setting value, and is common between the non-probability variable state and the probability variable state. Even if the configuration is such that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value while the small hit probability remains constant, the miss probability By varying the set values from "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be configured to match.

Next, using FIG. 10-4, the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be explained. In the example shown in Figure 10-4 (A), in the variable probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "247/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players. In addition, in the example shown in Figure 10-4 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the overall probability of winning the jackpot is 10 times higher than in the non-variable state (low probability state), and the setting When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is the lowest, "2050/65536", and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2470/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in Figures 10-4 (A) and (B), regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", The small hit probability is constant at "62986/65536" regardless of whether the state is a variable state (state) or a variable probability state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining a small hit is common regardless of the setting value, and is common between the non-probability variable state and the probability variable state. However, in this example, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 10-4), the small hit is smaller than when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 10-3). The winning probability is approximately 10 times higher (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the same as the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the first special symbol). (more than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even if the configuration is such that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value while the small hit probability remains constant, the miss probability will vary as shown in Figures 10-4 (A) and (B). By varying the set values from "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be configured to match.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the judgment value corresponding to the deviation is included in the judgment values corresponding to all the setting values "1" to "6" (Fig. -3 and as shown in Figure 10-4, there is no set value for which the probability of failure is 0). The judgment value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the setting value (as shown in Figures 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which of the setting values "1" to "6" , the probability of failure is different).

Note that the configuration is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured such that, for example, there is a case where the probability of failure is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to failure). For example, with the setting value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the probability of losing is 0, and the configuration may be such that the determination value corresponding to the loss is not included.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured such that, for example, there is a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include a judgment value corresponding to a small win). For example, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol (Figure 10-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0, and the judgment value for the small hit may not be included. good.

In addition, in Figures 10-3 (A), (B) and Figures 10-4 (A), (B), the small hit probability is the same in the variable probability state (high probability state) and the variable probability state (low probability state). The probabilities of winning and losing are different, but the probability of a small hit is higher in a variable state (high probability state) than in a variable state (low probability state) because the probability of a jackpot is higher in a variable state (high probability state) than in a variable state (low probability state). It is also possible to lower the probability of failure and match the probability of failure. Furthermore, even if the set values are different, for example "1" and "2", the jackpot probability and the small win probability may be made to match each other. As a result, in gaming machines that have less than 6 actual settable stages or where there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, the hardware/software configuration of gaming machines that have a 6-step setting change function and can be standardized, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIGS. 10-5 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table determines the type of jackpot as "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variable jackpot", "2R regular jackpot", " This is a table that is referred to in order to determine either "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variable jackpot", or "10R probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", A ``10R probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 9%, a ``6R probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a 56% probability, and a ``6R normal jackpot'' is determined with a 35% probability. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-5(B), in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing a variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", has a 10% probability of determining a "10R probability variable jackpot", a 50% probability of determining a "6R probability variation jackpot", a 5% probability of determining a "2R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% probability of " 2R Normal Jackpot”.

"10R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 16 rounds and then shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Moreover, the "6R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 6 rounds and then shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to be in a jackpot gaming state for 6 rounds, and then shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Moreover, "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then controlled to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

In this characteristic part 052IW, in the case of a "10R definite strange jackpot", "6R sure strange jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot", a predetermined period (in this example, 30 seconds) passes in each round of the jackpot game. The grand prize opening is controlled to be open until a fixed number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and it is possible to enter a maximum of 10 winning holes in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R guaranteed strange jackpot" and "2R normal jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the jackpot game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when ending the jackpot game, it is controlled to be in either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state depending on the gaming state before the jackpot game and the jackpot type. The manner of transition of the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type determination table)
FIGS. 10-6 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table determines the type of small win as "small win A" or "small win B" based on the random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a small win symbol. ” or “Small win C”.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(A), in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", "Small win A" is determined with 100% probability. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6(B), in this feature part 052IW, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, is determined to be a "small win B" with a probability of 70%, and determined to be a "small win C" with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small win A", the special winning opening is opened for only an extremely short 0.2 seconds during the small win game (see Figure 10-12), and the small win game There is almost no expectation that the game ball will enter the special prize opening. In addition, in the case of "small win B", the special winning hole is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small winning game (see Figure 10-13), and the game ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. can be expected to some extent. In addition, in the case of "small win C", the special winning hole is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small winning game (see Figure 10-14), and the game ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. can be most expected.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in this characteristic portion 052IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 is the second byte data of the production control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, there are nine types of first variation patterns #01 to #09 for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. Thirty-four types, #01 to #34, are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the variation pattern #n (n=01-09 or 01-34) is used, it means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When performing a variable display of the first special symbol, if it is in a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern for non-KT times shown in Figure 10-7 (A) A table is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the first variable patterns #01 to #06 is determined.

When performing a variable display of the first special symbol, if it is in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), the The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT time shown in the table is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, one of the first variable patterns #07 to #09 is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern for non-KT times shown in Figure 10-8 (C) A table is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the second variable patterns #01 to #03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined that the winning pattern is a loss, the second fluctuation pattern #01 is determined, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when a small hit is determined, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when a jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a fairly long period of time, such as 5 minutes.

In this feature part 052IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation arises in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by entering the game ball into the special winning hole. It ends up. Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the variable display is By reducing this, the frequency of occurrence of small hits is reduced, thereby preventing a situation where players are targeted to obtain prize balls due to small hits even though they are in a non-KT state. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the "occurrence frequency of small winnings" is, for example, the occurrence rate of small winnings per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, the small winning frequency per unit time. The incidence rate is higher than normal.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time will be changed even if it is a jackpot. By making the time period relatively long at 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally aiming for the prize ball by entering the special prize opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a jackpot, it is not necessary to take as long to digest the first retention memory as compared to the case of a small win, so the structure is configured so that the fluctuation time is shorter than in the case of a small win. There is.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in a low probability/first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/first KT state will be terminated. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. In this case, if the first variation is to be displayed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/first KT time and first variation shown in Figure 10-8(D) is selected and the variation is changed. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(D), when the second special symbol is displayed as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #04 to #06 is executed. determined.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #04, which is a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, is selected. It is determined. In addition, when determining a small win as the first variation in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #05 (second starting prize opening opening), which has a relatively long variation time of 7 seconds for a small win, Preparatory variation pattern) is determined. In this feature part 052IW, as already explained, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, special variable winnings are actually achieved. The special prize opening in the ball device 17 is set so that prizes are rarely won. However, in the state immediately after transitioning to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball immediately If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will enter the special winning hole. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by ensuring a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and special variable winning ball device 17 are activated before shifting to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, and enabling winning to the special winning opening. This prevents the occurrence of a situation where more prize balls than expected are obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when a jackpot is determined as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for two minutes.

Also, if you want to execute the 2nd to 49th variation display after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state, then The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low probability/first KT time and 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in E) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8(E), when the second special symbol is displayed as the second to 49th variations in the low probability/first KT state, the second variation patterns #07 to #13 are It will be decided either way. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), if it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability/1st KT state are unsuccessful, the second fluctuation pattern # of shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected. 07, or the second variation pattern #08, which is a shortened variation with an even shorter variation time of 1 second, may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. In addition, if a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #10 is a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or the variation pattern is even shorter with a variation time of 1 second. The second variation pattern #11 of the shortening variation may be determined. On the other hand, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability/first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #07 and #10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when no second reservation memory is stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #08 and #11 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second reservation memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when This makes it possible to speed up the use of reserved memory and increase the operating rate. Furthermore, when determining a jackpot as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability/first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

In addition, after completing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state, the 50th variation display (i.e., the final variation in the low probability/1st KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/1st KT time and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8(F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when the second special symbol is displayed as the 50th variation in the low probability/1st KT state, any of the second variation patterns #14 to #16 determined.

In this feature section 052IW, when the state is controlled to be in the low probability/first KT state, for example, a character display such as "Chance Time in progress" is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when it is determined that the 50th change in the low probability/1st KT state is a loss or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays text such as "Chance time is over!!" The second variation pattern #14 or the second variation pattern #15 with an end display for performing the above is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when determining a jackpot as the 50th change in the low probability/1st KT state, the image display device 5 displays text such as "Chance time is over!!" The second variation pattern #16 is determined to include a predetermined resurrection display after the termination display.

In addition, in this feature section 052IW, as shown in Figure 10-7, if the first special symbol fluctuates and hits the jackpot during the KT state, the first fluctuating pattern #07 with a fluctuating time of 10 seconds is displayed. configured to make a decision. This is a case where a jackpot immediately occurs due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after transitioning to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is made to be a long fluctuation time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced miss, forced misses occur frequently despite the second KT state, and the player receives a small hit. You will not receive any benefit from it. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, by making the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol a short fluctuation time, the transition to the jackpot game state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is made before forced misses occur frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike this feature part 052IW, even if the variation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first If the machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly missed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol's jackpot during the KT state. may be a long variable time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately after shifting to the second KT state due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is made the same short fluctuation time as the loss, the player You will not be able to receive any profits from small winnings. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol during the KT state is set to a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there will be enough time for the small hit to occur at least multiple times. (for example, 1 minute).

When performing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability/first KT state, the fluctuation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state A variation pattern table is selected depending on the number of times. In this case, if the first variation is to be displayed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability/first KT time and first variation shown in Figure 10-9(G) is selected and the variation is changed. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the second special symbol is displayed as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #17 to #21 determined.

As with the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, as shown in Figure 10-9 (G), the variation time is also determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state The second variation pattern #17, which is a short variation of 5 seconds, may be determined. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #18 with reach may be determined. Furthermore, even when a small win is determined as the first fluctuation in the high probability/first KT state, the fluctuation pattern for preparing to open the second starting prize opening (second fluctuation pattern #19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when determining a jackpot as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #21 with reach is determined.

In addition, if you want to display the second and subsequent fluctuations after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state, the high probability shown in Figure 10-9 (H) The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for probability/first KT and after the second fluctuation is selected and a fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when the second special symbol is displayed as the second variation or later in the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #22 to #28 Determined by

As with the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/1st KT state, as shown in Figure 10-9 (H), when determining that it is a failure after the 2nd fluctuation of the high probability/1st KT state, The second variation pattern #22 of a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or the second variation pattern #23 of a shortened variation with an even shorter variation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second variation or later in the high probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #24 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #25 with a short variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or the short variation pattern #25 with an even shorter variation time of 1 second. The second variation pattern #26 may be determined. On the other hand, when determining a small hit as the second variation or later in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #22 and #25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when no second reservation memory is stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #23 and #26 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second reservation memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when This makes it possible to speed up the use of reserved memory and increase the operating rate. In addition, when determining a jackpot after the second variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the high probability/second KT state, the second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability/second KT shown in Figure 10-9(I) is are selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, one of the second variable patterns #29 to #34 is determined. .

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-9 (I), when it is determined to be a failure in the high probability/second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern #29 of shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the second variation pattern #30, which is a normal variation with a variation time of 5 seconds, is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a miss in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds may be determined, or the normal variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds. The second variation pattern #33 may be determined. Further, when determining a jackpot in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variable pattern, more specifically, it is determined whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is to be executed, the current gaming state, and the variable display result. Using the fluctuation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern, and which fluctuation pattern to use is determined. Figure 10-10 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high probability/second KT shown in Figure 10-9 (I). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a small hit fluctuation pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this characteristic part 052IW, when executing a variable display of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state, and when executing a variable display resulting in a small hit, , regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", the second fluctuation pattern #32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second fluctuation pattern #33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the variation pattern of shortening variation of 1.5 seconds will be selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, a fluctuation pattern table in the case where the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability/second KT state is shown. The other fluctuation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each fluctuation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of the set value "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in Figures 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening change of 5 seconds or 1 second is performed in the first KT state, and a shortening change of 1.5 seconds is performed with high probability in the second KT state. Although the example is shown in which the configuration is configured to be executed in For example, it may be configured to perform a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second in the case of a low probability state, and to perform a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds in the case of a high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be explained. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, using Figure 10-11 (1), special variable winning balls when controlled by jackpot games based on 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, and 2R probability variable jackpot (hereinafter also simply referred to as "probability variable jackpot") The opening pattern of the device 7 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the jackpot game starts, the solenoid 82 for the jackpot door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big jackpot) is opened. controlled by. When a game ball wins while the big prize opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

In addition, in a jackpot game based on variable probability jackpots, as shown in Figure 10-11 (1), when the second game ball enters the jackpot in the first round, solenoid 052IW109 is driven, and V The area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open, and the game ball can enter the V area 052IW104. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) passes or a predetermined number of wins (for example, 10) are detected in the first round, a special prize will be awarded as shown in Figure 10-11 (1). When the variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is controlled to be closed again, and the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

When a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 within a predetermined detection effective period, the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period starts at the timing when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to the open state, and the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is This is the period until a predetermined period (in this example, 500 ms) has elapsed after being controlled to the closed state again.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), release of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter also simply referred to as "normal jackpot") Explain patterns. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the jackpot game starts, the solenoid 82 for the jackpot door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big jackpot) is opened. controlled by. When a game ball wins while the big prize opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

In addition, in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-11 (2), when the winning of the first game ball into the jackpot in the first round is detected, solenoid 052IW109 is driven, and V The area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open for a very short period (0.02 seconds in this example). Then, in the first round, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) passes or a predetermined number of wins (for example, 10) are detected in the big prize opening, a special prize is awarded as shown in Figure 10-11 (2). The variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is controlled to be closed again, and the big winning hole is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period is after an extremely short opening period (in this example, 0.02 seconds) of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101. The period is set as a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) passes.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(1), in the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing board 052IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball is likely to enter the V area 052IW104 during the predetermined detection effective period, and it is likely to be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11(2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is substantially difficult for the game ball to enter the V area 052IW104 during the predetermined detection effective period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, in this example, in the jackpot game based on variable probability jackpots, game balls enter the V area 052IW104 at a higher rate during the jackpot game than in the jackpot game based on normal jackpots.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be explained. FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIGS. 10-12 shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Moreover, FIGS. 10-13 shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Moreover, FIGS. 10-14 shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. 10-12(1) to FIG. 10-14(1) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 10-12(2) ~FIG. 10-14 (2) shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be explained using FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays the normal Variable display of symbols is executed, and if it is determined to be a hit, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be a miss, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the regular symbol display 20. be done. In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in Figures 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol is determined to derive and display the winning symbol and the losing symbol. The time is assumed to be 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in Figures 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting prize opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the variable prize winning ball device 6B is kept open for 5.5 seconds, and game balls can be won in the second starting prize opening.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is determined to be a small hit, The small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, if it is a small winning A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). , in the case of small win B, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-13 (1), and in the case of small win C, as shown in FIG. As shown in -14 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can enter the special winning opening (however, in the case of small win A, (Since the special variable winning ball device 17 is only open for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, you can hardly expect to win any prizes.) However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds, or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small wins are likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to enter the special winning slot (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In addition, in the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. This is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the next normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting prize opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed. be. Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where no fluctuation of the normal symbol is performed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting prize opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed, and the game ball is It is configured such that the time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 with no symbol fluctuation until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. The variable winning ball device 6B is already open because it is shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where no fluctuation of the symbols is normally performed. The game ball will reach the variable prize winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, a game ball that passes through the passage gate 41 with no normal symbol variation is likely to win a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be explained using FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays a normal Variable display of symbols is executed, and if it is determined to be a hit, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be a miss, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the regular symbol display 20. be done. In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in Figures 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 seconds, and the symbol is determined to derive and display the winning symbol and the losing symbol. The time is assumed to be 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in Figures 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting winning hole is opened. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is kept open for 0.2 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is determined to be a small hit, A small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, if it is a small winning A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). , in the case of small win B, the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), and in the case of small win C, as shown in FIG. As shown in -14(2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 1.8 seconds, and game balls can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short at 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closed period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of 2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second starting prize opening opening process is ensured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the open time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and the interval period (closed period) is long. Compared to the first KT state, it is easier for game balls to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and it is easier for game balls to enter the special winning hole. However, in the case of small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for only an extremely short 0.2 seconds, so even in the second KT state, it is hardly expected that the game ball will enter the special winning hole.

In addition, in the 2nd KT state, it is easy for the game ball to enter the special prize opening and it is easy to get a prize ball, so in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and when in the 2nd KT state, it is called "small hit RUSH". ” will be displayed.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is varied depending on which of the small winning types is the small winning A to C. Not limited to. For example, the number of openings of the special variable winning ball device 17 may be changed depending on which of the small winning types A to C is the small winning type. In this case, for example, in the case of small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is released only once during the small win game, whereas in the case of small win B or small win C, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small win game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. For example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, by opening the special variable winning ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole ) may be configured to provide a small winning type in which a certain amount of game balls can be won, and various embodiments can be considered. Further, in this example, a case is shown in which there are three types of small winnings, small winnings A to C, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Good too.

In addition, in the present feature part 052IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 with no symbol fluctuation, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting prize opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, the game ball is It is configured such that the time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 with no symbol fluctuation until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where no symbol fluctuation is normally performed. The game balls will reach the variable prize winning ball device 6B before being controlled. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for a game ball that passes through the passage gate 41 with no variation of the normal symbol to win a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is performed by the normal symbol process processing by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). This is done by executing (see step S26). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state in the normal symbol process process of step S26. Regardless of whether there is a jackpot or a jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same in the first KT state and the second KT state, each 0.2 seconds, and the time before the second starting prize opening opening process is the same in the first KT state and the second KT state. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is varied by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the 2nd KT state. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be different by making the fluctuation time and symbol confirmation time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning hole opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning hole opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be different by setting the variable winning ball device 6B. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winnings to the special winning hole in the first KT state. .

In this characteristic part 052IW, as will be described later, in the first KT state, the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set is set to control the high base state. As shown in 10-14(1), the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be open for a long time. In addition, in the second KT state, by controlling to the low base state without setting the high base flag, the variable winning ball device 6B is released as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). Controlled to shorten the time.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is to be extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, If the variable winning ball device 6B as shown in 14(1) is controlled with the first opening pattern (long opening) in which it is opened for a long time, and the special flag is not set, then the The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be configured to be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) in which the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short time. In other words, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the jackpot gaming state.

Further, even in the first KT state, when performing the last variable display in the low probability/first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, the above-mentioned special flag may be configured to be erased in response to the 49th special symbol fluctuation stop among the 50 special symbol shortening fluctuation periods in the low probability/first KT state. With such a configuration, when the left-handed hit notification is performed after the end of the low probability/first KT state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is open long. be able to.

In addition, as mentioned above, when configuring the variable winning ball device 6B using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, it is also possible to use a flag for shortening variation of the variable display of the special symbol. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-circuited during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, if the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability/non-KT state (left-handed hitting state), it is only necessary to perform a firing operation for a few game balls. In this case, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability/non-KT state.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. For example, when the variable display of the second special symbol with a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, making it possible to capture the timing when the second special symbol stops fluctuating (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special winning hole becomes able to win). On the other hand, in this feature part 052IW, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbols, the variable winning ball device 6B is released after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the element of capture based on the firing operation aiming at the timing of occurrence of a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Production control command)
FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the production control command sent to the production control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H), 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. This is a production control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of symbols. Note that the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the production control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5. Control.

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a loss. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 specification command (10R probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is a 10R probability variable jackpot. . Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 specification command (6R probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variable pattern command is a 6R probability variable jackpot. . Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 specification command (6R normal jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 specification command (2R probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variable pattern command is a 2R probability variable jackpot. . Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 6 specification command (2R normal jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a 2R normal jackpot. . Command 9007 (H) is a performance control command (display result 7 designation command (small win designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variable pattern command is a small win.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command may be referred to as display result designation commands. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command received by the performance control CPU 120 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is It can be determined that the display result designation command is for the first special symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result designation command for the second special symbol, so the display result Although the designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separate.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result specifying command, but instead corresponds to 10R probability variable jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. A variation pattern command may be determined, and the performance control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that specifies that lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has ended. Command 9C01 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that specifies that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has started.

Command A000 (H) is a performance control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command A002 (H) is a performance control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Command A003 (H) is a production control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command BXXX(H) (X=any hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. Among them, B000(H) is a performance control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot game. B001(H) is a performance control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the end of the jackpot game. B004(H) is a performance control command (small win start designation command) that specifies the start of a small win game. B005(H) is a performance control command (small win end designation command) that specifies the end of the small win game.

Command B1XX(H) is a performance control command (big winning opening display command) that specifies the display during a round during the jackpot game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX". Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening of the jackpot opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the jackpot game.

Command B400 (H) is a performance control command (big winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won in the big winning opening. Command B401 (H) is a performance control command (special winning opening designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is a production control command (first effective starting winning designation command) that indicates that a game ball has won in the first starting winning opening in a state where the first pending storage number has not reached 4. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective starting winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the second starting winning opening in a state where the second pending storage number has not reached 4. Note that a command indicating the first pending memory number may be transmitted as the first valid starting prize designation command, and a command indicating the second pending memory number as the second valid starting prize designating command, but this feature section 052IW Here, the first valid starting winning designation command and the second valid starting winning designation command are commands indicating that there is a starting winning.

Command C801 (H) is a performance control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer waiting state) that specifies the first customer waiting state (the state where the first special symbol has not changed and the first pending memory has not been stored). (Waiting demo display specification command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer waiting state) that specifies a second customer waiting state (a state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second pending memory is not stored). (Waiting demo display specification command). Note that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be sent only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be sent only in the KT state.

Command E000(H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is a low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/first KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is the low probability/first KT state. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/first KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/first KT state. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/second KT background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value command) that specifies the currently set setting value. Note that the setting value is set to "XX". For example, if the setting value is set to "1", command E101(H) is transmitted as the setting value command. Further, for example, if the setting value is set to "6", command E106(H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the production control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 10-15 and FIG. 10-16, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the tone number data is output to the audio control board 13. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed performance control command regarding the jackpot game and a performance control command indicating the game state (for example, a performance control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. Incidentally, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, it is a state where the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first pending storage number (step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first pending storage counter is checked. If the first pending storage number is 0, a first customer waiting demo display designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first pending memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 and stores it in the RAM 102. (step 052IWS53A), decreases the value of the first pending memory number by 1 (subtracts the count value of the first pending memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area. (Step 052IWS54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is converted to the first pending memory number = n-. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition for variable display is satisfied, so it is possible to specify the order in which each random value is extracted. In addition, in this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number are The extracted order is also stored in an identifiable manner.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the production control board 12 (step 052IWS55A). Note that in this example, a setting value command is sent each time variable display is started by executing the process in step 052IWS55A, but a setting change process (processing to change the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. A setting value command is also sent when you execute .

Note that the timing at which the set value command is sent is not limited to that shown in this example; for example, the set value command may be configured to be sent every time the fluctuation display ends, or the set value command may be sent during the fluctuation display. It may also be configured to do so.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, if the variable probability flag and high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability/non-KT, and a low probability/non-KT background specification command is issued. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability/first KT and a low probability/first KT background specification command is issued, and if the probability variable flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is determined that the state is high probability/first KT. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, it is determined that the state is high probability/second KT and the high probability/second KT background specification command is issued. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing in jackpot (step 052IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating. If it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot change, the process moves to step 052IWS69A without performing the processes after step 052IWS58A. As a result, when the first special symbol starts varying during the jackpot variation of the second special symbol, the system is configured to forcibly result in a loss regardless of whether the jackpot determination value is stored.

Note that the method of forcibly causing the disc to be removed is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57A, a random number (fixed value) is set as the random number for determining the hit, and by moving to step 052IWS59A, when the starting prize is won, It may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Also, for example, when the second special symbol is fluctuating in the jackpot at step 052IWS57A, a random value (fixed value) of the loss may be set as the random number for hit determination without performing the processing at steps 052IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot when the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined to be a jackpot (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first jackpot flag indicating that it will be a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). . Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and step 052IWS69A Move to.

Further, if the jackpot is not determined in step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small win (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small win flag indicating that it will be a small win based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 052IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the random number for determining the win type (step 052IWS67A), and stores the small win type (step 052IWS68A). In addition, in this example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small win type is determined to be small win A (see FIG. 10-6(A)). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 052IWS69A), and if it is "0", the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0", step 052IWS75A is determined. Move to. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70A), It is determined whether the value has become "0" (step 052IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process moves to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72A), and shortens the display of fluctuations in special symbols. The special figure time saving flag indicating that it is under control is reset (step 052IWS73A). Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the variation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS75A.

In this feature part 052IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed when the high probability is low at the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot. /High base state (low probability/first KT state) is controlled and fluctuation display is executed 50 times. In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), when starting the 50th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps 052IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 052IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 052IWS73A and S73B, and a transition is made to a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) continues the right-handed hitting notification and continues the right-handed hitting state, and although the high base state has ended as a gaming state, the same fluctuation reduction as the first KT state This flag is used to set the same performance background as the first KT state.

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS74A and the process of step 052IWS74B, which will be described later, the high base state is established due to the start of variation of either the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display. When the final variation (in this example, the 50th variation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the variation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, does the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variable display) end? , or the start of the variable display of the other special symbol (in this example, the 51st variable display), the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variable shortening state is configured to end. This is desirable.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 052IWS75A.

In addition, in step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot using either the non-probability variable jackpot determination table or the probability variable jackpot determination table, taking into consideration the gaming state.

(First fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the special symbol time-saving flag indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is under control for shortening is set. (Step 052 IWS1700A). In addition, in this example, by setting the special symbol time saving flag and performing shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol, it becomes more advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Figure 10-7 (see FIG. 10-9), small hits are likely to occur, so the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-standard figure shown in FIG. 10-7(A) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 052IWS1701A). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for time (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 052IWS1701A and S1702A and the random number for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 will be used (step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the fluctuation time, a fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 052IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer, and sets the fluctuation time At the same time as starting measurement of (step 052IWS1705A), variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(First special symbol variation process) FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 sends the determination result of whether or not to be a jackpot, and the jackpot type, if it has not been sent yet. Based on the determination result, any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to the production control CPU 120. The IWS 1121A performs control to transmit data to the IWS 1121A (Step 052).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 052IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1122A). Step 052IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1125A). In addition, whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, and This can be determined by checking whether or not a second jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small win symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1126A). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. This can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol. If the small winning symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is immediately terminated.

If the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed results in a jackpot (step 052IWS1127A). . It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking whether the first jackpot flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the process is ended as is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS1128A). It should be noted that whether or not it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process is immediately terminated.

When a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 052IWS1125A), or when a small win symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126A), either a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot. If the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed (that is, the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127A, N in step 052IWS1128A), the CPU 103 causes the production control CPU 120 to display the first forced symbol. Control is performed to send a confirmation designation command (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first jackpot flag or the first small win flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the first jackpot flag or the first small win flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this characteristic section 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, or when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, If the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example) is in progress, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is This prevents a situation in which a jackpot or small hit occurs at the same time with the second special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the performance control CPU 120 side, if the first special symbol is forced to discontinue the fluctuation display, the decorative symbol will be changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command sent in step 052IWS1129A. Control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missing symbol as a display result.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, it is a probability variable jackpot (in this example, a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot). If the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress, the first special symbol variation process is immediately terminated (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the variable display of the second special symbol is Based on the small win, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win release preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, the determination in step 052IWS1120A is N, the processing in steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer in step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit and the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a probability variable jackpot is being executed, the first variable time timer is activated during the small win game. The update is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit is executed, Even if there is, the first special symbol variation process is ended as is (see N in step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, even if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is in progress, resulting in a loss or a small hit, the first fluctuation The update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that was set (step 052IWS2011A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, when the gaming state is controlled to the KT state, the player who performs the right-hand hitting operation is advantageous to the player, and the right hit indicator 26 is lit. Therefore, in this example, the right-hand hit indicator 26 is lit during the low probability/first KT state, but by executing the processing of steps 052IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B, the 50th fluctuation display is displayed. When starting, the low probability/first KT state is ended and the state is shifted to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processing of steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A, S2010B to S2013B is executed, thereby ending the 50th variation display. At this time, the right-hand hitting indicator 26 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). In addition, in this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command was sent in step 052IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation process, the forced symbol will be sent as the stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of variation. A symbol that misses the target is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). If the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating that a jackpot is to be started (step 052IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, when a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a jackpot game. , and the right-hand hit indicator 26 is lit.

In addition, in this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game starts based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, so when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the right hit It may be configured to start lighting the indicator 26.

If the first jackpot flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 052IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027A.

In addition, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a small winning game. However, as already explained, when there is a small win in the variable display of the first special symbol, there is only a case where the small win type is small win A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to enter the special winning hole. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-hand hit display 26 is not lit, and the right-hand hit lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027A).

In addition, in this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right-hitting notification that prompts the player to operate the game ball to the right of the gaming area. There is. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a firing promotion notification that urges the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 as a right hit notification. You can leave it there.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right hit notification and firing promotion notification will not be executed, and if the game ball enters the first starting prize opening in that state, the right hit notification and firing promotion notification will be issued. (In this case, since the game ball is waiting to pass through the gate, even if the game ball enters the first starting prize opening, the variable display of the first special symbol will not start immediately and will become the first pending memory.) It may be configured as follows.

Conversely, when the passing of a game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the recognition level is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Accordingly, it may be configured to provide a left-handed hit notification to the player to urge the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area. On the other hand, when a winning of a game ball in the second start winning hole or special winning hole is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the recognition level is high (for example, loud sound output or The configuration may be such that the player is notified of the player hitting left-handed using a large screen display. With such a configuration, accurate firing notification can be performed. In particular, with the above configuration, for a player who accidentally shoots a game ball to the right of the gaming area, a slight left-handed notification is sent to the player in a manner in which the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, it may be configured such that the left-handed player is notified in a manner that increases the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation can be prompted by a clerk at the game parlor to return to a left-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, it may be configured such that a left-handed hit notification is performed when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second start winning hole, or the special winning hole reaches a certain number. In addition, at the passage gate 41, if a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is issued, and at the second starting prize opening or special prize opening, the number of game balls is It may also be configured such that the left-handed hit notification is performed when a small specific number (for example, one) or more game balls are detected.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, a demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is met, but when the demonstration display is performed in the normal state, the entry to the passage gate 41, the second starting prize opening, or the special winning opening. When it is detected that a winning game ball has been won, the demonstration display that has been being executed may be terminated and a left-handed hit notification may be performed.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state where the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second pending storage number (step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second pending storage counter is checked. If the second pending storage number is 0, a second customer waiting demo display designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second pending memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102, and (step 052 IWS53B), decreases the value of the second pending memory number by 1 (subtracts the count value of the second pending memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area. (Step 052IWS54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is converted to the second pending memory number = n - Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second pending memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition for variable display is satisfied, so it is possible to specify the order in which each random value is extracted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the production control board 12 (step 052IWS55B). In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55B, a setting value command is sent every time variable display starts, but the setting change process (processing to change the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. A setting value command is also sent when you execute .

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). In addition, the specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 052IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing in jackpot (step 052IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating. If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing, the process moves to step 052IWS69B without performing the processes after step 052IWS58B. As a result, when the second special symbol starts varying during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the system is configured such that the jackpot is forcibly lost regardless of whether or not the jackpot judgment value is stored.

Note that the method of forcibly displacing is not limited to the method described above. For example, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57B, a random value (fixed value) of the loss is set as the random number for determining the hit, and by moving to step 052IWS59B, it is possible to It may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of whether a random number for determining a hit has been obtained.

For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57B, a random value (fixed value) of the loss may be set as the random number for hit determination without performing the processing in steps 052IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot when the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined to be a jackpot (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second jackpot flag indicating that it will be a jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). . Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63B). ), the process moves to step 052 IWS69B.

Further, if the jackpot is not determined in step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that it will be a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( Step 052IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the random number for determining the win type (step 052IWS67B), and stores the small win type (step 052IWS68B). In addition, in this example, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small win type is determined to be small win B or small win C (see FIG. 10-6(B)). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 052IWS69B), and if it is "0", it moves to step 052IWS75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70B), It is determined whether the value has become "0" (step 052IWS71B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process moves to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72B), and shortens the display of fluctuations in special symbols. The special figure time saving flag indicating that it is under control is reset (step 052IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 052IWS75B.

In addition, in step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot using either the non-probability variable jackpot determination table or the probability variable jackpot determination table, taking into consideration the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is similar to the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process has been explained. However, in the second fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as step 052IWS1700A, and checks whether the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-standard figure shown in FIG. 10-8(C) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 changes the fluctuation according to whether the probability fluctuation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, select one of the second special symbol variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8(D) to 10-9(I). For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in Figure 10-8 (D) If it is the 2nd to 49th variation, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in Figure 10-8 (E), and if it is the 50th variation, select the second variation pattern table shown in Figure 10-8 (F). Select the special symbol variation pattern table. For example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation shown in Figure 10-9 (G) Select a pattern table, and if it is the second variation or later, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (H). Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9(I) is selected.

(Second special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 sends the determination result of whether or not to be a jackpot, and the jackpot type, if it has not been sent yet. Based on the decision result, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specification command, display result 2 specification command, display result 3 specification command, display result 5 specification command, display result 6 specification command, display result 7 specification command) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 052IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B), performs control to send a second symbol confirmation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1122B). Step 052IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1125B). In addition, whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing, and This can be determined by checking whether or not the first jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small win symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1126B). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. This can be determined by checking whether or not the first small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol. If the small winning symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is immediately terminated.

If the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the fluctuating display of the second special symbol being executed results in a jackpot (step 052IWS1127B). . It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the second jackpot flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the process is immediately terminated.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS1128B). . It should be noted that whether or not it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process ends immediately.

When a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 052IWS1125B), or when a small win symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126B), 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and When the variable display of the second special symbol that does not result in any of the 2R guaranteed variable jackpots (that is, the 2R normal jackpot) is in progress (Y in step 052IWS1127B, N in step 052IWS1128B), the CPU 103 controls the performance control CPU 120. Control is performed to transmit a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to (step 052IWS1129B). In addition, in this case, if the second jackpot flag or the second small jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second jackpot flag or the second small jackpot flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature section 052IW, when the fluctuating display of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot while the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is being executed, or when it becomes a small hit. If the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, 2R normal jackpot) is in progress, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is This prevents a situation in which a jackpot or small hit occurs at the same time with the second special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the performance control CPU 120 side, if the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed, the variation of the decorative symbol will be changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command sent in step 052IWS1129B. Control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missing symbol as a display result.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, a probability variable jackpot (in this example, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, If the second special symbol variation display is in progress, resulting in a 2R guaranteed strange jackpot), the second special symbol variation process is ended (see Y in step 052 IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol Based on the symbol fluctuation display becoming a small win, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win release preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, the determination in step 052IWS1120B is N, the processing in steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer in step 052IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a probability variable jackpot is being executed, the second variable time timer is activated during the small win game. The update is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and updating of the second variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, and while the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a loss or a small hit, Even if there is, the second special symbol variation process is ended as is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol is in progress, resulting in a loss or a small hit, the second variable The update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, the remaining second pending memory can be used in the normal state after the first KT state (after the time saving state has ended), and a jackpot can occur at an unintended timing when the player is not present. can be suppressed.

In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning hole), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol ( In a gaming machine configured to have a starting prize opening (not a variable winning ball device) and configured to transition to the normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) , a configuration may be applied in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed as described above. In this case, as the fluctuating efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuating display of the first special symbol also increases, but along with this, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is forced to miss. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a variable display of the second special symbol based on the second pending memory in the normal state by increasing the frequency of occurrence of a jackpot at an unintended timing when the player is not present. I can do it.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012B), and controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In addition, in this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command was sent in step 052IWS1129B of the second special symbol fluctuation process, the command will be forced as the stop symbol of the second special symbol, regardless of the determination result at the start of fluctuation. A symbol that misses the target is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the second jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). If the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, when a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a jackpot game. , and the right-hand hit indicator 26 is lit.

If the second jackpot flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small win flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 052IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special figure time-saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-hand display 26 (step 052 IWS2024B), and also controls the production control CPU 120 to Control is performed to transmit a lighting start designation command (step 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026B). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, lighting of the right hit indicator 26 is started. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is better for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a small winning game. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

However, in this example, even if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 should already be lit if the player is in the KT state. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process in step 052IWS2023B, if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right hit indicator 26 starts to light up redundantly. It is configured not to perform processing such as sending a right-handed lighting start designation command.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027B).

(Accessories control normal processing)
FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing the accessory control normal processing (step S120) in the accessory control process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the jackpot start flag is set (step 052IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends immediately.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before jackpot opening (step 052IWS2103), sets opening pattern data for round 1 according to the jackpot type (step 052IWS2104), and sets "1" to the round number counter indicating the number of jackpot rounds. ” (Step 052IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting process)
FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 checks whether a detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 052IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the process ends immediately. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, high base flag, and special figure time saving flag, if set, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( Step 052IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 052IWS2504).

In this characteristic part 052IW, by executing the gate passing waiting process, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, but the passing gate 41 is played. The game is configured to proceed to a jackpot game on the condition that a ball passes through and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 checks whether the first count switch 23 is in the on state (step 052IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 determines the winning number for counting the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening. The value of the counter is incremented by 1 (step 052 IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a large winning opening winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the V area switch 052IW106 is in the on state (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is in the on state, that is, if a game ball entering the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the winning prize counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning prize counter is 10, the process moves to step 052IWS2409. If the value of the prize winning counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big prize opening (step 052 IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not (Step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends immediately.

If the value of the prize winning counter is 10 (Y in step 052IWS2406) or if the open time timer times out (Y in step 052IWS2408), the CPU 103 controls the drive of the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. The game is stopped and the big prize opening is controlled to be closed (step 052IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display command after opening the big winning hole to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step 052 IWS2412).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process moves to step 052IWS2202. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time). The value is set (step 052 IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2203). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 052IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the variable probability flag, and shifts to the variable probability state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS2207). In addition, whether it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot can be determined by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process, for example. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2208). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2215. In addition, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the high base flag is not set, so if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the high probability/low base state (high probability probability/second KT state).

If it is neither a 10R probability variable jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS2209). In addition, whether or not it is a 6R probability variable jackpot can be determined by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process, for example. If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2210), further sets the special symbol time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2211). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R variable jackpot, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In addition, in the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when starting the jackpot game (see step 052 IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display, It is determined as Y in step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 052IWS70A and step 052IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

If it is not a 6R definite strange jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052 IWS2212), and also sets the special symbol time saving flag. and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "50" (step 052IWS2214). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it will be controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2215).

(Small winning end processing)
FIG. 10-28 is a flowchart showing the small winning end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, the process moves to step 052IWS2302. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small hit end display timer to a display corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small win end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 052 IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2302, the value of the small winning end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2303). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2303), the CPU 103 checks whether the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right hit indicator 26 is lit (step 052IWS2305). If the right-handed player indicator 26 is lit, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed player indicator 26 (step 052 IWS2306), and transmits a right-handed player lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up at the start of the small win game (steps 052IWS2023B to S2025B). By executing the processing in steps 052IWS2304 to S2307, the lighting of the right-hand hit indicator 26 ends at the end of the small winning game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of gaming state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in this feature section 052IW will be explained. FIG. 10-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state changes in this feature section 052IW. First, in this feature part 052IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a firing operation (left-handed hit) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the gaming area. Therefore, in the normal state, starting winnings mainly occur in the first starting winning hole, and mainly a variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Furthermore, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability/low probability/low probability jackpot after the jackpot game ends. The state shifts to a low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability/high base state (high probability/ The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052 IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the end of that jackpot game, it will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) and the next jackpot will occur. The low probability/high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

After transitioning to the KT state (high probability/high base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/low base state), this feature section 052IW allows the player to aim at the right side of the gaming area. to launch the game ball (hitting to the right). Therefore, in the KT state, starting winnings to the second starting winning hole mainly occur, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Furthermore, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in Figure 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052, IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. /Transfers to a high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this feature part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the total probability of a 6R variable jackpot is 50% (see Figure 10-5), so once the high probability/high When it comes to the base state, the high probability/high base state will loop at a rate of 50%. In addition, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), it will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuating displays are completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in Figure 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052, IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. /Transfers to a high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the system will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuating displays are completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In addition, in this feature part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see Figures 10-5 (D) and (E)), Once the low probability/high base state is reached, the low probability/high base state will loop at a rate of 35%. In addition, after a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and becomes a low probability/high base state, if the next jackpot does not occur and the fluctuating display ends 50 times, as shown in Figure 10-29. As shown, the state shifts to a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 052IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in Figure 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052, IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this feature part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot is 15. % (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state will loop at a rate of 15%. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability will be reached after the jackpot game ends. /Transfers to a high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/2nd KT state), the system will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuating displays are completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the first special symbol is displayed fluctuating in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is explained, but the second special symbol is fluctuating at a low rate. It is also possible that the display will be executed. In this case, if a 10R variable jackpot or a 2R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it will shift to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). become. In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, a case was explained in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), but the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. It is possible that this could be carried out. In this case, when a 10R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, a case was explained in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), but the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a low rate. It is possible that this could be carried out. In this case, when a 10R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, a case was explained where the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), but the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a low rate. It is possible that this could be carried out. In this case, when a 10R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

(Normal pattern process processing)
Next, the normal symbol process processing (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be explained. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process process, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 052IWS5111), Control is performed to transmit a gate passage designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passage process (step 052IWS5113).

In this feature section 052IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In addition, in this feature part 052IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays the role of an operating area, but is it in a gate passage waiting state after stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol and before starting the jackpot game? Regardless of whether or not the gate passage designation command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps 052IWS5100 to S5104 depending on the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, regardless of whether or not the game is in the gate passage waiting state, if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passage process in step 052IWS5113 is executed. Normally, a variable display of symbols is executed, but the display is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when the game ball is not in the waiting state to pass through the gate, a variable display of the normal symbol is executed, and in the waiting state to pass through the gate, even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol is displayed. The configuration may be such that the variable display is not performed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the passage gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal starting area and the operating area, but the special symbol process processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed within the timer interrupt processing. Since it is executed before the symbol process process (see step S26), after the process of detecting the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 as the activation area is performed, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 as the normal starting area is detected. Detection processing is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 052 IWS5113): The CPU 103 determines that the count value (gate passage memory number) of the gate passage memory counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41) is the maximum value (in this example, " 4)). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by 1. In addition, the LED of the ordinary card reservation display 25C is lit according to the value of the gate passage memory counter. Then, the CPU 103 extracts the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, and performs processing to store it in a storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the gate passing memory number.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100): The CPU 103 is in a state where it is possible to start changing the normal symbol (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step 052IWS5100, specifically, when the normal symbol If the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner on the display 20 and the variable winning ball device 6B is not in the process of opening or closing based on the symbol being derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20), the gate passing memory is Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is checked. If the number of gate passing memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not it is a hit (whether or not a stop symbol of a normal symbol is to be a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set in the normal symbol process timer and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step 052 IWS5101): The CPU 103 checks whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time to the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 052 IWS5102): The CPU 103 checks whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a losing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052 IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory release pre-release time is set in the normal symbol process timer and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 052IWS5103).

Normal electric accessory opening pre-processing (step 052IWS5103): The CPU 103 checks whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric accessory operating time to the ordinary symbol process timer, and is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory actuation process (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory activation process (Step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step 052 IWS5121), the process is immediately terminated. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the random number value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1 (step 052IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the gate passing storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is transferred to the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memories = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of gate passage memories are extracted is always in the order of gate passage memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's supposed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses the normal symbol determination table to determine whether or not to win a normal symbol, and performs a lottery process based on random numbers (random numbers for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol). (Step 052IWS5127). In addition, in this feature part 052IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly performs 99/100 regardless of whether it is in the variable probability state, whether it is in the KT state, or whether it is in the high base state. It is decided that the probability will be a normal symbol hit.

In step 052IWS5127, if the read random number value for normal symbol hit determination is within the winning range (if it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the winning symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5128), and moves to step 052IWS5130. Further, in step 052IWS5127, if the read random number value for normal symbol hit determination is not within the winning range (if it is a loss), the CPU 103 sets a loss symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and moves to step 052IWS5130.

In step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the normal symbol process timer to 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time (Y, S5131 of step 052IWS5130). Further, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N of step 052 IWS5130, S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal pattern stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the normal symbol process timer by 1 (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052 IWS3702), the process ends as is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (in step 052IWS5127 if the symbol is a winning symbol). (Step 052IWS3703) In addition, whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol can be confirmed by setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 052IWS5127, and checking whether that flag is set. I can do it.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a miss symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 changes the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0" (step 052IWS3708).

In step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the normal electric accessory is released (step 052IWS3706). In addition, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the release of the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). .

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "3") corresponding to the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 052IWS5103) (step 052IWS3707)

(Normal electric accessory release pre-processing)
FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory release preprocessing (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts -1 from the value of the normal symbol process timer (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052 IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052 IWS3802), the process ends as is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before the normal electric accessory is released has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). , if it is set, that is, in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 052IWS3805). In addition, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3804).

In this way, in this characteristic part 052IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory release time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory release time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is a state in which it is easier to win a starting prize in the second starting winning hole than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball is more difficult to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

In addition, when the gaming state is the first KT state, the control method for making it easier to win a starting prize in the second starting winning hole is not limited to the one shown in this characteristic part 052IW. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of openings of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set to one time, whereas in the first KT state, the number of openings of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set to two times. By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to make it easier to win a starting prize in the second starting winning opening.

For example, in the case of the first KT state, compared to the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B may be controlled to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above. It may also be executed in combination with control to increase the number of openings.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to an open state (step 052IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "4") corresponding to the normal electric accessory activation process (step 052IWS5104) (step 052IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIGS. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether the command is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. If both match, the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 052IWS612). Note that after reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 052 IWS613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received production control command is a setting value command (step 052IWS614), the production control CPU 0120 stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command in the setting value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variable pattern command (step 052IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable pattern command in the variable pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617). Then, the variable pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS618).

If the received production control command is a display result specification command (step 052IWS619), the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620). ).

If the received production control command is any of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced symbol confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 052 IWS621 ), the production control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 052IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received performance control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS623), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the right hit display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).

If the received performance control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 052IWS626), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to end the right hit display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).

In addition, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS624 and S627, a right hit display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right hit display displayed during the jackpot game, it may be configured to perform a setting value suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value. For example, when starting the right-handed display in step 052 IWS624, normally the right-handed display with white display color is started, but if it is decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect, the setting value is "1". If the setting value is "2", right-handed display with a blue display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "2", right-handed display with a green display color is started at a relatively high rate. , when the setting value is "3", the yellow display color starts to be displayed on the right at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "4", the orange display color starts to be displayed on the right at a relatively high rate. If the setting value is ``5'', the right-handed hitting display with red display color will start, and if the setting value is ``6'', the right-handed hitting display will start at a relatively high rate. A right-handed display with rainbow display colors may be started.

Also, for example, the right-handed display may be configured to continue to be displayed during the KT state after the end of the jackpot game, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display may be changed and set at the timing of the end of the jackpot game. It may be configured to execute a value suggestion performance.

Furthermore, for example, when transitioning to the normal state (low probability/low base state) after completing 50 fluctuation displays in the low probability/first KT state, the left-handed display may be started; The setting value suggestion performance may be performed by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the display. It is only necessary to configure the setting value suggestion performance to be executable when the control of the gaming state is switched in some form in this way.

If the received production control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052IWS629), the production control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received performance control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052IWS631), the performance control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received performance control command is a big winning hole opening display command (step 052 IWS633), the performance control CPU 120 outputs a winning number for counting the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole during the round of the jackpot game. The counter value is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS634). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a grand prize opening flag that specifies that the grand prize opening is open (during the round period during the jackpot game) (step 052IWS635).

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the big winning opening opening display command (timing of starting a round), so it is extremely rare. Even if an over-win is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the number-of-wins counter.

If the received production control command is a display command after the opening of the grand prize opening (step 052IWS636), the production control CPU 120 sets a post-opening flag of the grand prize opening which specifies that it is the interval period after the opening of the grand prize opening. (Step 052IWS637).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052IWS638), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 052IWS640), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low probability/non-KT background designation command (step 052IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/non-KT state (for example, A blue background image) is displayed (step 052IWS643). Further, if set, the performance control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 052IWS644). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform an award for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole and special winning hole during the jackpot game and the high probability/second KT state. If the ball number counter is set, the value of the prize ball number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

In this example, a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game (excluding jackpot games based on 2R definite jackpot and 2R normal jackpot), or a game ball enters the special jackpot during the high probability/second KT state. When a ball wins a prize, the value of the prize ball counter is cumulatively updated (see steps 052IWS660, S667), but by executing the process of step 052IWS645, the game state changes to low probability/low probability/ After entering the high base state (low probability/first KT state), the value of the prize ball number counter is cleared to 0 when the 50 fluctuating displays are completed and the state becomes low probability/low base state.

If the received effect control command is a low probability/first KT background specification command (step 052IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/first KT state (for example, A green background image) is displayed (step 052IWS647). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in a high probability state or the high probability state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. 2KT status flag is reset (step 052IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/first KT background designation command (step 052IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (for example, A yellow background image) is displayed (step 052IWS651). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 052IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/second KT background designation command (step 052IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/second KT state (for example, A red background image) is displayed (step 052IWS655). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS657).

If the received production control command is a big winning opening prize designation command (step 052 IWS658), the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not a jackpot game based on a 10R probability-variable jackpot, a 6R probability-variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is in progress. (Step 052IWS659). In addition, whether or not a jackpot game based on a 10R definite strange jackpot, a 6R definite strange jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is in progress can be determined, for example, by determining whether the value of the performance control process flag is from the jackpot performance process (step S176) to the ending performance process (step S177). ), and also check whether the display result specification commands stored in the display result specification command storage area are display result 2 specification commands to display result 4 specification commands. It can be determined by

If a jackpot game based on the 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot is in progress, the performance control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 052IWS660). Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after addition (step 052IWS661). Note that the prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole and special winning hole during the jackpot game and the high probability/second KT state.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS658 to S661, in this example, the prize ball is awarded based on the occurrence of a prize in the jackpot during the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot. The value of the number counter and the display of the number of prize balls are updated. On the other hand, even during a jackpot game, if a prize is entered into the jackpot during a jackpot game based on a 2R guaranteed variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, the value of the prize ball counter will not be updated, and the prize ball number counter will not be updated. The number display is also not updated.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes an over winning suggestion performance process for determining and executing an over winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS662). In addition, the "suggestion performance when over-winning" is a performance that is executed at the timing when an over-winning into the big winning opening occurs and suggests the currently set setting value.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number display suggestion production process for determining and executing the prize ball number display suggestion production (step 052IWS663). In addition, the "prize ball number display suggestion effect" is a predetermined cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole or special winning hole during jackpot games or high probability / 2nd KT state. This effect is executed at the timing when the number (in this example, 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) is reached, and indicates the currently set setting value.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a prize pitch number emphasizing production process for determining and executing a prize pitch number emphasizing production (step 052IWS664). In addition, the "prize ball number emphasizing production" is a predetermined number of accumulated number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the big winning hole or special winning hole during jackpot games or high probability / 2nd KT state. (In this example, this is an effect that emphasizes that the number of pieces has reached 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces, 3000 pieces, 4000 pieces, and 5000 pieces).

If the received performance control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS665), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the second KT status flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the high probability/second KT state), the performance control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 052IWS667). Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052IWS668).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS665 to S668, in this example, the value of the prize ball number counter and the prize ball are calculated based on the fact that a small hit occurred during the high probability/second KT state and a prize was entered into the special winning hole. The number display is updated. On the other hand, even if the ball is in the KT state, if a special winning occurs during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, the value of the prize ball number counter will not be updated. The prize ball number display is also not updated (however, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball number counter is not reset).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a small hit winning suggestion performance process for determining and executing the small winning winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS669). In addition, the "Suggestion performance when winning a small hit" is a performance that is executed at the timing when a small hit occurs during the high probability / 2nd KT state and a prize is entered into the special prize opening, and it is a performance that suggests the currently set setting value. .

Next, the performance control CPU 120 moves to step 052IWS663 and executes a prize ball number display suggestion performance process (step 052IWS663). Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number emphasizing performance process (step 052IWS664).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 executes processing such as storing the received production control command or setting a flag according to the received production control command (step 052 IWS670 ). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS611.

(Suggestive effect processing when over winning)
FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing the over winning suggestion production process (step 052 IWS662). In the excessive winning suggestion performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the number of winnings counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning into the big winning opening has occurred), the production control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence and type of the over-winning suggestion production. A lottery process based on random numbers is performed using the over-winning suggestion effect determination table to determine the presence or absence and type of over-winning suggestion effect (step 052 IWS303).

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the over-winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in Figure 10-39, the over-winning suggestion performance determination table includes no over-winning suggestion performance, over-winning suggestion A, over-winning suggestion B, over-winning suggestion C, and over-winning suggestion performance C. Judgment values are assigned to each of the suggestion performance D, the over-winning suggestion performance E, and the over-winning suggestion performance F.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, the winning display (in this example, “+15 " character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-39, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L , 8R outputs the winning sound of sound A, which is different from the normal sound. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in green on the image display device 5, and the winning sound B, which is different from the normal sound, is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect C" is executed, a winning display is displayed in yellow on the image display device 5, and a winning sound C different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in orange on the image display device 5, and the winning sound D, which is different from the normal sound, is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect E" is executed, a winning display is displayed in red on the image display device 5, and a winning sound E different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. In addition, when the "Over Winning Suggestion Effect F" is executed, a winning display is displayed in rainbow colors on the image display device 5, and a sound F different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, different determination values are assigned to the over winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the setting values "1" to "6" the current setting value is. In step 052IWS303, the performance control CPU 120 checks the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of the over-winning suggestion performance are determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the percentage of execution of the over winning suggestion performance A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the setting value is "2", the proportion of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect B being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the percentage of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect C being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the percentage of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect D being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the setting value is "5", the proportion of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect E is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the proportion of execution of the over winning suggestion effect F is determined to be relatively high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the ratio for determining the execution of the over winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the over winning suggestion effects A to F, is: 10% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, if the setting value is "2", it is 45%, if the setting value is "3", it is 50%, and the setting value When the setting value is "4", it is 55%, when the setting value is "5", it is 60%, and when the setting value is "6", it is 65%. In this way, in this example, since over-winning occurs relatively rarely, the proportion of decisions to execute the over-winning suggestion effect is relatively high compared to the small hit winning suggestion effect described later. There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided in step 052IWS303 to execute the over winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS304). If it has been decided to execute the over-winning suggestion effect, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display according to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect (step 052 IWS305). . For example, if it is decided to execute the over-winning suggestion performance A, control is performed to display a winning display in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the determined type of over winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the over-winning suggestion performance A, control is performed to output the winning sound of sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 052 IWS302), or if it is determined that there will be no suggestion effect at the time of over winning (N in step 052 IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 In step 052, IWS307, the winning display is controlled to be displayed in the normal display color (in this example, white). Further, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Suggestive performance processing when winning a small hit)
FIG. 10-40 is a flowchart showing the small hit winning suggestion production process (step 052IWS669). In the small hit winning suggestion performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the small hit winning suggestion performance determination table for determining the presence or absence and type of the small winning winning suggestion performance. The presence/absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit are determined (step 052IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in Figure 10-41, the small hit winning suggestion performance determination table includes: no small hit winning suggestion performance, small winning winning suggestion performance A, small winning winning suggestion performance B, and small winning winning suggestion performance. Judgment values are assigned to C, small hit winning suggestion performance D, small winning winning suggestion performance E, and small winning winning suggestion performance F, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when a game ball wins in the special winning hole, the winning display (in this example, "+10 " character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-41, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and the speaker The winning sound of sound A, which is different from the normal sound, is output from 8L and 8R. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect B" is executed, a winning display is displayed in green on the image display device 5, and a sound B different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect C" is executed, a winning display is displayed in yellow on the image display device 5, and a sound C different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, a winning display is displayed in orange on the image display device 5, and a sound D different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect E" is executed, a winning display is displayed in red on the image display device 5, and a sound E different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. In addition, when the "Small hit winning suggestion effect F" is executed, a winning display is displayed in rainbow colors on the image display device 5, and a sound F different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound will be output.

As shown in Figure 10-41, different judgment values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on whether the current setting value is from ``1'' to ``6''. . In step 052IWS321, the performance control CPU 120 checks the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion performance are determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the percentage of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance B is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance C is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the percentage of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance D being determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance E is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the proportion of execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance F is relatively high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, if the setting value is "1", the ratio for determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion performance, which is the sum of the small winning winning suggestion performances A to F. is 2% + 1% + 1% + 1% = 5%, when the setting value is "2", it is 6%, when the setting value is "3", it is 7%, and when the setting value is "4", it is 6%. ”, it is 8%, when the setting value is “5”, it is 9%, and when the setting value is “6”, it is 10%. In this way, in this example, the proportion of decisions to execute the small hit winning suggestion presentation is relatively low compared to the over winning suggestion presentation described above.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided in step 052IWS321 to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS322). If it has been decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display according to the determined type of small hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS323). For example, if it is decided to execute the small winning winning suggestion performance A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a winning display in a blue display color. Further, the performance control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output a winning sound according to the determined type of small hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance A, control is performed to output the winning sound of sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there will be no suggestion presentation when winning a small hit (N in step 052 IWS322), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a winning indication in the normal display color (in this example, white) on the image display device 5. (Step 052 IWS325). Further, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS326).

In addition, the reliability of the set value suggestion may be made different depending on when the over-winning suggestion performance is executed and when the small winning suggestion presentation is executed. For example, although over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed with any setting value of ``1'' to ``6'', it is executed at a relatively high rate when the setting value is ``6''. It may be configured such that if the winning suggestion effect F is executed, the set value is determined to be "6". Conversely, for example, the small winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any setting value of "1" to "6", but it is executed at a relatively high rate when the setting value is "6". On the other hand, the setting value may be determined to be "6" if the over-winning suggestion effect F is executed.

In addition, in this example, for the over-winning suggestion effect and the small winning suggestion effect, the display format of the winning display (in this example, the display color) is different from normal, and a winning sound different from normal is output. Although the case where execution is carried out according to the mode has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, by making either the display mode of the winning display (display color in this example) or the winning sound different from the usual mode, an over-winning suggestion effect or a small winning award suggestion effect can be executed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, for example, by displaying an effect display or changing the display color of lamps or LEDs at the timing of an over-winning or a winning in a special winning opening, it is possible to create a suggestion for over-winning or to win a small hit. It may be configured to execute a time-suggesting effect.

(Prize ball count display suggestion processing)
FIG. 10-42 is a flowchart showing the award ball count display suggestion production process (step 052IWS663). In the prize ball number display suggestion production process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 for the first time (step 052IWS341). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS341, If the value of the prize ball number counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 456 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 for the first time, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" (step 052IWS342). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "4" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "4" or more, the performance control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table for determining whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance, and draws a lottery based on random numbers. Processing is performed to determine whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion effect A (step 052IWS343). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the award ball count display suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when prize pitch display suggestion effect A is executed, a character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "4" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestion performance A is determined with a probability of 3%. In addition, in this example, since the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4", if the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, at least the set value "4" is executed. It is confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS341), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 555 for the first time ( Step 052IWS344). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15, so in step 052IWS344, If the value of the prize ball number counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 555 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 555 for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS345). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "5" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "5" or more, the performance control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance B. (Step 052IWS346). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when award ball count display suggestion effect B is executed, characters such as "555 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "5" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of prize pitch number display suggestion performance B is determined with a probability of 2%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is greater than or equal to the set value "5", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, at least the set value "5" is executed. It is confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 555 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS344), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 666 for the first time ( Step 052IWS347). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15, so in step 052IWS347, If the value of the prize ball number counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 666 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 666 for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS348). It should be noted that whether or not the current setting value is the setting value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "6", the production control CPU 120 uses the prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers to determine the presence or absence of the prize pitch number display suggestion production C. Determine (step 052IWS349). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, characters such as "666 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "6". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the award ball number display suggestion performance C is determined with a probability of 1%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the setting value is "6", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the setting value is "6". One thing is certain.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 666 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS347), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2456 for the first time ( Step 052IWS350). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, you will receive 15 prize balls, and if a game ball enters the special prize slot during the high probability/second KT state, you will receive 10 prize balls. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS350, the production control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2460 or 2465, the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2456 for the first time, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" (step 052IWS351). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "4" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "4" or more, the performance control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance D. (Step 052 IWS352). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize pitch display suggestion effect D is executed, a character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "4" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is equal to or higher than the set value "4", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, the set value "4" is executed. The above is confirmed.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2456 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS350), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2555 for the first time ( Step 052IWS353). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, you will receive 15 prize balls, and if a game ball enters the special prize slot during the high probability/second KT state, you will receive 10 prize balls. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS353, the performance control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2555 or 2560, the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2555 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2555 for the first time, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS354). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value "5" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "5" or more, the production control CPU 120 uses the prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines whether or not there is a prize pitch number display suggestion production E. (Step 052IWS355). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the award ball count display suggestion effect E is executed, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "5" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In addition, in this example, since the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", if the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, the set value ``5'' is executed. The above is confirmed.

Unless the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2555 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS353), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2666 for the first time ( Step 052IWS356). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, you will receive 15 prize balls, and if a game ball enters the special prize slot during the high probability/second KT state, you will receive 10 prize balls. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS356, the performance control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2670 or 2675, the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 for the first time.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2666 for the first time, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS357). It should be noted that whether or not the current setting value is the setting value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the storage contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current setting value is the setting value "6", the production control CPU 120 uses the prize pitch number display suggestion production determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers to determine the presence or absence of the prize pitch number display suggestion production F. Determine (step 052IWS358). Then, the process moves to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize pitch display suggestion effect F is executed, characters such as "2666 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the current setting value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is "6". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In addition, in this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed only when the setting value is "6", so if the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, the setting value is "6". One thing is certain.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it has been decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion performance in steps 052IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355, and S358 (step 052IWS359). If it has been decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number display suggestion performance (step 052IWS360). For example, if it is decided to execute the award ball count display suggestion performance A, control is performed to display characters such as "456 OVER" on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, looking at the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the jackpot game, the period during the jackpot game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As the game progresses, the execution probability of the prize pitch display suggestion effect becomes lower to 3%, 2%, and 1%. 6” The accuracy of confirmation and setting value suggestion has increased. In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 10-43, if you look at the prize ball number display suggestion effects D to F that are executed during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), during the small hit RUSH As the period becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, but if the set value is ``4'' or higher, the set value The accuracy of confirming "5" or more, confirming the set value "6", and suggesting the set value is increasing.

Note that the mode is not limited to the mode shown in this example, but for example, as the period during the jackpot game or the period during the small win RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect increases. It may be configured as desired. Further, for example, as the period during the jackpot game or the period during the small win RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the accuracy of the setting value suggestion may be lowered.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, there are prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C that are executed during the jackpot game, and prize ball number display suggestions that are executed during the small hit RUSH period. Productions D to F show a case where the execution probabilities of the award pitch display suggestion production are different, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. It's okay.

(Processing to emphasize the number of prize pitches)
FIG. 10-44 is a flowchart showing the prize pitch number emphasizing process (step 052IWS664). In the prize pitch number emphasizing production processing, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the value of the prize pitch number counter reaches a threshold value of 1000 (in this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000) for the first time. (Step 052IWS371). In this example, if a game ball enters the jackpot during a jackpot game, 15 prize balls will be obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter will be incremented by 15, so in step 052IWS371, For example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 1000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 3000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 4000 for the first time. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 5000 for the first time.

If the value of the prize pitch number counter reaches the threshold of every 1000 for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 uses a prize pitch number emphasizing performance determination table for determining whether or not to perform a prize pitch number emphasizing performance, and generates a random number. A lottery process is performed based on the above, and it is determined whether or not there will be an emphasis on the number of prize pitches (step 052 IWS372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-45, in this example, if the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000, execution of prize ball number emphasizing effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed, characters such as "1000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 2000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 3000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is executed, characters such as "3000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 4000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed, characters such as "4000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 5000, execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed, characters such as "5000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided in step 052IWS372 to execute the prize ball number emphasizing performance (step 052IWS373). If it has been decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number emphasizing performance (step 052IWS374). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display characters such as "1000 OVER".

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the number of prize balls emphasis effect can be executed when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000, but such It is not limited to the form. For example, it is not necessary to make it possible to perform the performance to emphasize the number of prize balls in all of these cases, but to make it possible to perform the performance to emphasize the number of prize balls when the number of prize balls reaches 1,000, 2,000, and 3,000. may be configured. Further, for example, the system may be configured to be able to perform a presentation that emphasizes the number of prize balls even when the number of prize balls reaches 6,000 or 7,000, and various embodiments are possible.

As shown in Figures 10-44 and 10-45, the prize pitch count emphasizing performance is different from the prize pitch count display suggestion performance shown in Figures 10-42 and 10-43, and is unrelated to the current setting value. It is a performance that is decided and executed. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and may be configured to be able to execute the prize pitch number emphasizing performance in a manner that suggests the current setting value, for example, by changing the display mode of the prize pitch number emphasizing performance. For example, the present setting value may be suggested by displaying characters such as "1000 OVER" or "2000 OVER" in a different display color than usual.

(variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 10-46 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a variable pattern command has been received (step 052IWS811). Note that whether or not a variation pattern command has been received can be determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that a variation pattern command has been received when a variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). Then, in step 052IWS811, it may be checked whether the variable pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. (Step 052IWS813). In addition, whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the first special symbol depends on, for example, whether the variable pattern indicated by the received variable pattern command specifies the first variable pattern #01 to #09. This can be determined by checking whether If it is not the case to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed), the process is ended as is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol. (Step 052IWS814). In addition, whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the second special symbol depends on, for example, whether the variable pattern indicated by the received variable pattern command specifies the second variable pattern #01 to #34. This can be determined by checking whether If the variable display of the second special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed), the process is ended as is. If the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS812 to S815, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the case of the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When this is executed and the state is KT, a variable display of decorative symbols is executed on the image display device 5 in response to a variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is in the KT state, or even when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is in the non-KT state. , the variable display of decorative patterns is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS920). In addition, whether or not it is the case to execute the variable display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, the variable pattern command stored in the variable pattern command storage area specifying the first variable pattern #01 to #09. This can be determined by checking whether or not it exists. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the current variable display is a small hit (step 052IWS921). In addition, to determine whether the current variable display is a small hit, for example, check whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. This can be determined by If it is a small hit variation, the performance control CPU 120 determines a non-reach symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 052IWS922).

As already explained, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and it becomes a small win, there is only a case where the small win is A. I can hardly expect to win any prizes. Therefore, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS920 to S922, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents players from having excessive expectations.

When performing a variable display of the second special symbol (N in step 052IWS920) or when there is no small hit variation (N in step 052IWS921), the performance control CPU 120 displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variable display result. is determined (step 052IWS923). In step 052IWS923, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined that the display result 1 is a miss), the performance control CPU 120 determines that the left center right decorative pattern is a completely mismatched missed symbol or only the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. The matched reach determines the combination of missing symbols. In addition, when a display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 10R probability-variable jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left center right are "7" among the odd symbols is determined. Further, when a display result 3 designation command is received (when a 6R probability-variable jackpot is determined), a combination of symbols in which the left-center right decorative symbols are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" is determined. In addition, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that it is a 2R probability-variable jackpot), the combination of symbols in which the decorative symbol inside includes a special symbol (in this example, the symbol "R") is determined. . In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (if it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left center right are even numbers. Determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined that a small win is achieved), a combination of decorative symbols of the small win symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current variable display is a failure (Step 052IWS924). To determine whether or not the current variable display is a failure, for example, check whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. It can be determined by If there is no deviation variation, the process directly proceeds to step 052IWS928. If it is a deviation variation (Y in step 052 IWS924), the performance control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggestion effect setting process to determine the presence or absence and type of a setting value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 052IWS925).

In step 052IWS925, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, the performance control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggestion performance determination table for determining the presence/absence and type of setting value suggestion performance. Determine the presence or absence and type of value suggestion effects.

FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in Figure 10-48, the setting value suggestion effect determination table includes no setting value suggestion effect, setting value suggestion effect A, setting value suggestion effect B, setting value suggestion effect C, setting value suggestion effect D, and setting value. Judgment values are assigned to each of the suggestion effect E and the setting value suggestion effect F.

The setting value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. The execution rate is highest in certain cases. Further, the setting value suggestion performance B is a performance executed by displaying a predetermined character image in green display color on the image display device 5, for example, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect C is an effect executed by, for example, displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect E is an effect executed by, for example, displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ”, the execution rate is highest. Further, the setting value suggestion effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 10-48, the setting value `` 6", the execution rate is highest.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the second KT status flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the second KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 052IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 052IWS926), that is, if it is the second KT state, the performance control CPU 120 will send a small win RUSH indicating that the second KT state (small win RUSH) will continue. A small win RUSH continuous suggestion effect setting process is executed to determine the presence or absence and type of continuous suggestion effect (step 052 IWS927).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production determination table. As shown in Figure 10-49, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance determination table includes the judgments for no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance, small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance A, and small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance B. A value has been assigned. The small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance A is a performance executed by displaying a predetermined performance image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, for example. Further, the small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance B is a performance executed by displaying a predetermined performance image in a red display color on the image display device 5, for example.

As shown in Figure 10-49, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is highest, and when the setting value is "2", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. If the execution rate is the next highest and the set value is "3", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest and the set value is "4", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. is the next highest, and when the setting value is ``5'', the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the setting value is ``6'', the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting lower.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-49, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance A is highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance B has the highest execution rate.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1" and the highest when the set value is "6", but when the set value is in the second KT state, the jackpot probability does not occur. Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, a setting value of "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (high expectation of continuation), and a setting value of "6" It can be said that a certain case is a set state in which the second KT state is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect, expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small win RUSH) can be increased.

As explained above, the degree of expectation for continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will become longer without a jackpot occurring.

In addition, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest, so especially when the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, Expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) can be further increased.

Next, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used and whether to execute the set value suggestion production or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this step, a process table corresponding to the setting value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 052 IWS928).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step 052 IWS930). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Note that when it is decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the setting value suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928, so that the decoration is The setting value suggestion effect is executed while the symbol is being displayed as a variation (while the symbol is being varied).

Further, when it is decided to execute the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and variable display effect processing (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is executed during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols (while the loss fluctuates during the second KT state).

Next, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decorative symbol variation time timer and starts the ornamental symbol variation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display effect processing (step S172) (step 052IWS932).

(Variable display processing)
FIG. 10-50 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS8101), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052 IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052IWS8104). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, if the 1 confirmation command reception flag is set (step 052IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the first forced symbol confirmation command reception flag is set or not). (Step 052IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a missed symbol (step 052IWS8109). Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 052IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, if the (Step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the second forced symbol confirmation command reception flag is set or not). (Step 052IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a missed symbol (step 052IWS8113). Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 052IWS8108, or if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 052IWS8112, the production control CPU 120 uses the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer. It is checked whether or not timeout has occurred (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the process data for standby performance (step 052IWS8116). Then, the production control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In this example, as already explained, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, and the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress, resulting in a miss, small hit, or variable jackpot. In this case, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, if the first special symbol fluctuates and displays a small hit, and the second special symbol fluctuates and displays a miss, a small hit, or a probability-variable jackpot, during the small-win game. , the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed. The fact that the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer times out in step 052IWS8115 without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command means that the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted and the first This is a case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the process of steps 052IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, after which the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted, and finally 1 special The standby performance is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is finished. Note that the "standby performance" is, for example, a performance in which the image display device 5 is brought into a temporary stop state with the left-center right decorative pattern fluctuating or slightly fluctuating.

Note that, for example, in the case where the image display device 5 also executes a variable display of a system small symbol, a fourth symbol, etc., updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbols or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth symbol is also continuously executed. Then, when the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is resumed and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol The variable display is also stopped and displayed.

(Special drawing waiting process)
FIGS. 10-51 and 10-52 are flowcharts showing the special symbol per waiting process (step S173) in the production control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052 IWS9701). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process moves to step 052IWS9706. In this feature section 052IW, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 052IWS9705. Then, when executing the jackpot performance, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed to be displayed, but the jackpot effect has not yet been executed. The process moves to step 052IWS9706 without being executed.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the stop symbol display flag 2, which indicates that the small winning symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, is set. (Step 052IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process moves to step 052IWS9717. In this feature section 052IW, when a small winning symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 052IWS9716. Then, when executing the small hit performance, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed but the small win effect has not yet been executed, so the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052 IWS9703 is displayed. The process moves to step 052IWS9717 without executing any processing.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the performance control CPU 120 displays the stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) of the left center right decorative symbol that is being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , small winning symbol) is determined and displayed (step 052IWS9703). In addition, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command and the second forced symbol confirmation designation command are received and the process of replacing the symbol with a missed symbol is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, the performance control CPU 120 replaces the missed symbol with the missed symbol in step 052IWS9703. Performs control to confirm and display.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y of step 052IWS9704), the performance control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9707).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot type of the jackpot that has occurred this time is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS9709). In addition, whether the jackpot type is a 10R certain variable jackpot, 6R certain variable jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot can be determined by, for example, whether the received display result designation command is one of the display result 2 designation command to display result 4 designation command. It can be determined by checking. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the production control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9710).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in this example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is started. On the other hand, even if there is a jackpot, when starting a jackpot game based on a 2R probability-variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, the display of the number of prize balls is not started.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the jackpot performance (step 052IWS9711). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052 IWS9712), and inputs the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number According to data 1), control of the presentation device (image display device 5 as presentation component, various lamps as presentation component, and speakers 8L and 8R as presentation component) is executed (step 052IWS9713).

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot performance process (step S176) (step 052IWS9714).

If the jackpot symbol has not been confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (N in step 052IWS9704), and if the small win symbol has been confirmed and displayed in the process in step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9715), the performance control CPU 120 stops. Set symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small hit start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9717). If the small hit start designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9718).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit performance (step 052IWS9719). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052 IWS9720), and updates the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the production device (image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, and speakers 8L, 8R as production components) is executed (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit performance process (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

If the jackpot symbol or the small prize symbol is not displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (that is, if a losing symbol is displayed) (N in step 052IWS9704 and N in step 052IWS9715), the production control CPU 120 controls the production control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723).

(Ending production processing)
FIG. 10-53 is a flowchart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the ending performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the performance period measurement timer (step 052IWS951). The production period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot production processing (see step S176). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the performance period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the performance period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS952), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS953), and displays the performance device (image display device 5) according to the contents of process data n. , game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) (step 052IWS954). For example, effects such as displaying that the jackpot ends or displaying a predetermined character are executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

If the performance period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052 IWS952), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot game to be ended this time is a jackpot game based on a 6R probability-variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS958). In addition, whether it is a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot is determined by, for example, whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command. This can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the prize ball number display on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS959).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS958 to S959, in this example, when a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot is executed, a prize ball number display is displayed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot is displayed. When the game ends, the prize ball number display is erased, and the prize ball number display is not displayed during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state after the end of the jackpot game.

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot game to be ended this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS960). Note that whether or not it is a 2R probability variable jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability-variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the production control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the prize ball number display on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS962).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS960 to S962, in this example, when a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the jackpot game (however, In this example, if the prize ball number display has been displayed before the 2R probability variable jackpot, the prize ball number display will continue to be displayed, but the display will not be updated), and the high probability after the jackpot game ends. /The number of prize balls is displayed during the second KT state.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Example of production)
Next, the performance mode of the performance executed in this feature section 052IW will be explained. First, the presentation mode of the setting value suggestion presentation will be explained. FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the presentation mode of the setting value suggestion presentation. In this example, it is possible to execute the setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of place. As shown in FIG. 10-54 (A), when the image display device 5 is performing a variable display of the left center right decorative pattern, when the timing to execute the setting value suggestion effect is reached, ) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined character images 052IW001, 052IW002, and 052IW003 on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when executing the setting value suggestion effect A, the setting value is set by displaying a predetermined character image 052IW001 in a blue display color on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B1). A value suggestion performance is executed. For example, when executing the setting value suggestion effect C, the setting value is changed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW002 in yellow on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B2). Suggestive performance is executed. For example, when executing the setting value suggestion effect E, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B3), the setting value is changed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW003 in red on the image display device 5. Suggestive performance is executed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-54, the case where setting value suggestion effect A, setting value suggestion effect C, and setting value suggestion effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when executing setting value suggestion effect B, The predetermined character image is displayed in green, when setting value suggestion effect D is executed, the predetermined character image is displayed in orange display color, and when setting value suggestion effect F is executed, a rainbow is displayed. A predetermined character image is displayed in different display colors.

In this example, depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the fluctuating display of a decorative pattern that is out of place and a setting value suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to tell the player which setting value is currently set. It can create a sense of expectation.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production will be explained. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this example, it is possible to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance in the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol that is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, when the second KT state is in progress, as shown in FIG. It is clearly displayed that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), when the image display device 5 is performing a variable display of the left center right decorative symbol during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is In this case, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is executed during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined effect images 052IW005, 052IW006 on the image display device 5. In this example, a case is shown where an image of a racing car is displayed as the predetermined effect images 052IW005, 052IW006. In this case, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B1), a mode is adopted in which the predetermined effect image 052IW005 is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Accordingly, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. For example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or the effect image of any display color is displayed to suggest the small hit RUSH continuation. Depending on whether the performance is executed or not, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the second KT state (small win RUSH) will continue.

Next, the display mode of the right-handed hit notification will be explained. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of right-handed hit notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol results in a jackpot or the variable display of the second special symbol executes and results in a jackpot, when a jackpot game is in progress, As shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) lights up the right-handed display 26 (see steps 052IWS2018A and S2018B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 is turned on by the performance control CPU 120 (steps 052IWS2019A, S2019B, S639 reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the right-hitting display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 052IWS624).

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol results in a small hit, during the small hit game, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically In this case, the CPU 103) lights up the right-hand hitting indicator 26 (see step 052IWS2024B). Furthermore, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 is turned on by the performance control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2) (see step 052IWS2025B, S639). . However, unlike during a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-hand hit display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit occurs due to the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. The hit notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right hit display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the presentation modes of the over-winning suggestion presentation, the small hit winning suggestion presentation, and the prize ball number display suggestion presentation will be explained. FIG. 10-57 and FIG. 10-58 are explanatory views for explaining the presentation modes of the over-winning suggestion presentation, the small hit winning suggestion presentation, and the prize ball number display suggestion presentation. Note that in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on. Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, a case is shown in which the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on a 10R variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-57(A), during the jackpot game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Jackpot in progress!" and round number displays such as "Round 2". Prize ball number display 052IW008 is displayed. Also, if a normal prize (not an over-win) occurs in the jackpot during a jackpot game, the prize will be displayed in the normal display color (in this example, white) as shown in Figure 10-57 (B). 052IW009 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-win occurs during the jackpot game, and based on the occurrence of the over-win, it is decided to execute the over-win suggestion performance. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(C), the winning display 052IW010 (in this example, the characters "+15") is displayed according to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect, and the speaker 8L , 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 052IWS305 and S306). For example, when over-winning suggestion performance A is executed, a winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and a winning sound of sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 456, and based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 456, it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect A. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(D), a character display 052IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, a case is shown in which the award pitch number display suggestion effect A is executed, but for example, if it is decided to execute the award pitch number display suggestion effect B, the image display device 5 displays "555". A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and prize pitch number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the award ball count display suggestion effect C, the image display device 5 displays “666
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and a prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-58(E), when the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when controlled to the high probability/second KT state, as shown in Figure 10-58 (F), a text display such as "Small hit RUSH in progress!" is displayed, and the prize ball number display 052IW008 continues. will be displayed.

Next, in the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and the game ball enters the special winning slot, but if it is not decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect, the process shown in Figure 10-58 As shown in (F), the winning display 052IW012 (in this example, the characters "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example), and the winning sound is played from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output (see steps 052IWS325, S326).

Next, during the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and the game ball enters the special winning opening, and based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the special winning opening, a small winning winning suggestion presentation is performed. Assume that it has been decided to execute. In this case, as shown in Figure 10-58 (G), the winning display 052IW013 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed according to the determined type of small winning winning suggestion effect, and the speaker From 8L and 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the determined type of small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 052IWS323 and S324). For example, when the small winning winning suggestion performance A is executed, the winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability/second KT state, and based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2666, it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect F. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58(H), a character display 052IW014 such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, a case is shown in which the award ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, but for example, if it is decided to execute the award pitch number display suggestion effect D, the image display device 5 displays "2456". A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and a prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect E, characters such as "2555 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed.

Although not shown in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, for example, execution of the prize pitch number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the number of prize pitches reaching 1000. In this case, characters such as "1000 OVER" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize pitch number emphasizing effect B based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 2000, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , prize pitch number emphasizing effect B is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect C based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 3000, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the prize pitch count emphasizing effect C is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect D based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 4000, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the prize pitch count emphasizing effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect E based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 5000, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the prize pitch count emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, a small hit during a jackpot game or a high probability/second KT state). Although a case is shown in which the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios depending on the total game value awarded by the player, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state or the number of times the variable display was executed during the high probability/second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F with different selection ratios. The system may be configured to perform the following, and various aspects are possible.

Next, control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be explained. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a jackpot, the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a probability variable jackpot (in this example, 10R probability variable In the case of a jackpot fluctuation resulting in a jackpot (or a 6R probability variable jackpot), as shown in FIG. 10-59(A), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See Y in step 052 IWS1128A).

On the other hand, if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, a 6R normal jackpot), the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in Figure 10-59 (B). When this occurs, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1128A, step 052IWS1129A).

In addition, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-59 (C), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See step 052 IWS 1127A N).

During the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol will be a probability variable jackpot (in this example, 10R probability variable). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation resulting in a jackpot, a 6R definite variable jackpot, or a 2R definite variable jackpot, the second special symbol is displayed as a variable even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in Figure 10-59 (D). will continue. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See Y in step 052 IWS1128B).

On the other hand, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, 2R normal jackpot), the small hit symbol will be stopped and displayed as shown in Figure 10-59 (E). When this happens, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (N in step 052IWS1128B, see step 052IWS1129B).

In addition, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-59 (F), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See N in step 052 IWS1127B).

The control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modification of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-60 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in modification 1. In FIG. 10-60, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1127A are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19, but in modification 1, the determination process of step 052IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist. .

In modification example 1, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the CPU 103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129A, and sends a first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120. (Step 052IWS1129A). Note that in FIG. 10-60, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-61 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 1. In FIG. 10-61, the processes in steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22, but in modification 1, the determination process in step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. .

In modification example 1, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the CPU 103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129B, and sends a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120. (Step 052IWS1129B). Note that in FIG. 10-61, the processing at step 052IWS1130B is similar to the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 1.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the first special symbol is fluctuating and displaying a jackpot, whether the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether it is a jackpot fluctuation that normally results in a jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-62 (A), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly displayed as a missed symbol. It is stopped and displayed (see N in step 052IWS1127A, step 052IWS1129A).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-62 (B), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See step 052 IWS 1127A N).

If the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot, whether the variable display of the second special symbol is a jackpot variation that results in a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether it is a jackpot fluctuation that normally results in a jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-62 (C), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly displayed as a missed symbol. It is stopped and displayed (N in step 052IWS1127B, see step 052IWS1129B).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-62 (D), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See N in step 052 IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in modification 2. In FIG. 10-63, the processing in steps 052IWS1120A to S1126A is the same as those shown in FIG. Instead, the process of step 052IWS1127C is included.

In the second modification, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). Note that in FIG. 10-63, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 2. In FIG. 10-64, the processing in steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B is the same as those shown in FIG. Instead, the process of step 052IWS1127D is included.

In the second modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed results in a jackpot, the process is ended as is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a jackpot, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). Note that in FIG. 10-64, the processing at step 052IWS1130B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 2.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the first special symbol is fluctuating and displaying a jackpot, whether the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-65(A), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See Y in step 052 IWS1127C).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-65 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1127C, step 052IWS1129A).

If the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot, whether the variable display of the second special symbol is a jackpot variation that results in a probability variable jackpot. Regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-65(C), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See Y in step 052 IWS1127D).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or small hit, as shown in Figure 10-65 (D), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1127D, step 052IWS1129B).

In addition, in addition to the methods shown in Modifications 1 and 2, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of one special symbol while the other special symbol is fluctuating, for example, If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

For example, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that will result in a 10R probability variable jackpot, the second special symbol will be forced to miss and stop, while the second special symbol will become a 2R probability variable jackpot. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Also, for example, during the normal state (low probability/low base state), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that is being executed is off and fluctuates, It may be configured such that the game is forced to stop regardless of whether it is a small hit fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation. With this configuration, in this example, after 50 fluctuation displays in the low probability/high base state, the transition to the low probability/low base state will occur (see Figure 10-29). When the fluctuating display ends and transitions to the low probability/low base state, 1 to 4 second pending memories are accumulated, and if there is a second pending memory that will be a jackpot, the game will be forced to stop. This can prevent you from hitting the jackpot at an unintended moment. In particular, in a gaming machine that is configured to be controllable to the KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the second starting prize opening where it is easy to win a starting prize is activated. It is also possible to have a winning strategy in which the first starting prize is won and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the first winning opening. This method is effective as a preventive measure.

As mentioned above, various aspects can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in this feature section 052IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the same control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missed symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 10-59) is shown, different control may be used. FIG. 10-66 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 3. In addition, in modification 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 10-19. In FIG. 10-66, the processing in steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22, but in modification 3, the determination processing in steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. not exist. Therefore, in the third modification, if the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 052IWS1125B), the CPU 103 ends the process as is.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 3.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and (C), in Modification 3, during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, small hit, or probability variable jackpot, a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol continues even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, similar to FIGS. 10-59(A) and (C). In addition, as shown in Figures 10-67 (D) and (F), during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a miss, small hit, or probability variable jackpot, the small hit symbol stops in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. When displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol continues even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, similar to FIGS. 10-59(D) and (F).

Also, as shown in Figure 10-67(B), in Modification 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot. 10-59(B), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the winning symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67(E), in modification example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot. Unlike FIG. 10-59(E), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

As shown in Figure 10-67, in Modification Example 3, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol is forced to be displayed with a missed symbol. The control to stop and display is different.

In addition, in modification 3, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot, the small winning symbol is forced to miss and stops, while the normal jackpot is In the case where the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the variable display is continued, but this is limited to such a mode. do not have. For example, on the contrary, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol, which normally results in a jackpot, is executed, the variable display will continue, while the normal jackpot will be displayed. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to be forcibly missed and stopped. Also, for example, if a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a jackpot is being executed (regardless of whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), the result will be forcibly removed. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot (regardless of whether it is a guaranteed variable jackpot or a regular jackpot), the change will occur. The display may be configured to continue. In this way, in some form, the control to force the stop to be forced to come off may be different depending on whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in modification 4. In FIG. 10-68, the processing of steps 052IWS1120A to S1128A is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19.

In modification example 4, when the variable display of the first special symbol that does not result in either a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, a 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag to Check whether it is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the variable probability flag is not set (that is, if the probability variable state is not present), the process ends. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). Note that the process of step 052IWS1130A is similar to the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

In modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 052IWS1131A, when a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that normally results in a jackpot, The variable display of the first special symbol is not uniformly forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol, but the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol when the probability is in a variable state. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol that normally results in a jackpot is being displayed in a variable manner, if the probability is not in a variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-69 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 4. In FIG. 10-69, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1128B is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22.

In modification example 4, in step 052IWS1128B, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol that does not result in a 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, or 2R probability variable jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot). checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the variable probability flag is not set (that is, if the probability variable state is not present), the process ends. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). Note that the process of step 052IWS1130B is similar to the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

In modification example 4, by executing the determination process of step 052IWS1131B, when a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that normally becomes a jackpot, The variable display of the second special symbol is not uniformly forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol when the probability is in a variable state. On the other hand, even if the second special symbol that normally results in a jackpot is being displayed in a variable manner, if the probability is not in a variable state, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the modification 4, a case was shown in which control is performed to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol depending on whether or not the probability variation flag is set (whether or not it is in a probability variation state). I can't. For example, it may be configured to forcibly perform control to stop and display a missed symbol depending on whether or not the special symbol time saving flag is set. Further, for example, it may be configured such that control is performed to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol only when in a high probability/low base state (high probability flag is on, high base flag is off). Any type of control may be used as long as it is configured to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol in accordance with the current gaming state.

In addition, if the configuration is configured such that control is performed to forcibly stop and display a missed symbol only in the high probability/low base state as described above, it is possible to prevent the fluctuating display of one identification information from normally resulting in a jackpot, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small win RUSH) from being interrupted.

As explained above, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") that have different degrees of advantage for the player. be. In addition, it can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state), and the special state allows the player to control the game. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which value is easily assigned. Then, in response to a game medium (eg, a game ball) passing through a specific area (eg, a special winning opening), a setting suggestion performance (eg, a small hit winning suggestion performance) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

Specifically, in this example, the system is configured to be able to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect based on the game ball winning in the special winning slot during the high probability/second KT state (small winning RUSH). However, during the small win RUSH, the frequency of winning is especially high in the special winning opening, so it is possible to draw attention to the setting suggestion performance (in this example, the suggestion performance when winning a small hit), and improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance. be able to.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a setting suggestion performance (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion performance) is executed based on a game ball winning a prize in a special winning hole as a specific area, but such a mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, it may be configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion performance based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole (winning ball device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), general winning hole 10, or big winning hole as a specific area. good. Further, it may be configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion performance based on the entry of a game ball into an out port as a specific area. Further, for example, the setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executable based on the game ball passing through gates such as the passing gate 41 as the specific area.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to set the player to any one of a plurality of setting values (eg, setting values "1" to "6") that have different degrees of advantage for the player. In addition, it can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning gaming state), and the special state allows the player to control the game. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which value is easily assigned. In addition, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, a prize pitch display suggestion effect), and the ease with which the setting suggestion effect is executed varies depending on the length of the period in which the special state is controlled (for example, in Figure 10-43 As shown in , when the number of prize balls reaches 456, there is a 3% probability that the prize ball number display suggestion effect A can be executed, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, there is a 2% probability that the prize ball display will be executed. It is possible to execute the number display suggestion performance B, and when the number of prize balls reaches 666, it is possible to execute the number display suggestion performance C with a probability of 1%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2456, it is possible to execute the number display suggestion performance C. It is possible to execute the award pitch number display suggestion performance D with a probability of %, and when the number of award pitches reaches 2555, it is possible to execute the award pitch number display suggestion production E with a 3% probability, and the number of award pitches is 2666. When the number of balls is reached, it is possible to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect F with a probability of 2%). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

In this example, the "length of the period during which the special state is controlled" is determined by the timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, Although a case is shown in which the prize ball number display suggestion performance is executed during the period until a certain specific game value is awarded, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, "length of period controlled to special state" is the length of period controlled to advantageous state (in this example, jackpot gaming state), or controlled to special state (in this example, small winning gaming state). It may be the length of the period in which the period is set, or it may be the length of the total period.

In addition, when using the length of the period controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) as the "length of the period controlled to a special state", the length of the period from the fanfare of the jackpot game to the ending is used. Alternatively, the length of only the round game during the jackpot game may be used. In this case, for example, it may be configured such that the longer the period from the fanfare of the jackpot game to the ending of the jackpot is, the higher the rate of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, in the case of a jackpot with a small number of rounds during a jackpot game, the prize ball number display suggestion performance may be executed at a higher rate than in a jackpot with a large number of rounds.

For example, the "length of the period controlled by the special state" may be the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state, or the number of variable displays executed during the high probability/second KT state. Accordingly, it may be configured to perform a prize ball number display suggestion effect. In this case, for example, the larger the number of small hits, the higher the rate of the award ball number display suggestion effect, or the greater the number of variable displays, the higher the rate of the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect. . Also, for example, the number of prize balls display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate at the timing when the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, and the "length of the period controlled by the special state" may vary. There are many possible ways.

Generally, when a game machine displays a message such as "XXXX OVER" when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number, it displays "1000 OVER" or the like shown in this example, which emphasizes the number of prize balls. The prize balls are displayed in units of a certain degree of limitation, such as in units of 1000 prize balls, such as a display such as "2000 OVER." On the other hand, the award ball number display suggestion performance shown in this example is performed at a different timing than usual, such as when the number of award balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666. Since this is executed, it is possible to make the player expect a high setting while giving a sense of discomfort to the timing of occurrence of the prize ball number display suggestion performance, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state). Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) is included for determining the derivation and display of . Furthermore, it is possible to set the specific judgment value to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of specific judgment values. Further, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, appropriate gameplay can be achieved.

In addition, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance in response to control to a special state (for example, a small hit occurs during the high probability/second KT state, and a game ball enters the special prize opening. (Based on this, it is possible to perform a small hit award suggestion performance and a prize pitch number display suggestion performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the control to the special state.

In addition, this example shows a case where a setting suggestion performance (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion performance and a prize ball number display suggestion performance) is executed based on the game ball winning a prize in the special winning opening. , but is not limited to such embodiments. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting suggestion effect is executed at the start of a small winning game during small winning fluctuations or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in an open state. Further, for example, the configuration may be such that setting suggestion performance is executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. It is sufficient if the setting suggestion effect is executed in some form in response to the control for the small hit.

Further, according to the present feature part 052IW, when controlled to be in an advantageous state and when controlled to be in a special state, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17) is It can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a medium (for example, a game ball) can easily enter and an difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter. In addition, in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state, a setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are in the open state, Based on the occurrence of winning of game balls in the winning opening or special winning opening, it is possible to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance and a prize ball number display suggestion performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In addition, in this example, when executing a setting suggestion performance (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion performance and a prize ball number display suggestion performance) based on the game ball winning a prize in the big winning opening or the special winning opening. is shown, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when performing an opening effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state, a setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the presentation mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. It is sufficient that the setting suggestion performance is executed in some form in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state.

Furthermore, according to the feature section 052IW, when the control of the gaming state is switched (for example, at the start or end of a jackpot game, when transitioning from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) ), it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, in step 052 IWS624, the display mode (eg, display color) of the right-click display is changed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the switching of control of the gaming state.

In addition, in this example, "when the control of the gaming state is switched" is the setting at the start or end of a jackpot game, or when transitioning from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state). Although a case is shown in which the suggestive performance is configured to be executable, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the performance period when transitioning to a jackpot game during a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH), or the transition from a jackpot game to a high base state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state) The setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executable during the current performance period. Furthermore, for example, a gaming machine configured to shift to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH) based on a predetermined number of fluctuating displays or a predetermined number of small wins occurring during a high base state. In the above, the setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executable during the performance period when transitioning from the high base state to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), and there are various times when the control of the gaming state is switched. There are many possible ways.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display mode of right-handed hitting display or left-handed hitting display, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting suggestion performance is executed by changing the performance mode of the fanfare performance at the start of the jackpot and the ending performance at the end of the jackpot, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, depending on the number of times the special state is controlled during the special state, the total gaming value given by the special state during the special state, or the number of times variable display is executed during the special state, It is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different selection ratios (for example, depending on the number of prize balls reaching 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666, awards can be performed with different selection ratios). Execute pitch count display suggestion effects A to F. Or, for example, according to the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability/second KT state or the number of variable displays executed during the high probability/second KT state. , the number of prize pitches display suggestions effects A to F may be executed at different selection ratios.) Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the number of times the special state is controlled, the total gaming value, or the number of times variable display is executed.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, the special states include an advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state that is disadvantageous for the player compared to the advantageous special state (for example, the first KT state). can be controlled to Further, setting suggestion effects can be executed using different selection ratios depending on when the game medium passes through a specific area during an advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through a specific area during a disadvantageous special state (for example, Only when a small hit occurs and a game ball enters the special prize opening during the second KT state, it is possible to execute the small hit winning suggestion performance and the prize ball number display suggestion performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance in relation to the type of special state.

In addition, this example shows a case where the small hit winning suggestion performance and the prize ball number display suggestion performance can be executed only when a game ball enters the special winning opening during the second KT state. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, even if a game ball enters the special winning slot during the first KT state, the system is configured to be able to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance or a display suggesting the number of prize balls, and a game ball enters the special winning slot during the second KT state. It is now possible to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance at different rates depending on whether the game ball wins or the game ball enters the special prize opening during the 1st KT state. may be configured. Further, for example, even if an irregular game ball enters a special winning slot during a non-KT state, the system may be configured to be able to perform a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance. .

In the case of the above configuration, if a winning or irregular winning occurs in the special winning opening during the 1st KT state (high base state), and if a winning occurs in the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. In comparison, it may be configured to execute a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance at a high rate, or a small hit winning suggestion performance or a prize ball number display suggestion performance at a low rate. It may be configured to run.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, the value of the prize ball number counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during jackpot games based on 10R definite variable jackpot, 6R definite variable jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot and during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH). is updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not updated during jackpot games based on 2R probability variable winnings and 2R normal jackpots and during high base states (high probability/1st KT state, low probability/1st KT state) (However, (Does not reset the prize pitch counter) In addition, in principle, the prize pitch number display is hidden, and after the 50 fluctuating displays are finished in the low probability/1st KT state, the system returns to the normal state (low probability/low base state). Although a case has been described in which the value of the prize ball counter is controlled to be reset when the transition occurs, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. The value of the prize ball counter may be updated even during a jackpot game based on a 2R probability variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot.

In addition, in this example, by being configured as described above, for example, the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) is finished and the high base state (high probability/first KT state, low probability/first KT state) is completed. After transitioning to the state), if a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs during the high base state and the state shifts again to the high probability/2nd KT state (small win RUSH), the prize during the previous small win RUSH While the number of pitches is inherited, the value of the prize pitch counter can be updated and a prize pitch number display can be displayed.

In addition, it is not limited to the manner of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example, but for example, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs and the transition to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) occurs, the high probability/second KT state (Small win RUSH) and the immediately preceding jackpot game may be regarded as one section, and the number of prize balls in that section may be totaled and the total value may be displayed. Further, for example, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value may be executed by changing the display mode (in this example, display color) of the total value.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, as a "setting suggestion production", a small hit winning suggestion production and a prize ball number display suggestion production in a mode that suggests that the current setting value is one of the setting values "1" to "6". Although a case in which the above is executed is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, instead of suggesting the current setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a manner that suggests whether or not a setting change has been made to change the setting value when the gaming machine is powered on. good. In this way, the "setting suggestion effect" may be anything that suggests settings in some form.

Furthermore, according to the feature section 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. , when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, and a special display result is displayed as a display result of the variable display. When a display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from an advantageous state. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and it is better to derive and display the first specific display result. It is more advantageous for the player than if the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game). In addition, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information that corresponds to the first specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived and displayed display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or (2) The variable display of special symbols is continuously executed. In addition, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information that corresponds to the second specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived and displayed, the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a missed symbol) (Forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to implement control that takes into account the degree of advantage of the display results of variable display.

Specifically, even though it has moved to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or variable probability state, if it becomes a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) with a variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation of one of the identification information, The second KT state (small win RUSH) or variable probability state will end soon, and there is a possibility that interest in the game will decrease. On the other hand, if the fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining retention of one of the identification information is uniformly forced to stop and display the winning symbols (forced loss), even if the fluctuation display is a guaranteed variable jackpot, it will be a forced loss. As a result, the gaming value given to the player in an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) decreases, which is undesirable. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, while the fluctuation display that usually results in a jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is forced to miss, the fluctuation display that results in a probability variable jackpot is extended by extending the fluctuation (suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time). This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game while suppressing a decrease in the gaming value given to the player.

In addition, in this example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is Although the case is shown in which the process is executed continuously, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the suspended variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is resumed after the small winning game ends. It's okay. Any method that does not completely stop the variable display may be used.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the second KT state) in which the game value (for example, prize ball) is easily awarded due to the special state. Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value is easily awarded due to a special state, interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature part 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state) that is different from an advantageous state and that is easier to control to be an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) state)). Further, based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed, a specific state is controlled (for example, after the end of a jackpot game based on a probability variable jackpot, control is performed to a variable probability state), and a second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, the game is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether or not the control is to be controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the feature part 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state) that is different from an advantageous state and that is easier to control to be an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) state)). Further, it is possible to control to a specific state based on the fact that the game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through a specific area (for example, V area 052IW104) while being controlled to be in an advantageous state. When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the control is in an advantageous state compared to when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See Figure 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to implement control that takes into account whether or not it is easy for game media to pass through a specific area.

Furthermore, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to derive and display the special display result regardless of whether variable display of the first identification information or variable display of the second identification information is executed ( (See Figures 10-3 and 10-4). Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display that corresponds to the second specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information, the first identification A variable display of information is derived and displayed based on a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(B)). In addition, if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being performed, the second identification information Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display based on the predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display, it is possible to implement control that takes into account whether the first identification information or the second identification information is variable display.

Further, according to the feature part 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state) that is different from an advantageous state and that is easier to control to be an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) state)). Further, the variable display execution means, when controlled to be in the specific state, displays a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. During execution, based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (Fig. 10-68, 69). Further, when the control is in the non-specific state, while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponds to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control to derive and display the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see Figures 10-68 and 10-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to implement control that takes into consideration whether or not the control is in a specific state.

Further, according to the present feature part 052IW, based on the fact that the game medium (for example, a game ball) enters the first start area (for example, the first start prize opening), the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol ), and the variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) can be executed based on the game medium entering the second starting area (e.g., second starting prize opening). It is possible. Further, the variable means (for example, a special variable prize winning state) that can change between a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to enter. A ball device 17) is provided. In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state that is less advantageous than the advantageous state ( For example, the variable means can be controlled to the first state when the special state is controlled. Further, the first starting area is provided so that game media moving along a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the gaming area) among the movement paths in which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is configured to allow the game medium to enter the first starting area. A game medium that moves along a specific path (for example, the right area of the game area) is provided so that it can enter. In addition, it is possible to perform a specific notification (for example, the right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) to promote the firing of game media to a specific route, and it is possible to variably display the first identification information. When controlled to a special state after being executed, specific notification is not executed (for example, see FIG. 10-56 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of firing of game media.

Specifically, as shown in this feature part 052IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type of the first special symbol is This is configured so that the winning percentage (advantage) of the special winning opening is lower than that of the small winning type on the second special symbol side, and when a small winning occurs in the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is In the case where the fluctuating display of symbols is forcibly removed and stopped, if a right hit notification is executed for a small hit on the first special symbol side, which has a low winning percentage (advantage), it will effectively The player ends up hitting the game ball in vain even though it is almost impossible to expect to win a prize in the special winning hole, and it is not preferable that a disadvantageous firing promotion notification is performed. Therefore, in this example, the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, while the right hit notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to wasteful play by the player, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, the first holding storage means (for example, a first holding storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as a holding memory, and the variable display of the second identification information. and a second reservation storage means (for example, a second reservation storage buffer) capable of storing information related to the storage device as reservation storage. Furthermore, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) is entered. In addition to being controllable, a special state (for example, It is possible to control the small winning game state). Further, it is possible to control the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (eg, KT state) in which the display result becomes a special display result more frequently. Further, based on the fact that when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, a special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays, As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the suspended memory can be smoothly used.

In addition, according to this feature section 052IW, when controlled to a special state, it is possible to give a predetermined value (for example, payout 10 prize balls based on the winning of a game ball to a special prize opening), When controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of game balls in the big winning hole). In addition, as a specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, the lighting of the right-handed hitting indicator 26 and the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) and the first specific notification are It is possible to perform a second specific notification (for example, the right-hand hit display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56(1)) that is highly sensitive. Furthermore, when controlled to be in an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see Figure 10-56 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is controlled to be in a special state. In this case, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 10-56 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize notification corresponding to the value that can be provided.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small wins A to C). Furthermore, when the first identification information is variablely displayed and then controlled to a special state, it is more advantageous to have a higher ratio than when the second identification information is controlled to a special state after the variable display is executed. Control is performed to a special state of a low degree (for example, small win A). Further, when controlled to a special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, specific notification is executed (see (2) and (3) of FIG. 10-56). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification taking into consideration the player's advantage.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to perform a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a common variable display performance when controlled by the special state and when not controlled by the special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, , the non-reach pattern is forced to stop displaying). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's ability to recognize that the special state is controlled after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. Furthermore, the pending memory stored in the second pending storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to this characteristic part 052IW, a delay means (for example, a regulation piece provided on the variable winning ball device 6B) for delaying the movement of the game medium is provided upstream of the variable means in the specific route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed in the normal time from being targeted. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen strategies against gaming machines.

Note that the delay means is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example. For example, a passage member is provided as a delay means on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the gaming area, for moving the game balls in a meandering manner from side to side. You may.

In addition, according to the present feature section 052IW, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance based on information from the game control means. A production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) is provided. Moreover, the game control means controls the execution of notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs predetermined notification. Further, the production control means executes a specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification device. Therefore, appropriate notification can be realized while reducing the processing load on the performance control means.

In addition, in this example, the right hit notification is executed during the jackpot game, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Although this example is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a special variable winning ball device (large left winning hole) is provided on the left side of the gaming area, a special variable winning ball device (large right winning hole) is also provided on the right side of the gaming area, and the first special If a jackpot is achieved with the fluctuating display of symbols, the left big prize opening is opened during the jackpot game, and when a jackpot is achieved with the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, the right big prize opening is opened during the jackpot game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as such, if a jackpot is achieved with the variable display of the second special symbol, a right hit notification is executed during the jackpot game, while with the variable display of the first special symbol. In the case of a jackpot, the right hit notification may not be executed during the jackpot game. Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, a left-handed hit notification may be executed during a jackpot game. That is, the specific notification execution means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right large winning hole) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a jackpot is achieved with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, a left-handed hit notification is executed during the jackpot game, thereby preventing the player from accidentally performing a right-handed operation. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to players.

In addition, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, a case is shown in which the right-handed hit notification is executed even during the KT state. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, when applying to a gaming machine in which the second starting prize opening is provided on the left side of the gaming area, the configuration is such that the right hit notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. Good too.

In addition, in this example, in addition to turning on the right-handed hitting display 26 and the right-handed hitting notification LED 37 only during the jackpot game, the right-handed hitting display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to notify the right-handed hitting. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when performing the first variable display after the end of the jackpot game, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed hit indicator 26 and the right-handed hit notification LED 37. The right-handed hit notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed hit display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, in addition to turning on the right-handed hit display 26 and the right-handed hit notification LED 37, the right-handed hit display 052IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. The configuration may be such that the right-handed hit notification is executed.

Furthermore, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large right-handed batting display 052IW007 as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), a symbol display indicating right-handed batting (for example, a right-pointing triangular display) may be displayed on the image display device 5. Accordingly, the right-handed hit notification may be configured to be executable.

Moreover, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball devices (special winning openings) to be opened are different depending on the type of small hit, and the variable display of the first special symbol is used to indicate the small winning. The selection ratio of the small winning type may be configured to be different depending on whether the small winning occurs or when the variable display of the second special symbol results in a small winning. In this case, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small winning type that is opened by the special variable winning ball device with a small number of winning balls (or the small winning type in the opening mode with a low winning rate) is likely to be selected. , When performing a variable display of the second special symbol, the small winning type opened by the special variable winning ball device with a large number of winning balls (or the small winning type in the opening mode with a high winning rate) is likely to be selected. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in this example, if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, a right hit notification is performed during the small hit game (see Figure 10-56 (2)), and the variable display of the first special symbol is notified. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see Figure 10-56 (3)), but when a small hit occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol It may also be configured such that there is a case where the right-handed player is not notified of a right-handed hit. For example, if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs in a normal state where a left-handed operation should be performed, the configuration is such that the right-handed hit notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the state to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player. It is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) that is different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning game state). It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a variable probability state) and a specific state (for example, a variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to be advantageous than the non-specific state. In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) is included for determining the derivation and display of . Furthermore, it is possible to set the specific judgment value to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of specific judgment values. Furthermore, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value, and is the same when the control is in a non-specific state and when the control is in a specific state (Figures 10-3 and 10-3). -4)). Therefore, appropriate gameplay can be achieved.

Specifically, if the lottery probability and type distribution other than the jackpot winning probability change depending on the setting value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball payout performance) depending on the setting value may become too noticeable, and the gambling quality may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, by making the number of special judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the small winning probability common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the setting value. This prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 052IW, variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol). (can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency with which the display result becomes a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is increased. Therefore, appropriate gaming performance can be realized in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Furthermore, according to the feature part 052IW, the special states include a first special state (for example, the first KT state) and a second special state (for example, the second KT state) that is more advantageous than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, appropriate gaming performance can be achieved.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion performance (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance shown in FIG. 10-55) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, interest in the game can be increased.

Furthermore, according to the feature section 052IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a losing symbol) that is different from a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) and a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived as a display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, a setting value suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (for example, a setting value suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-54) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the setting value suggestion performance, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Although this example shows a case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance and the set value suggestion performance are executed in the fluctuating display that results in a loss, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to execute a small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance or a set value suggestion performance during a jackpot game or a small win game, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to this feature section 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small wins A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. Furthermore, the number of special type determination values is the same regardless of the setting value (see Figure 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate gameplay can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature part 052IW, by making the number of special type judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the distribution of the small hit type the same), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value is not excessive. This prevents it from becoming too large and prevents the gambling nature from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 10-6, the allocation of the small hit type is the same regardless of the setting value "1" to "6". It is not limited to this aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the small winning type may be varied depending on the setting value "1" to "6", so that the degree of advantage may differ depending on the setting value.

Moreover, according to this characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and 2R normal jackpot). Further, the type of advantageous state is determined using an advantageous type determination value (for example, a jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Furthermore, the number of advantageous type determination values is the same regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate gameplay can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature section 052IW, by making the number of advantageous type judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the distribution of jackpot types the same), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value is excessively large. This prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 10-5, the allocation of the jackpot type is the same regardless of the setting value "1" to "6", but such It is not limited to the form. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be varied depending on the setting value "1" to "6", so that the advantageous degree may differ depending on the setting value.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate gameplay can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature part 052IW, by making the number of variable display mode judgment values the same regardless of the setting value (making the distribution of variation patterns the same), the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value is not excessive. This prevents it from becoming too large and prevents the gambling nature from becoming excessively high.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the variable pattern differs depending on the setting value, the period from one small win control to the next small win control will change, and even if the small win winning probability is the same, it is advantageous in factors other than the jackpot lottery. This is undesirable because the degree (difference in ball output performance) differs greatly, but this characteristic part 052IW prevents such problems from occurring by making the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern the same regardless of the setting value. ing.

In this example, as shown in Figure 10-10, the allocation of the fluctuation pattern is the same regardless of the set value "1" to "6". It is not limited to the form. For example, by changing the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern depending on the setting value "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the fluctuation time, the fluctuation efficiency can be made different depending on the setting value. It may be configured so that the advantageousness differs depending on the value.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the state to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player. It is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) that is different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning game state). It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for determining the derivation and display of the variable display result, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. A predetermined judgment value (for example, a judgment value for a deviation judgment) is included. Furthermore, it is possible to set the specific judgment value to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of specific judgment values. Further, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined judgment value is included in the judgment values corresponding to all setting values, and the number of predetermined judgment values varies depending on the setting value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value and increase the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature section 052IW, control is possible between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probability variable state) and a specific state (for example, a probability variable state) that is more likely to be controlled to be an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all setting values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in a specific state.

Further, according to the feature part 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol). (can be executed in parallel with variable display). Further, the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is greater than the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state is The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to control the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result becomes a special display result more frequently. In addition, when a variable display is executed that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, a losing symbol) is derived and displayed, a setting value suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-54) is executed. Value suggestion performance) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the setting value suggestion performance, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature section 052IW, it is possible to variably display the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and to variably display the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) that is different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small winning game state). It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of a variable display (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment), and a special display result as a display result of a variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) is included for determining the derivation and display of . Furthermore, it is possible to set the specific judgment value to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of specific judgment values. In addition, the number of special judgment values among the judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is the same regardless of the set value (see Figure 10-4), and the number of special judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is the same regardless of the setting value (see Figure 10-4). The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate gameplay.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of identification information with a predetermined display result (forced stoppage), the advantage of the display result of the variable display is It was not possible to realize control that took the degree into consideration. Therefore, the present feature section 052IW includes the following gaming machines (means A1) to (means A6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can realize control that takes into account the advantageous degree of the display result of the variable display. Characteristic configurations of are also disclosed.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can play games, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a variable display of second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can execute the variable display of the symbols) in parallel, and the display of the variable display As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, a special state different from an advantageous state ( For example, a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can control the small winning game state), and a variable display execution means is based on deriving and displaying a special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. The first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol continues) execution), and a second control (for example, displaying a losing symbol and stopping (for example, displaying a losing symbol) to derive and display the variable display of one of the identification information with a predetermined display result (for example, a losing symbol) (for example, displaying a losing symbol and stopping (for example, the first special symbol or The variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed when the symbol falls off. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B depending on the determination results of steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, In modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display.

(Means A2) In means A1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is easily given due to a special state; Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion that executes step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be improved by providing a situation in which a game value is easily awarded due to the special state.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or A2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the advantageous state is Specific state control means (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed. (For example, control to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a variable probability jackpot), control to a non-specific state based on the second specific display result being derived and displayed (For example, control to a non-specific state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot) It may be configured such that the control is not later controlled to a variable state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not the control is to be performed in a specific state.

(Means A4) In any of the means A1 to A3, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , a specific state that is different from an advantageous state and can be controlled into a specific state (e.g., a high probability state (variable probability state)) that is easier to control into an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., a low probability state) The specific state control means includes a control means (e.g., a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2206), and the specific state control means controls the specific region (e.g., V area 052IWS104) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passing of the game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, compared to the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the control is in an advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in a jackpot game based on variable probability jackpots, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2) As shown in , in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short. According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control that takes into account whether or not it is easy for game media to pass through a specific area.

(Means A5) In any of the means A1 to A4, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , it is more advantageous for the player to derive and display the first specific display result than to derive and display the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), The variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (for example, when executing a variable display of the first identification information or when executing a variable display of the second identification information). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4), a variable display of the first identification information and a second specific display result. During the execution of the variable display corresponding to , the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, in the modified example 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A when the result in step 052IWS1128A is N. (See FIG. 10-67(B).) Variation of the second identification information If a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during execution of a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the second identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. Control to derive and display is not performed (for example, in Modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67 (See (E).). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether the first identification information or the second identification information is variable display.

(Means A6) In any of the means A1 to A5, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , it is more advantageous for the player to derive and display the first specific display result than to derive and display the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), Specific state control that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state)) that is different from an advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) The variable display execution means includes a means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2206), and the variable display execution means displays the first identification information and the Based on the fact that during the execution of the variable display of one of the second identification information corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Then, the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) Execute step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A (see Figures 10-68 and 10-69), change one of the first identification information and the second identification information when the control is in a non-specific state. If a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A, S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A, S1131B. -68, see Figure 10-69). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not a specific state is being controlled in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of identification information with a predetermined display result (forced stoppage), the advantage of the display result of the variable display is It was not possible to realize control that took the degree into consideration. Therefore, the present feature section 052IW includes the following gaming machines (means B1) to (means B6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can realize control that takes into account the advantageous degree of the display result of the variable display. Characteristic configurations of are also disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can play games, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a variable display of second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can execute the variable display of the symbols) in parallel, and the display of the variable display As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, a special state different from an advantageous state ( For example, a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can control the small winning game state), and a variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying special display results, regardless of whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or variable display of the second identification information (for example, the microcomputer 100 for game control (Specifically, the CPU 103 executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4.), variably displays one of the first identification information and the second identification information. is executed, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the first control (for example, the first variable time The update of the timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continued), and the variable display of the identification information of one of them is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, Second control to derive and display (for example, display a missed symbol and stop (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with a missed symbol) Whether the first control or the second control is executed depends on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically The CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, in modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display.

(Means B2) In means B1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is easily given due to a special state; Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion that executes step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be improved by providing a situation in which a game value is easily awarded due to the special state.

(Means B3) In means B1 or B2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the advantageous state is Specific state control means (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed. (For example, control to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game based on a variable probability jackpot), control to a non-specific state based on the second specific display result being derived and displayed (For example, control to a non-specific state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot) It may be configured such that the control is not later controlled to a variable state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether or not the control is to be performed in a specific state.

(Means B4) In any of the means B1 to B3, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , a specific state that is different from an advantageous state and can be controlled into a specific state (e.g., a high probability state (variable probability state)) that is easier to control into an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., a low probability state) The specific state control means includes a control means (e.g., a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2206), and the specific state control means controls the specific region (e.g., V area 052IWS104) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passing of the game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, compared to the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the control is in an advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in a jackpot game based on variable probability jackpots, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2) As shown in , in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short. According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control that takes into account whether or not it is easy for game media to pass through a specific area.

(Means B5) In any of the means B1 to B4, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , it is more advantageous for the player to derive and display the first specific display result than to derive and display the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), The variable display execution means derives and displays the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information while executing the variable display of the first identification information that corresponds to the second specific display result. , the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 3, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is N in step 052IWS1128A, the display in step 052IWS1129A, S1130A (See Figure 10-67 (B).), during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information that corresponds to the second specific display result, a special display is executed in the variable display of the first identification information. When the result is derived and displayed, the variable display of the second identification information is not controlled to be derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured as follows (see FIG. 10-66 and FIG. 10-67(E)) without performing the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether the first identification information or the second identification information is variable display.

(Means B6) In any of the means B1 to B5, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , it is more advantageous for the player to derive and display the first specific display result than to derive and display the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game), Specific state control that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variable state)) that is different from an advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) The variable display execution means includes a means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2206), and the variable display execution means displays the first identification information and the Based on the fact that during the execution of the variable display of one of the second identification information corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Then, the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in Modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) Execute step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A (see Figures 10-68 and 10-69), change one of the first identification information and the second identification information when the control is in a non-specific state. If a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A, S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A, S1131B. -68, see Figure 10-69). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not a specific state is being controlled in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Note that the configuration shown in the feature section 052IW can be appropriately combined with the structure shown in the feature section 21TM to configure a gaming machine. For example, a configuration that allows the setting value shown in the feature section 21TM to be changed can be applied to this feature section 052IW, so that a setting value suggestion effect can be executed, or a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. , Configure right -handed notes, configure the over -priced suggestion production, configuration, and a prize -winning suggestions can be executed, and a prize ball display suggestive production can be executed. You may also do so. Also, for example, by applying a configuration that allows the setting value shown in the feature section 21TM to be changed to the present feature section 052IW, a small hit may occur in the variable display of one special symbol while the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed. In this case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be forcibly stopped and displayed at the missed symbol, or the variable display may be continued.

Furthermore, when applying the configuration shown in the feature section 021TM, the setting value may be suggested by changing the mode of the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 9-5. In this case, for example, in the ending effect, a mode transition notification including small win RUSH and chance mode, etc., a notification to prevent forgetting to take out a card such as a prepaid card, a manufacturer logo display, etc. It is configured to suggest setting values by changing the mode transition notification, notification to prevent forgetting to remove a card, the display form of the manufacturer logo display, and the display form of images displayed at the same time. You may.

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 18TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 18TM will be explained. In this embodiment, as shown in the above-mentioned (description regarding the characteristic part 052IW), it is possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol simultaneously in parallel.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the gaming states include a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state where small wins are more likely to occur than the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states: a first KT state and a second KT state. In this feature section 18TM, the gaming state is controlled to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state), and a case where the gaming state is controlled to a low probability state and a first KT state (low probability/first KT state: time saving). state), high probability and first KT state (high probability/first KT state; probability variable state), high probability and second KT state (high probability/second KT state: small hit RUSH state).

(Relationship between gaming state, production symbols, and production mode)
First, each gaming state (low accuracy/non-KT state: normal state, low accuracy/1st KT state: time saving state, high accuracy/1st KT state: variable probability state, and high accuracy/2nd KT state: small hit RUSH state) , the relationship between each effect pattern (decorative pattern, first small pattern, and second small pattern) and each effect mode (day mode, night mode, cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode) will be explained in detail. In this embodiment, a pattern smaller than a decorative pattern, which is displayed at the upper right and upper left of the image display device 5, is a pattern that indicates whether or not a special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner and the display result of the special pattern. is called a small pattern. The variable display of the small symbols can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stationary display of the small symbols can also be executed in parallel with the stationary display of the special symbols. Then, from the left, the area at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 where the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed variably and in a static manner is a first small symbol display area 5l1, a first small symbol display area 5c1, and a first small symbol display area 5r1, and an area at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 where a second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed variably and statically is a second small symbol display area 5l2 from the left; They are called a second small pattern display area 5c2 and a second small pattern display area 5r2.

The display areas of the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 are smaller than those of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 have smaller display areas than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern, and the visibility of the second small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of decorative symbols, small symbols, and background images corresponding to gaming states. In this embodiment, a variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, there are cases where the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and cases where the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Which of the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display the decorative symbol variable display is executed in response to varies depending on the gaming state. In the following explanation, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol that corresponds to the decorative symbol will be referred to as the main symbol, and among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol will be referred to as the main symbol. The special designs are called sub-designs.

In other words, the state in which the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol means that in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the first special symbol is displayed in response to the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. At the same time, the variable display of one small symbol is executed, and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second small symbol display area 5L2, At 5c2 and 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the state in which the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol means that in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2, the second special symbol is displayed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. At the same time, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first small symbol display area 5l1, In 5c1 and 5r1, a state in which a variable display of the first small symbol is executed in response to a variable display of the first special symbol.

As mentioned above, the gaming states in this embodiment include the "low certainty/non-KT state" (sometimes referred to as the normal state) corresponding to the low probability low base state, and the "low probability/non-KT state" (sometimes referred to as the normal state) corresponding to the low probability high base state. "Accurate / 1st KT state" (sometimes referred to as time saving state), ``High accuracy / 1st KT state'' (sometimes referred to as variable probability state) corresponding to the high accuracy high base state, and High accuracy low base state. There is a corresponding "high accuracy/second KT state" (sometimes referred to as a small hit RUSH state). When the gaming state is controlled to (i) low accuracy/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. On the other hand, if the gaming state is controlled to (ii) low accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high accuracy/first KT state, (iv) high accuracy/second KT state. In either case, the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol.

That is, in the case of (i), the decorative pattern and the first small pattern are information corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern, and the second small pattern is information corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern. However, in cases (ii) to (iv), the decorative pattern and the second small pattern are information corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern, and the first small pattern is the information corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern. The information corresponds to the variable display. In addition, in the following explanation, "special pattern 1" in the figure has shown the 1st special pattern, and "special pattern 2" in the drawing has shown the 2nd special pattern.

FIG. 11-1(A) shows the image display device 5 when the gaming state is a low accuracy/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen. In addition, in Fig. 11-1 (B), the image is displayed when the gaming state is the low probability/first KT state (time saving state), the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. 5 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the device 5. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 11-2 (C1) to (C3), the gaming state is high certainty/first KT state (variable probability state), the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. 5 is a diagram showing an example of an image sometimes displayed on the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, in Figures 11-2 (D1) to (D3), the gaming state is high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when .

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a first pending display area that displays the first pending storage number (0 to 4 first pending displays 18TM010). 18TM011 is provided, and a second reservation display area 18TM021 for displaying the second reservation storage number (0 to 4 second reservation displays 18TM020) is provided at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, an active display is displayed, which is information corresponding to the fluctuating display of decorative symbols being executed, and information corresponding to the fluctuating display of the special symbol as the main symbol being executed. An active display area 18TM031 for displaying 18TM030 is provided.

Further, a first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 is provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first pending display area 18TM011) to display the first pending memory number. A second pending storage number special display area 18TM025 for displaying the second pending storage number is provided on the right side of the screen (above the second pending display area 18TM021). As described above, the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 for displaying first small symbols corresponding to the first special symbol. At the upper right of the screen of the display device 5, second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 are provided for displaying second small symbols corresponding to the second special symbol.

Here, the first pending display area 18TM011 displays a number of objects (round images) corresponding to the first pending memory number, and the second pending display area 18TM021 displays objects (round images) corresponding to the second pending memory number. A number of objects (round images) are displayed. On the other hand, the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 displays the first pending memory number as a numerical value, and the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025 displays the second pending memory number as a numerical value. Ru. The display range of objects in the first pending display area 18TM011 is wider than the display range of numerical values in the first pending storage number special display area 18TM015, and the first pending storage number is displayed in the first pending display area 18TM011. It will be displayed with higher visibility than the memory number special display area 18TM015. Further, the display range of objects in the second pending display area 18TM021 is wider than the display range of numerical values in the second pending storage number special display area 18TM025, and the second pending storage number is displayed in the second pending display area 18TM021. 2.It is displayed with higher visibility than the special display area 18TM025 for the number of pending memories.

In addition, in the first reservation display area 18TM011, when the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (i.e., the gaming state is (i) low probability / non-KT state (normal state) ), the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number is displayed, but when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (i.e., the gaming state is (ii) Low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state), (iii) high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state), and (iv) high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). ), the object itself is hidden from view. In this way, objects corresponding to the first pending storage number are displayed in the first pending display area 18TM011 according to the gaming state. On the other hand, the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 displays the first pending memory number regardless of the gaming state (also when the gaming state is any of (ii) to (iv)). Therefore, even when the player is in a gaming state (any of (ii) to (iv)) in which no object is displayed in the first pending display area 18TM011, by checking the first pending storage number special display area 18TM015, The number of first pending memories can be grasped.

In addition, in the second reservation display area 18TM021, when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (i.e., the gaming state is (ii) low probability/first KT state (time saving state) ), (iii) high certainty/first KT state (variable probability state), and (iv) high certainty/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)), corresponds to the second pending memory number. However, when the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (i.e., the gaming state is (i) low certainty/non-KT state (normal state) ), the object itself is hidden from view. In this way, objects corresponding to the second pending storage number are displayed in the second pending display area 18TM021 according to the gaming state. On the other hand, the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025 displays the second pending memory number regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is (i)). Therefore, even in the gaming state (i) where no object is displayed in the second pending display area 18TM021, the player can grasp the second pending memory number by checking the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025. Can be done.

In addition, in the active display area 18TM031, objects corresponding to the variable display of the main symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed, regardless of the gaming state, and serve as sub symbols. Objects that correspond to the variable display of special symbols are not displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 11-1(A) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to a low-probability/non-KT state (normal state). When the gaming state is controlled to be in the low-probability/non-KT state, the production mode is controlled to the daytime mode by the production control CPU 120. When the production mode is the daytime mode, a "daytime image" representing a daytime landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the number of first reserved memories is 4 and the number of second reserved memories is 2, the first special symbol which is the main symbol is fluctuated and the second special symbol which is the sub symbol is displayed. The variable display of special symbols is executed in parallel at the same time. In addition, "4" is displayed in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015, "2" is displayed in the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025, and four first A pending display 18TM010 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 18TM031, an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the first special symbol, which is the main symbol) is displayed. In addition, variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is the main symbol) is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 A variable display of the small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is being executed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol, which is a sub symbol) is displayed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2. ) is being displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 11-1(B) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability/first KT state (time saving state). When the gaming state is controlled to the low probability/first KT state, the production mode is controlled to the night mode by the production control CPU 120. When the production mode is night mode, a "night image" representing a night landscape including the night sky and mountains is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the number of first reserved memories is 2 and the number of second reserved memories is 4, the first special symbol which is a sub symbol is displayed fluctuating and the second special symbol which is a main symbol is displayed. The variable display of special symbols is executed in parallel at the same time. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025, and four second A pending display 18TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 18TM031, an active display 18TM030 corresponding to a variable display of decorative symbols (a variable display of a second special symbol which is a main symbol) is displayed. In addition, variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol, which is the main symbol) is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 A variable display of the small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a sub symbol) is being executed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2. ) is being displayed.

FIGS. 11-2 (C1) to (C3) are diagrams showing the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state). When the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/first KT state, the player can select any performance mode from cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode. Then, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance mode to be one of the selected performance modes.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (C1), a "cloudy image" representing a cloudy landscape including clouds is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern in response to the fact that the production mode is cloudy mode. . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (C2), in response to the fact that the production mode is rain mode, a "rain image" representing a rainy landscape including clouds and rain is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. is displayed. In addition, in the example shown in Figure 11-2 (C3), in response to the fact that the production mode is typhoon mode, the background image of the decorative pattern is "Typhoon", which represents a typhoon landscape including clouds, wind, and rain. image" is displayed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C1) to (C3), when the first pending memory number is 2 and the second pending memory number is 4, the first special symbol that is a sub symbol The variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main symbol, are executed in parallel at the same time. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025, and four second A pending display 18TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 18TM031, an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. In addition, variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol, which is the main symbol) is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 A variable display of the small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a sub symbol) is being executed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is being displayed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2. ) is being displayed.

FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3) are diagrams showing the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state). When the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, the player can select any performance mode from cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode. Then, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance mode to be one of the selected performance modes.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (D1), a "cloudy image" representing a cloudy landscape including clouds is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern in response to the fact that the production mode is cloudy mode. . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (D2), in response to the fact that the production mode is rain mode, a "rain image" representing a rainy landscape including clouds and rain is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. is displayed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (D3), in response to the fact that the production mode is typhoon mode, the background image of the decorative pattern is "Typhoon", which represents a typhoon landscape including clouds, wind, and rain image" is displayed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), when the first pending memory number is 2 and the second pending memory number is 4, the first special symbol that is a sub symbol The variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main symbol, are executed in parallel at the same time. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025, and four second A pending display 18TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 18TM031, an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. In addition, variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol, which is the main symbol) is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 A variable display of the small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a sub symbol) is being executed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is being displayed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2. ) is being displayed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C1) and (D1), when the production mode is controlled to cloudy mode, number symbols (in this example, "0" to "9"), and a special pattern 18TM050 (in this example, it is a decorative pattern in which the word "OPEN" is shown on an oval object, and is a decorative pattern that notifies the occurrence of a small hit). A variable display of decorative symbols is performed, and a variable display of second small symbols consisting only of numerical symbols (in this example, "0" to "9") is performed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C2) and (D2), when the production mode is controlled to rain mode, a numeric symbol (in this example, "0") is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. - "9") is displayed in a variable manner, and in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the second small pattern display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 displays a second decorative pattern consisting only of numeric symbols (in this example, "0" to "9"). A variable display of small symbols is performed.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C3) and (D3), when the production mode is controlled to the typhoon mode, the number symbols (in this example, "0" ” to “9”) is displayed, and in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2, a decorative pattern consisting only of numeric symbols (in this example, “0” to “9”) is displayed. A variable display of two small symbols is performed.

In this embodiment, irrespective of the game state or production mode, the symbols forming the second small symbol are numerical symbols from "0" to "9", and the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner or stopped. The displayed areas are second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2. That is, in this embodiment, the second small symbols that are variably displayed are the same regardless of the gaming state or the production mode, and the area where the variably displayed is performed is also common.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 11-2, when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) and when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The variable display mode of the second small symbol is the same, and the variable display area of the second small symbol is also the same. Further, regardless of the performance mode, the variable display mode of the second small symbol is the same, and the variable display area of the second small symbol is also common. According to such a configuration, there is a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) and a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). As a result, the display mode and display area of the second small symbol can be made common regardless of which production mode it is controlled by, so the player can accurately display the second small symbol even if the production mode is switched. It becomes possible to understand.

As shown in Figure 11-2 (C1), there is a case where the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), and a case where the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) as shown in Figure 11-2 (D1). /In both the case of being controlled to the second KT state (small hit RUSH state), a common "cloudy image" can be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C2), the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), and as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D2), the gaming state is In either case, a common "rain image" can be displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern, whether it is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C3), the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), and as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D3), the gaming state is In either case, a common "typhoon image" can be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, whether it is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Unlike the case where the control is in the 1KT state (probability variable state), there is a display corresponding to the control in the high precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) at the upper right and lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Special display 18TM100 is displayed. The special display 18TM100 includes the word "RUSH" to notify that it is in the small hit RUSH state, and displays a background image (cloudy image, cloudy image, rain image or typhoon image).

Here, the special display 18TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image (the display layer is higher than the background image, and the special display 18TM100 is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it appears in the foreground when viewed from the player). Note that an animation operation may be performed in which the characters "RUSH" included in this special display 18TM100 move within the area of the special display 18TM100. For example, an animation operation may be performed in which the characters "RUSH" move from the upper left direction to the lower right direction within the area of the special display 18TM100. Such an animation operation can further enhance the presentation effect in the small hit RUSH state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), in any production mode, the area where the special display 18TM100 at the upper right of the screen is displayed is the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2. , 5r2, and the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025. Similarly, the area where the special display 18TM100 at the lower left of the screen is displayed does not overlap with the active display area 18TM031, nor does it overlap with the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015.

As shown in Figure 11-2, when the game is controlled in either the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) or the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the control is set to cloudy mode. It is possible, and the background image can be a "cloudy image". Also, when the game is controlled in either the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) or the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), it is possible to control the rain mode and change the background image to " It is possible to create a rain image. Also, when the game is controlled in either the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) or the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), it can be controlled to typhoon mode, and the background image can be changed to " It is possible to create a typhoon image.

In this way, it is possible to control to a common production mode when it is controlled to the high accuracy / 1st KT state (variable probability state) and when it is controlled to the high accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state) By being able to control a common presentation mode, it becomes possible to share production data such as background images. It is possible to control the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) and the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) to a common production mode, and perform production based on common production data (for example, background image). By making it possible, compared to the case where separate production modes (specific to the gaming state) are provided for the high accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) and the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), It is possible to suppress the storage capacity of presentation data and reduce the burden of developing presentation data.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-2, the display mode of the first pending storage number (first pending display mode) in the first pending display area 18TM011 is the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state). ) and high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), regardless of which production mode is being controlled. In addition, the display mode of the second pending storage number (second pending display mode) in the second pending display area 18TM021 is also the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variable state) and the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). This is common regardless of which production mode is being controlled. Furthermore, the display mode of the active display in the active display area 18TM031 is regardless of whether it is controlled to the production mode of high accuracy / 1st KT state (probability change state) or high accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state). Common.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first reservation display area 18TM011 is displayed regardless of which production mode is controlled: the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) or the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The second hold display area 18TM021 is also common regardless of whether it is controlled in the production mode of high accuracy / 1st KT state (probability change state) or high accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state). The active display area 18TM031 is also common regardless of whether the performance mode is controlled to be the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) or the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

In this way, at least a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) and a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state). Regardless of which production mode is being controlled, the display format of the corresponding display (first pending display, second pending display, active display) corresponding to the variable display of special symbols is standardized, and the corresponding display ( The areas in which the first pending display, second pending display, and active display are displayed are shared. As a result, the player can distinguish between a period in which the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) and a period in which the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/second KT state (small winning RUSH state). Even when the production mode changes, the number of pending memories (first number of pending memories, number of second pending memories) can be easily grasped, and whether or not the variable display of special symbols is being executed. can be easily understood.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-1 and FIG. The display format of the corresponding display (first pending display, second pending display, active display) is made common between the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) and the corresponding display (first pending display). display, second pending display, and active display) are shared. Not only in this form, but in relation to one or both of the non-KT state (normal state) and low certainty/first KT state (time saving state), high certainty/first KT state (variable probability state) and high certainty/second KT state. The corresponding display may be displayed in a manner different from the state (small hit RUSH state), and is different from the high accuracy / 1st KT state (probability change state) and the high accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state) A corresponding display may be displayed in the area.

That is, in the high-accuracy state (high-accuracy/first KT state, high-accuracy/second KT state), the production mode is shared between the first KT state and the second KT state, whereas in the low-accuracy state (non-KT state) In the low-accuracy state (low-accuracy/first KT state), the display mode of the corresponding display in the low-accuracy state is changed to correspond to the fact that it is controlled to a different production mode (day mode, night mode) from the high-accuracy state. The display mode of the correspondence display in the low certainty state may be made different from the display area of the correspondence display in the high certainty state.

In this way, at least a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) and a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state). It is preferable to make the display mode of the corresponding display common regardless of which production mode is being controlled, and also to make the area where the corresponding display is displayed common.

Note that the display mode (or display area) of the corresponding display may be different depending on which production mode is being controlled, without being limited to such a form. However, the same performance may occur during the period when the gaming state is controlled to high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) and during the period when the gaming state is controlled to high certainty/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). If the mode is controlled, the display mode (and display area) of the corresponding displays shall be shared.

For example, if the production mode is controlled to cloudy mode, the corresponding display (active display, pending display) will be a round object with the word "cloud" displayed, and the production mode will be set to rain mode. If it is controlled, the corresponding display (active display, pending display) will be a round object with the word "rain" displayed, and if the production mode is controlled to typhoon mode, The corresponding display (active display, pending display) is a round object with the word "stand" shown on it. In this way, when the display mode of the corresponding display is made different for each performance mode, the period when the gaming state is controlled to be high certainty/first KT state (variable probability state) and the period when the gaming state is controlled to be high certainty/second KT state (Small hit RUSH state) and when the same production mode is controlled (for example, when the production mode is controlled to cloudy mode), the display mode of the corresponding display is the same. (for example, the corresponding display is an image in which the word "cloud" is shown on a round object).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the display mode of the first pending memory number in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 is non-KT state (normal state), low certainty/first KT state (time saving state), and high certainty/second KT state. This is common regardless of whether the game state is controlled to be the 1KT state (variable probability state) or the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state). In addition, the display mode of the second pending storage number in the second pending storage number special display area 18TM025 is also non-KT state (normal state), low certainty/first KT state (time saving state), high certainty/first KT state (variable probability state). ), and the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state), regardless of which gaming state is being controlled.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 is displayed in a non-KT state (normal state), a low probability/first KT state (time saving state), a high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), and a high probability/first KT state (variable probability state). This is common regardless of which gaming state is being controlled, namely the sure/second KT state (small win RUSH state). In addition, the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 also shows non-KT state (normal state), low certainty/first KT state (time saving state), high certainty/first KT state (variable probability state), and high certainty/second KT state. This is common regardless of which gaming state (small win RUSH state) is being controlled.

In this way, the position of the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 on the screen and the display mode of the first pending memory number displayed in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 vary depending on the gaming state. Also, it is common regardless of the production mode. In addition, the position of the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025 on the screen and the display mode of the second pending memory number displayed in the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025 are independent of the gaming state. Also, this is common regardless of the production mode. As a result, even when the image display device 5 executes a performance corresponding to each performance mode, the player can accurately grasp the number of pending memories (the first number of pending memories, the second number of pending memories). It becomes possible.

(Transition of gaming state)
In this embodiment, in the low accuracy/non-KT state (normal state), the player performs a firing operation (left-handed hit) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, starting winnings to the first starting winning hole mainly occur, and a variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, as shown in Figure 10-29, since the first special symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner, if a jackpot occurs in a low-probability/non-KT state (normal state), the 9% [10R probability variable jackpot] occurs at a rate of 56%, [6R probability variation jackpot] occurs at a rate of 35%.

As shown in Figure 10-29, if [10R probability variable jackpot] occurs in the low probability/non-KT state (normal state), after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) ). In addition, if a [6R probability variable jackpot] occurs in the low probability/non-KT state (normal state), after the end of that jackpot game, it will shift to the high probability/first KT state (probability variation state) and the next jackpot will occur. The high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) is maintained until Also, if a [6R normal jackpot] occurs in the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state), after the jackpot game ends, the system will move to the low-probability/first KT state (time-saving state) and the next jackpot will occur. The low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state) is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the KT state (high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state), low probability/first KT state (time saving state), high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)), the player Aim at the right side of the game area and perform a firing operation (hitting to the right) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, starting winnings mainly occur in the second starting winning hole, and mainly a variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Also, as shown in Figure 10-29, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the KT state, the rate of [10R variable jackpot] or [2R probability variable jackpot] occurs at a rate of 50%, [6R probability variation jackpot] occurs at a rate of 35%, and [2R regular jackpot] occurs at a rate of 35%.

As shown in Figure 10-29, if a 10R probability variable jackpot or [2R probability variable jackpot] occurs in the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability/second KT state ( The high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, if a [6R probability variable jackpot] occurs in the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), after the end of that jackpot game, the state will shift to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) and the next jackpot will occur. The high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) is maintained until In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of [6R probability variable jackpot] is 50% in total (see Figure 10-5), so once the high probability/ When the first KT state (variable probability state) is reached, the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) will loop at a rate of 50%. In addition, if [2R normal jackpot] occurs in the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), after the end of that jackpot game, it will shift to the low probability/first KT state (time saving state) and the next jackpot will occur. The low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state) is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed.

As shown in Figure 10-29, if a [10R probability variable jackpot] or [2R probability variable jackpot] occurs in the low probability/first KT state (time saving state), after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state), and the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, if a [6R probability variable jackpot] occurs in the low probability/first KT state (time saving state), after the end of that jackpot game, it will shift to the high probability/first KT state (probability variation state) and the next jackpot will occur. The high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) is maintained until In addition, if a [2R normal jackpot] occurs in the low probability/first KT state (time saving state), after the end of that jackpot game, it will shift to the low probability/first KT state (time saving state) and the next jackpot will occur. The low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state) is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed. In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of [2R normal jackpot] is 35% (see Figures 10-5 (D) and (E)). Once the low certainty/first KT state (time saving state) is reached, the low certainty/first KT state (time saving state) will loop at a rate of 35%. In addition, if [6R normal jackpot] or [2R normal jackpot] occurs and becomes low accuracy/1st KT state (time saving state), 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring. As shown in FIG. 10-29, the state shifts to a low certainty/non-KT state (normal state).

As shown in Figure 10-29, if [10R probability variable jackpot] or [2R probability variation jackpot] occurs in the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability/ The state shifts to the second KT state (small win RUSH state), and the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of [10R probability variable jackpot] or [2R probability variable jackpot] is 15% (Figure 10-5 (D) , (E)), once the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state) is reached, the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state) will loop at a rate of 15%. In addition, if [6R probability variable jackpot] occurs in the high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), after the end of that jackpot game, it will move to the high probability / 1st KT state (probability variation state) and the next jackpot will occur. The high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) is maintained until . In addition, if [2R normal jackpot] occurs in the high-accuracy/2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), after the end of that jackpot game, it will shift to the low-accuracy/1st KT state (time saving state) and the next jackpot will be played. The low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state) is maintained until 50 times of fluctuation display is completed.

In this way, in this embodiment, the ratio of which game state is controlled to is high certainty/first KT state (probability variable state) and high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) depending on the jackpot type. The game value (number of prize balls) ultimately awarded to the player differs greatly depending on which game state is controlled. Therefore, the player pays attention to the type of jackpot when the jackpot occurs.

(Example of production in each production mode)
Figures 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5 show production examples in each production mode when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). . FIGS. 11-3 (A1) to (A3) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit" when the effect mode is cloudy mode. , FIGS. 11-4 (B1) to (B3) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit" when the effect mode is rain mode. Yes, and FIGS. 11-5 (C1) to (C3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a production image when the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit" when the production mode is typhoon mode. It is.

(Small hit during cloudy mode)
As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A1), when the player selects the cloudy mode as the performance mode while the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance mode. Controlled to cloudy mode. When the production mode is the cloudy mode and the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, a "cloudy image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the top right of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A special display 18TM100 corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) will be displayed at the bottom left of the screen.

The special display 18TM100 is displayed in a superimposed manner with the background image with a higher priority than the background image (the display layer is higher than the background image and the special display 18TM100 is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it appears in the foreground when viewed from the player). When the CPU 103 is simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed. In the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern which is a sub pattern) is displayed in a variable manner. A variable display is being performed.

Since the first pending memory number is 2, the performance control CPU 120 displays "2" in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second pending memory number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Furthermore, the active display area 18TM031 displays an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second pending display area 18TM021 displays four second pending displays 18TM020.

When the second KT state is in progress, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A1), the image display device 5 displays a continuous small win number display indicating the number of consecutive small wins during the second KT state. , a number of award balls during consecutive small hits is displayed, which indicates the number of award balls awarded during the period in which small hits occur continuously during the second KT state. In this example, after the 10R variable jackpot occurs and the transition to the 2nd KT state occurs, it is assumed that three small hits have occurred up to this point, and as shown in Figure 11-3 (A1), the small hits are continuous. A case is shown in which characters such as "3rd time" are displayed as a number display. Also, during the first jackpot game based on the 10R guaranteed variable jackpot, 15 balls x 10 balls x 10 rounds = 1500 prize balls are obtained, and for each subsequent small hit, 10 balls x 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained. Figure 11-3 (A1) As shown in , a case is shown in which characters such as "1590pt" are displayed as the number of balls awarded during consecutive small hits.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A2), the performance control CPU 120 displays any information in the symbol display area 5L in response to the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becoming a "small hit" symbol. At the same time, the number symbol ("1" in this example) is stopped, any number symbol ("8" in this example) is stopped in the symbol display area 5R, and the special symbol 18TM050 (ellipse) is placed in the symbol display area 5C. This is a decorative pattern in which the word "OPEN" is shown on a shaped object, and the decorative pattern (which notifies the occurrence of a small hit) is stopped. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the production mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, the symbol display areas 5L and 5R are Then, the numerical symbols are fixed and stopped, and the special symbol 18TM050 is fixed and stopped in the symbol display area 5C. As a result, the player can expect a small hit (the special symbol 18TM050 stops in the symbol display area 5C) even after the combination of number symbols that do not reach reach stops in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R. can.

In addition, in the cloudy mode, the production control CPU 120 sets the small symbol corresponding to the special symbol 18TM050, which is fixed and stopped when a small hit occurs, to "0", and displays the following in the second small symbol display area 5l2. "1" of the second small pattern corresponding to "1" of the decorative pattern (number pattern), "0" of the second small pattern corresponding to the special pattern 18TM050, second small pattern in the second small pattern display area 5c2 The second small pattern "8" corresponding to the decorative pattern (number pattern) "8" is fixed and stopped in the display area 5r2. Furthermore, the occurrence of a small win is notified by displaying the words "Small win!!" on the upper part of the image display device 5. Since the game state is controlled to be a small win game state, the performance control CPU 120 updates the small win consecutive number display to "4th time".

Next, during the period when the game state is controlled to the small winning game state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display area 18TM031. The active display 18TM030 that was displayed on the screen and the four second pending displays 18TM020 that were displayed on the second pending display area 18TM021 are erased, and the character and the message "Small hit attacker is open!" are displayed on the image display device 5. Display the lines.

In addition, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 was open, 3 game balls were won into the special winning hole, and the number of winning balls was further increased by 10 x 3 balls = 30, for a total of 1620 balls. shall be taken as a thing. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A3), the performance control CPU 120 displays three images of "+10" at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, and changes the display of the number of prize balls during consecutive small hits to " 1620pt”.

(Small hit during rain mode)
As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B1), when the player selects the rain mode as the performance mode while the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance mode. Controlled by rain mode. When the production mode is the rain mode and the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, a "rain image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the "rain image" is displayed at the top right of the screen of the image display device 5. A special display 18TM100 corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) will be displayed at the bottom left of the screen.

The special display 18TM100 is displayed in a superimposed manner with the background image with a higher priority than the background image (the display layer is higher than the background image and the special display 18TM100 is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it appears in the foreground when viewed from the player). When the CPU 103 is simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed. In the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern which is a sub pattern) is displayed in a variable manner. A variable display is being performed.

Since the first pending memory number is 2, the performance control CPU 120 displays "2" in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second pending memory number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 displays an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second pending display area 18TM021 displays four second pending displays 18TM020.

When the second KT state is in progress, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a continuous small win number display indicating the number of consecutive small wins during the second KT state. , a number of award balls during continuous small hits display indicating the number of award balls awarded during the period in which small hits are continuously occurring during the second KT state is displayed. In this example, after the 10R variable jackpot occurs and the transition to the 2nd KT state occurs, it is assumed that three small hits have occurred up to this point, and as shown in Figure 11-4 (B1), the small hits are continuous. A case is shown in which characters such as "3rd time" are displayed as a number display. Also, during the first jackpot game based on the 10R guaranteed variable jackpot, 15 balls x 10 balls x 10 rounds = 1500 prize balls are obtained, and for each subsequent small hit, 10 balls x 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained. Figure 11-4 (B1) As shown in , a case is shown in which characters such as "1590 pt" are displayed as the number of prize balls during consecutive small hits.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B2), the production control CPU 120 displays a number in the symbol display area 5L in response to the fact that the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a "small hit" symbol. The symbol "1", the numerical symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C, and the numerical symbol "5" in the symbol display area 5R are fixed and stopped, respectively. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the production mode is controlled to rain mode, the symbol display areas 5L and 5C correspond to the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becoming a "small hit". , 5R, a predetermined combination of numerical symbols (in this example, the order of odd symbols "135") is fixed and stopped. Thereby, even when a combination of decorative symbols (number symbols) different from jackpot symbols stops appearing in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the player can expect a small win to occur.

In addition, in the rain mode, the performance control CPU 120 uses "135" as the combination of decorative symbols (number symbols) that are fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when a small hit occurs. In the second small pattern display area 5l2, the second small pattern "1" corresponding to the decorative pattern (numeric pattern) "1", and in the second small pattern display area 5c2, the decorative pattern (numeric pattern) "3" The second small pattern "3" corresponding to "3" and the second small pattern "5" corresponding to the decorative pattern (numeric pattern) "5" are fixed and stopped in the second small pattern display area 5r2, respectively. Further, the occurrence of a small win is notified by displaying the words "Small win!!" on the upper part of the image display device 5. Since the game state is controlled to be a small win game state, the performance control CPU 120 updates the small win consecutive number display to "4th time".

Next, during the period when the game state is controlled to the small winning game state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display area 18TM031 as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B3). The active display 18TM030 that was displayed on the screen and the four second pending displays 18TM020 that were displayed on the second pending display area 18TM021 are erased, and the character and the message "Small hit attacker is open!" are displayed on the image display device 5. Display the lines.

In addition, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 was open, 3 game balls were won into the special winning hole, and the number of winning balls was further increased by 10 x 3 balls = 30, for a total of 1620 balls. shall be taken as a thing. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B3), the performance control CPU 120 displays three images of "+10" at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, and changes the display of the number of consecutive small hits to "1620pt". ”.

(Small hit during typhoon mode)
As shown in FIG. 11-5 (C1), when the player selects the typhoon mode as the performance mode while the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, the performance control CPU 120 selects the performance mode. Controlled into typhoon mode. When the production mode is the typhoon mode and the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, a "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the "typhoon image" is displayed at the top right of the screen of the image display device 5. A special display 18TM100 corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) will be displayed at the bottom left of the screen.

The special display 18TM100 is displayed in a superimposed manner with the background image with a higher priority than the background image (the display layer is higher than the background image and the special display 18TM100 is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it appears in the foreground when viewed from the player). When the CPU 103 is simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed. In the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern which is a sub pattern) is displayed in a variable manner. A variable display is being performed.

Since the first pending memory number is 2, the performance control CPU 120 displays "2" in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second pending memory number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Furthermore, the active display area 18TM031 displays an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second pending display area 18TM021 displays four second pending displays 18TM020.

When the second KT state is in progress, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C1), the image display device 5 displays a continuous small win number display indicating the number of consecutive small wins during the second KT state. , a number of award balls during consecutive small hits is displayed, which indicates the number of award balls awarded during the period in which small hits occur continuously during the second KT state. In this example, after the 10R variable jackpot occurs and the transition to the 2nd KT state occurs, it is assumed that three small hits have occurred up to this point, and as shown in Figure 11-5 (C1), small hits have occurred continuously. A case is shown in which characters such as "3rd time" are displayed as a number display. Also, during the first jackpot game based on the 10R guaranteed variable jackpot, 15 balls x 10 balls x 10 rounds = 1500 prize balls are obtained, and for each subsequent small hit, 10 balls x 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained. Figure 11-5 (C1) As shown in , a case is shown in which characters such as "1590pt" are displayed as the number of balls awarded during consecutive small hits.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C2), the performance control CPU 120 displays any information in the symbol display area 5L in response to the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becoming a "small hit" symbol. A number pattern ("2" in this example), a number pattern ("4" in this example) in the pattern display area 5C, and a number pattern ("7" in this example) in the pattern display area 5R , respectively. Furthermore, effect images 18TM060 (in this example, musical note-shaped images) are placed on each of the numerical symbols (in this example, "2", "4", and "7") stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Superimpose the display. The effect image 18TM060 is displayed with a higher priority than the decorative symbols (the display layer is higher than the decorative symbols, and the effect image 18TM060 is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it appears in the foreground when viewed from the player). As described above, in this embodiment, when the production mode is controlled to the typhoon mode, the symbol display areas 5L and 5C are displayed in response to the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becoming a "small hit". , 5R, the combination of decorative patterns (number patterns) different from the jackpot pattern is stopped, and an effect image 18TM060 is superimposed and displayed on each of the stopped decorative patterns (number patterns). Thereby, even when a combination of decorative symbols (number symbols) different from jackpot symbols stops appearing in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the player can expect a small win to occur.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern (number pattern) "2" in the second small pattern display area 5l2 based on the combination of the decorative patterns (number pattern) to be fixed and stopped in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ”, the second small pattern “2” corresponding to “2”, the second small pattern display area 5c2, the second small pattern “4” corresponding to the decorative pattern (number pattern) “4”, the second small pattern display area At 5r2, the second small symbol "7" corresponding to the decorative symbol (numeric symbol) "7" is fixed and stopped. Furthermore, the occurrence of a small win is notified by displaying the words "Small win!!" on the upper part of the image display device 5. Since the game state is controlled to be a small win game state, the performance control CPU 120 updates the small win consecutive number display to "4th time".

Next, during the period when the game state is controlled to the small winning game state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display area 18TM031. The active display 18TM030 that was displayed on the screen and the four second pending displays 18TM020 that were displayed on the second pending display area 18TM021 are erased, and the character and the message "Small hit attacker is open!" are displayed on the image display device 5. Display the lines.

In addition, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 was open, 3 game balls were won into the special winning hole, and the number of winning balls was further increased by 10 x 3 balls = 30, for a total of 1620 balls. shall be taken as a thing. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C3), the performance control CPU 120 displays three images of "+10" at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, and changes the display of the number of consecutive small hits to "1620pt". ”.

As shown in Figure 11-2, when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state), the player can perform any of the following effects: cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode. Mode can be selected. As shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A1) to (A3), when the production mode is cloudy mode, when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit", the symbol display area 5L, the occurrence of a small hit is notified by permanently stopping the number symbols in the symbol display area 5R and by permanently stopping the special symbol 18TM050 in the symbol display area 5C. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B1) to (B3), when the production mode is rain mode, when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit", The occurrence of a small hit is notified by fixing and stopping a combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") in the order of odd-numbered symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, as shown in Figures 11-5 (C1) to (C3), when the production mode is typhoon mode, when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit", the symbol display area The occurrence of a small hit is notified by fixing and stopping the combination of decorative symbols in which the effect image 18TM060 (in this example, a musical note type image) is superimposed and displayed on 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In this way, the effect that notifies you of the occurrence of a small hit (the effect when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped) differs depending on the effect mode, and by selecting the effect mode, the player can determine whether the effect will result in a small hit. It is also possible to select whether the occurrence will be notified. Thereby, it is possible to make the effect when a small win occurs in the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state) to be the effect desired by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in Figure 11-3 (A2), when the production mode is cloudy mode, there are numerical symbols (in this example, "0" to "9") and special symbols 18TM050 (an oval object with " A fluctuating display of decorative symbols including a small winning symbol with the characters "OPEN" is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B2), when the production mode is rain mode, a variable display of decorative patterns including only numerical patterns (in this example, "0" to "9") is performed. . Additionally, as shown in Figure 11-5 (C2), when the production mode is typhoon mode, a variable display of decorative patterns including only numerical patterns (in this example, "0" to "9") is performed. At the same time, when the display result is a "small win", the effect image 18TM060 is superimposed and displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. In this way, it is possible to change the manner in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner depending on the performance mode, and the gaming state can be controlled to a high accuracy state (high accuracy/first KT state, high accuracy/second KT state). It is possible to improve the interest of the game when playing.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5, when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the control is performed to either production mode. The number of consecutive small hits is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen in a common display mode, and regardless of which production mode is controlled, the number of consecutive small hits is displayed. is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen in a common display format. According to such a configuration, the display mode and display area for displaying the number of consecutive small wins can be made common in each performance mode, so that even if the game mode is switched, the player can continue to receive small wins during the second KT state. The number of times can be accurately determined. In addition, in each production mode, the display format and display area of the number of balls awarded during consecutive small hits can be made common, so even if the production mode is switched, the player can continue to receive small hits in the second KT state. It becomes possible to accurately grasp the number of prize balls awarded during the period of time.

(Production mode selection period)
In this embodiment, (1) the gaming state is controlled to be a high probability state (high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)), and the second special symbol is It is executed in response to the period in which the variable display (the variable display of the second small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is being executed, and (2) the end of the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot. During the jackpot ending period, the player can select the performance mode, and during the period that does not correspond to either (1) or (2), the player cannot select the performance mode. That is, only during either period (1) or (2), the player can select one of the performance modes: cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol ) When the variable display is being executed, the production mode cannot be selected.

As for the variable probability jackpot in this embodiment, (i) [6R probability variable jackpot] which is controlled to the high probability/first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and (ii) controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. and (iii) [2R certain variable jackpot] which is controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. During the jackpot ending period that is executed in response to the end, the player can select the performance mode. On the other hand, during the period of the jackpot ending that is executed in response to the end of the jackpot game state of the normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot, 2R normal jackpot) that is controlled to the low probability/high base state after the end of the jackpot game state, It is no longer possible to select.

(Production mode selection during jackpot ending period)
Next, an example of the effect when the effect mode is selected during the jackpot ending period of the probability variable jackpot will be explained using FIGS. 11-6 and 11-7. Figure 11-6 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance when the performance mode is selected during the jackpot ending period of a high probability jackpot, and Figures 11-7 (A1) to (A4) are time charts showing the execution timing of each production after the jackpot ends. / It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image when selecting a performance mode during the jackpot ending period of [6R guaranteed variable jackpot] controlled to the first KT state, and FIGS. 11-7 (B1) to (B4) are It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a production image when selecting a production mode during the jackpot ending period of [10R probability variable jackpot] or [2R probability variation jackpot] which is controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the end.

(Production mode selection when controlled to high accuracy/1st KT state)
Regarding the production example when selecting the production mode during the jackpot ending period of [6R probability variable jackpot] which is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot, Figures 11-6 and 11-7 (A1) This will be explained using ~(A4).

First, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A1), when the jackpot type is [6R probability variable jackpot], when the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, corresponding to the start of the jackpot ending period. Then, a production mode selection period in which a production mode can be selected starts (timing T1 shown in FIG. 11-6). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance mode selection screen, thereby starting the performance mode selection period.

The production mode selection screen includes a production mode image display area 18TM250 where images corresponding to each selectable production mode (cloudy mode image 18TM200A, rain mode image 18TM200B, typhoon mode image 18TM200C) are displayed, and push button 31B operation. The operation promotion display 18TM210 notifies the player that the production mode can be selected by operating the push button 31B and prompts the player to select the production mode by operating the push button 31B. A time bar 18TM220 that notifies the remaining period of the selected period) is included.

The production mode image display area 18TM250 is located at the center of the screen, the operation promotion display 18TM210 is displayed at the lower left of the screen, and the time bar 18TM220 is displayed at the lower right of the screen. The operation promotion display 18TM210 is an image imitating the shape of the push button 210, and the text "PUSH" is displayed on the left side of the operation promotion display 18TM210, and the text "Select with" is displayed on the right side of the operation promotion display 18TM210. By being displayed, the player is prompted to select a performance mode by operating the push button 210. In addition, when the time bar 18TM220 is initially displayed, that is, at the timing when the production mode selection period starts, the remaining time is displayed as 100%, and the percentage of remaining time gradually decreases as time passes. , the remaining time is displayed as 0% at the timing when the production mode selection period ends.

In the performance mode image display area 18TM250, a performance mode image corresponding to the currently selected performance mode is displayed. In this example, since the cloudy mode image 18TM200A is displayed as the effect mode image, it means that the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode. Here, when the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance mode image displayed in the performance mode image display area 18TM250 at the center of the screen to the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the effect mode image displayed at the left end of the screen is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 at the center of the screen. Each time the push button 31B is operated, the performance mode images displayed in the performance mode image display area 18TM250 are switched in the following order: cloudy mode image 18TM200A, rain mode image 18TM200B, typhoon mode image 18TM200C, and so on.

In addition, a time bar 18TM220 is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5, and the presentation mode during the jackpot ending period is determined by the ratio (0 to 100%) of the range of the white part to the entire width of the time bar 18TM220. A production mode selection period, which is a period during which the mode can be selected, is notified. The performance mode selection period indicated by the time bar 18TM220 is subtracted and updated every time the time elapses after the initial value (100%) is indicated, and finally reaches the final value (0%). Then, when the time bar 18TM220 reaches the final value (0%), the production mode is controlled to correspond to the production mode image displayed in the production mode image display area 18TM250. The player operates the push button 31B to change the performance mode image to be displayed in the performance mode image display area 18TM250 to correspond to the desired performance mode before the display on the time bar 18TM220 reaches the final value (0%). Switch to production mode image.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (A2), in response to the push button 31B being operated (at timing T2 shown in FIG. 11-6), the effect control CPU 120 The mode image 18TM200B is moved to the production mode image display area 18TM250 at the center of the screen, and the cloudy mode image 18TM200A displayed in the production mode image display area 18TM250 at the center of the screen is moved to the right end of the screen. At this time, since the rain mode image 18TM200B is displayed in the production mode image display area 18TM250, it means that the rain mode has been selected as the production mode. Further, the display on the time bar 18TM220 has been updated to show 75% remaining, which means that 25% of the entire performance mode selection period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A3), in response to the push button 31B being operated (at timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-6), the production control CPU 120 changes the function displayed at the left end of the screen. The typhoon mode image 18TM200C is moved to the production mode image display area 18TM250 at the center of the screen, and the rain mode image 18TM200B displayed in the production mode image display area 18TM250 at the center of the screen is moved to the right end of the screen. At this time, since the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is displayed in the production mode image display area 18TM250, it means that the typhoon mode has been selected as the production mode. Further, the display on the time bar 18TM220 has been updated to show 25% remaining, which means that 75% of the entire production mode selection period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A4), the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to 0% remaining, and at the timing when the presentation mode selection period ends (at timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), the presentation is started. Based on the fact that the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is displayed in the mode image display area 18TM250, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode to be the typhoon mode. As the production mode is determined to be the typhoon mode, the production control CPU 120 notifies that the production mode will be controlled to the typhoon mode by displaying the typhoon mode image 18TM200C in an enlarged manner in the center of the screen.

(Production mode selection when controlled to high accuracy/second KT state)
Figure 11-6 regarding the production example when selecting the production mode during the jackpot ending period of [10R probability variable jackpot] or [2R probability variation jackpot] which is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the jackpot. This will be explained using FIGS. 11-7 (B1) to (B4).

First, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B1), when the jackpot type is [10R probability variable jackpot] or [2R probability variable jackpot], when the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot ending Corresponding to the start of the period, a production mode selection period in which a production mode can be selected is started (timing T1 shown in FIG. 11-6). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance mode selection screen, thereby starting the performance mode selection period.

Here, unlike the case where it is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variable state) after the jackpot ends, the performance is The control CPU 120 blinks and displays the word "RUSH" at the top of the screen (above the production mode image display area 18TM250). By displaying the characters "RUSH" blinking, it is possible to notify the player that the game will be controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (B2), in response to the push button 31B being operated (at timing T2 shown in FIG. 11-6), the effect control CPU 120 The mode image 18TM200B is moved to the production mode image display area 18TM250 at the center of the screen, and the cloudy mode image 18TM200A displayed in the production mode image display area 18TM250 at the center of the screen is moved to the right end of the screen. At this time, since the rain mode image 18TM200B is displayed in the production mode image display area 18TM250, it means that the rain mode has been selected as the production mode. Here too, the word "RUSH" flashes at the top of the screen, indicating that the rain mode corresponding to the rain mode image 18TM200B is the production mode corresponding to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The player can understand this. Further, the display on the time bar 18TM220 has been updated to show 75% remaining, which means that 25% of the entire performance mode selection period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B3), in response to the push button 31B being operated (at timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-6), the production control CPU 120 changes the function displayed at the left end of the screen. The typhoon mode image 18TM200C is moved to the production mode image display area 18TM250 at the center of the screen, and the rain mode image 18TM200B displayed in the production mode image display area 18TM250 at the center of the screen is moved to the right side of the screen. At this time, since the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is displayed in the production mode image display area 18TM250, it means that the typhoon mode has been selected as the production mode. Here too, the word "RUSH" blinks at the top of the screen, indicating that the typhoon mode corresponding to the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is the production mode corresponding to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The player can understand this. Further, the display on the time bar 18TM220 has been updated to show 25% remaining, which means that 75% of the entire production mode selection period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B4), the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to 0% remaining, and at the timing when the presentation mode selection period ends (at the timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), the presentation is started. Based on the fact that the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is displayed in the mode image display area 18TM250, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode to be the typhoon mode. As the production mode is determined to be the typhoon mode, the production control CPU 120 notifies that the production mode will be controlled to the typhoon mode by displaying the typhoon mode image 18TM200C in an enlarged manner in the center of the screen.

At this time, based on being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the jackpot ends, the performance control CPU 120 displays the following information at the upper right and lower left of the enlarged typhoon mode image 18TM200C, respectively. A special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed in a superimposed manner. Further, in the center of the enlarged typhoon mode image 18TM200C, an image 18TM230 imitating a stamp with the letters "RUSH" displayed is superimposed. The special display 18TM100 has a higher priority than the background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C (the display layer is higher than the background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C, and it is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it appears in the foreground when viewed from the player). Furthermore, the image 18TM230 has a higher priority than the background image and special display 18TM100 in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C (the display layer is higher than the background image and special display 18TM100 in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C). are displayed in a superimposed manner so that they appear in the foreground when viewed from the player. That is, the display priority in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C increases in the order of background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C<special display 18TM100<image 18TM230.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (B1) to (B3), during the production mode selection period (jackpot ending period), the word "RUSH" is displayed blinking, so that after the jackpot ends ( After the jackpot ending period (after the jackpot ending period), a production is executed to notify that the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state) will be controlled. period), the effect notifying that the system will be controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is not executed, and it is determined whether or not it will be controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state). It may be difficult for the player to recognize it.

For example, during the production mode selection period (jackpot ending period), by executing a suggestion production, after the jackpot ends (after the jackpot ending period ends), it is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). may be suggested. Then, when the executed suggestion performance (RUSH suggestion performance) ends in a successful manner, the system is controlled to a high certainty/second KT state (small win RUSH state) after the end of the jackpot (after the end of the jackpot ending period). On the other hand, if the executed suggestion performance (RUSH suggestion performance) ends in a failure state, it shall be controlled to the high certainty/first KT state (probability change state) after the end of the jackpot (after the end of the jackpot ending period). .

For example, in the successful RUSH suggestion performance, the effect control CPU 120 displays the word "RUSH" and then displays a blackout effect (a blackout image as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5). As a result, the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern is lowered to make them difficult to recognize. Next, an operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed superimposed on the darkened image. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated, the blackout effect is ended (by hiding the darkened image as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, the background image is and the visibility of the decorative pattern is improved to make it easy to see), and by displaying the image 18TM230 with the word "RUSH" in the center of the screen, it enters the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Announce the transition.

On the other hand, in the RUSH suggestion performance in the failure mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays the characters "RUSH" and then executes the blackout performance, as in the case of the success mode. Next, as in the case of the success mode, an operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed superimposed on the darkened image. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated, the blackout effect is ended and an image with the words "Failure" displayed in the center of the screen is displayed. It is notified that the state (small hit RUSH state) will not be shifted (in this case, the state will be shifted to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state)).

As mentioned above, in the performance mode selection period of the jackpot ending period, if the jackpot is controlled to the high certainty/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the jackpot ends, the RUSH suggestion performance of the success mode is executed and the jackpot ends. If it is not later controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), it is possible to perform a failure mode RUSH suggestion performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when selecting the performance mode.

Here, the RUSH suggestion performance in the success mode and the RUSH suggestion performance in the failure mode have the same production mode in the first half of the performance, and the player can understand whether the RUSH suggestion performance is in the success mode or failure in the first half of the RUSH suggestion performance. It is now impossible to determine whether the situation is correct or not. Then, in the latter half of the RUSH suggestion performance, whether it is a success mode (high certainty after the jackpot ends/controlled to the second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) or a failure mode (high certainty/after the jackpot ends) Whether the control is performed in the first KT state (probable variable state) is notified.

In addition, in this example, when the RUSH suggestion performance of the first mode (success mode) is executed, after the jackpot ends, it is always controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the second mode (failure mode) Although we have shown an example in which the RUSH suggestion effect of the first aspect is always controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot when the RUSH suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, the RUSH suggestion effect of the first aspect is not limited to this. Even if the RUSH suggestion performance of the second aspect is executed, a performance pattern may be provided that is controlled to the high certainty/first KT state (variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot, and even when the RUSH suggestion performance of the second aspect is performed. A production pattern may be provided that is controlled to a high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the jackpot ends. However, when the RUSH suggestion performance of the first aspect is executed, it is controlled to a high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the jackpot ends than when the RUSH suggestion performance of the second aspect is executed. If the RUSH suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed, the rate of the occurrence of the jackpot is higher than when the RUSH suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed. It is assumed that the percentage of

As shown in FIGS. 11-6 and 11-7, during the performance mode selection period of the jackpot ending period (period T1 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), the player can win the jackpot by operating the push button 31B. It is possible to select which of cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode the effect mode to be controlled after the game state ends. According to such a configuration, since the player can select a desired performance mode when the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-7 (B4), during the production mode selection period of the jackpot ending period, the production is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the jackpot ends The control CPU 120 superimposes a special display 18TM100 corresponding to being controlled in the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) on the upper right and lower left of the typhoon mode image 18TM200C of the image display device 5, In the center of the typhoon mode image 18TM200C, an image 18TM230 imitating a stamp with the letters "RUSH" displayed is superimposed.

In this way, there are cases where the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), and cases where the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state). In response to the fact that the performance can be performed in a common performance mode in both cases, the performance mode image displayed in the performance mode image display area 18TM250 is also made common during the performance mode selection period of the jackpot ending period. That is, no matter which game state is controlled, when the cloudy mode is selected, the cloudy mode image 18TM200A corresponding to the cloudy mode is displayed, and when the rainy mode is selected, the cloudy mode image 18TM200A corresponding to the cloudy mode is displayed. A rain mode image 18TM200B is displayed, and when the typhoon mode is selected, a typhoon mode image 18TM200C corresponding to the typhoon mode is displayed.

However, if the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is controlled to be the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the performance control CPU 120 will control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot to be the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state). Additional information indicating that the gaming state after the jackpot is controlled to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state) is displayed, unlike the case where the jackpot is controlled. Specifically, as additional information, the characters "RUSH" (see FIGS. 11-7 (B1) to (B3)) are displayed above the selected production mode image. In addition, as additional information, a special display 18TM100 is superimposed on the lower left and upper right of the determined production mode image, and an image 18TM230 imitating a stamp with the characters "RUSH" displayed in the center (Figure 11- 7 (see B4)) are displayed in a superimposed manner. As a result, the performance mode image corresponding to the currently selected performance mode is shared, and the gaming state after the jackpot is changed to the high accuracy / 1st KT state (probability variable state) and the high accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state) This allows the player to understand which gaming state is being controlled.

(Production mode selection for the period in which variable display is being performed)
As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high accuracy/first KT state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high accuracy/second KT state. It is possible to select a production mode during the period when is being executed. An example of the performance when the performance mode is selected during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed will be explained using FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11.

FIG. 11-8 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each production when the production mode is selected during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the high accuracy/first KT state. is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image when the performance mode is selected during a period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the high accuracy/first KT state. Further, FIG. 11-10 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each production when the production mode is selected during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the high accuracy/second KT state. -11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image when the performance mode is selected during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the high accuracy/second KT state.

(High accuracy/1st KT state production mode selection)
An example of the execution timing and performance image of each performance when selecting the performance mode during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed when the gaming state is high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) will be explained using FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9.

As shown in FIG. 11-9 (A1), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) and the cloudy mode is selected as the performance mode, the performance control CPU 120 , a "cloudy image" will be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. When the CPU 103 is simultaneously executing variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol (the main symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. A variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to a certain second special symbol) is being executed, and in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is being displayed. ), and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a sub symbol) is displayed in a varying manner. Running.

Since the first pending memory number is 2, the performance control CPU 120 displays "2" in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second pending memory number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Furthermore, the active display area 18TM031 displays an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second pending display area 18TM021 displays four second pending displays 18TM020.

In response to the ability to select a presentation mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays a performance mode selection screen at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 to indicate the currently selected performance mode (in this example, [cloudy mode]). In addition to displaying the icon 18TM300, an operation prompting display 18TM210 is displayed below the icon 18TM300 to prompt the operator to operate the push button 31B. The operation promotion display 18TM210 is an image imitating the push button 31B, and the text "SELECT BY" is displayed on the right side of the operation promotion display 18TM210, so that the player can perform the effect by operating the push button 31B. It has been announced that it is possible to change the mode.

In this embodiment, when the push button 31B is operated during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the [(production mode)] shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen is selected. In response to the switching of [(production mode)] shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300, the actual production mode will be changed when the variable display of the second special symbol ends. .

Specifically, each time the push button 31B is operated, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance mode shown in the performance mode selection icon 18TM300 from [cloudy mode] → [rain mode] → [typhoon mode]. Switch in order. Then, at the timing when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that was being executed is finished, the [production mode] shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 at the bottom left of the screen is changed to the production mode currently being controlled (i.e., execution It is confirmed whether the performance mode is different from the previous production mode corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

Then, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, if the [performance mode] shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 is different from the production mode currently being controlled, a production mode change production is executed. Then, the performance mode is changed from the current performance mode to the performance mode indicated by the performance mode selection icon 18TM300. On the other hand, if the [performance mode] shown in the performance mode selection icon 18TM300 is the same as the currently controlled performance mode (that is, the push button 31B was not operated or the push button 31B was not operated) (If the same presentation mode as the current presentation mode is selected), the presentation mode is not changed without executing the presentation mode change presentation.

For example, when the actual production mode is cloudy mode at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the production mode shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 is [Rain mode] or [Typhoon mode]. If so, the performance mode change performance is executed, and when the performance mode shown in the performance mode selection icon 18TM300 is [cloudy mode], the performance mode change performance is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A2), when the push button 31B is operated (timing T1 shown in FIG. 11-8), the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen. Switch the indicated production mode to [Rain mode]. Even after the production mode shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to [Rain mode], the operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting to operate the push button 31B and the text "Select with" on the right side thereof are displayed. By continuously displaying , the player is notified that the production mode can be selected (changed) by further operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A3), when the push button 31B is operated (timing T2 shown in FIG. 11-8), the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen. Switch the indicated production mode to [Typhoon mode]. Even after the production mode shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to [Typhoon mode], the operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting to operate the push button 31B and the text "Select with" on the right side thereof are displayed. By continuously displaying , the player is notified that the production mode can be selected (changed) by further operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A4), at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-9), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5. Decorative symbol "1" is fixed in the symbol display area 5L, decorative symbol "4" is in the symbol display area 5C, decorative symbol "8" is fixed in the symbol display area 5R, and the second small symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. Determine and stop the second small symbol "1" in the area 5l2, the second small symbol "4" in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "8" in the second small symbol display area 5r2. .

In addition, in this example, the fluctuating display result of the second special symbol is a "small hit", but if the gaming state is high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), the fluctuating display result In order not to notify that the player has a "small hit" (making it difficult for the player to recognize), the combination of decorative symbols that suggest that the fluctuating display result is a "miss" is fixed and stopped, and the fluctuating display The combination of the second small symbols indicating that the result is a "miss" is fixed and stopped. Similarly, when the gaming state is low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state), in order to not notify that the fluctuating display result is a "small win" (making it difficult for the player to recognize), The combination of decorative symbols suggesting that the fluctuating display result is "miss" is fixed and stopped, and the combination of second small symbols suggesting that the fluctuating display result is "missing" is fixed and stopped.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 continues to display the production mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [Typhoon mode] at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, while displaying an operation promotion display prompting to operate the push button 31B. 18TM210 and the words "Select with" that were displayed to the right of it are erased. This notifies the player that selection (change) of the performance mode is not possible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A5), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change effect (period from T3 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-8), and displays " on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The mode change image 18TM310 in which the characters "MODE CHANGE" are displayed is displayed. The mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern, and the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it appears in the foreground when viewed from the player). . In addition, the mode change image 18TM310 includes the active display 18TM030 of the active display area 18TM031, the first pending display 18TM010 of the first pending display area 18TM011, and the second pending display 18TM020 of the second pending display area 18TM021, that is, the change of the special symbol. The object is being displayed with a higher priority than objects that are compatible with display.

Here, the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image, decorative pattern, pending display, and active display, but is displayed in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1. The first small symbol, the second small symbol displayed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2, the first pending memory number displayed in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015, and The second pending memory number displayed in the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025 has a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310, and from the player's perspective It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen in the foreground. Therefore, during the period in which the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, it becomes difficult to see the first pending display 18TM010 in the first pending display area 18TM011 and the second pending display 18TM020 in the second pending display area 18TM021, while the first The first pending memory number displayed in the pending memory number special display area 18TM015 and the second pending memory number displayed in the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025 are continuously visible.

At this time (at the timing of T3 shown in Figure 11-8), in response to the change of the production mode from the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed next time to the typhoon mode, the background image of the decorative symbol is changed to "Typhoon". image" will be displayed. However, during the period when the production mode change production is executed, the mode change image 18TM310, which has a higher display priority than the background image, is displayed on the entire screen, making it difficult to see the "typhoon image" that is the background image after the change. It is in a state of

In addition, in response to the fact that the variable display result of the previously executed (most recently executed) second special symbol was a "small hit", the performance control CPU 120 changes the variable display result as described above. In order not to notify that it is a "small hit" (making it difficult for the player to recognize it), a combination of decorative symbols ("148" in this example) that suggests that the fluctuating display result is a "miss" is used. The combination of the second small symbols (in this example, "148") which suggests that the variable display result is "miss" continues to be fixed and stopped. Here, the display priority of each effect image is as follows: background image<[decoration pattern, first pending display 18TM010, second pending display 18TM020, active display 18TM030]<mode change image 18TM310<[first small pattern, second small pattern The symbols, the first pending memory number in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015, and the second pending memory number in the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025] are higher in this order.

The mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern, and the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it appears in the foreground when viewed from the player). . Therefore, during the period when the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the background image and the decorative pattern. Additionally, the player cannot recognize that the background image has been changed from a "cloudy image" to a "typhoon image" (the timing at which the background image is changed from a "cloudy image" to a "typhoon image"). . On the other hand, the second small symbol is displayed with a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310, and it is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it appears in the foreground when viewed from the player). Therefore, it is clearly visible even during the execution period of the production mode change production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A6), the performance control CPU 120 ends the performance mode change performance (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-8). Corresponding to the end of the presentation mode change presentation, the display of the mode change image 18TM310 in which the characters "MODE CHANGE" are shown ends. When the typhoon mode is selected as the production mode, the production control CPU 120 continues to display the "typhoon image" as the background image of the decorative pattern, so the mode change image 18TM310 with the higher display priority is displayed. Upon completion of the process, the "typhoon image" as a background image of the decorative pattern becomes visible along with the decorative pattern.

In addition, in response to the fact that the variable display result of the previously executed (most recently executed) second special symbol was a "small hit", the performance control CPU 120 changes the variable display result as described above. In order not to notify that it is a "small hit" (making it difficult for the player to recognize it), a combination of decorative symbols ("148" in this example) that suggests that the fluctuating display result is a "miss" is used. The combination of the second small symbols (in this example, "148") which suggests that the variable display result is "miss" continues to be fixed and stopped. In FIG. 11-9 (A6), as the display of the mode change image 18TM310 with a higher display priority is finished, the decorative patterns, which were once difficult to see, as well as the first pending display 18TM010 and the second The pending display 18TM020 and the active display 18TM030 have returned to a clearly visible state again.

Since the first pending memory number is 2, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays "2" in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second pending memory number is 2. 4, so "4" is continuously displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the active display area 18TM031 continues to display the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the previously executed (most recently executed) variable display, and the second pending display area 18TM021 displays the second pending display. Four 18TM020 are displayed. Further, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays a performance mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [typhoon mode] at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A7), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays the image in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , starts the variable display of the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern which is the main pattern), and displays the second small pattern (the second special pattern) in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. (information corresponding to the special symbol) is started to be displayed in a variable manner (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-8). At this time, the production control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting to operate the push button 31B at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the words "select with" on the right side thereof. This notifies you that the production mode can be selected again.

(High accuracy/2nd KT state production mode selection)
Execution timing and performance image of each performance when selecting the performance mode during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed when the gaming state is high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) An example will be explained using FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B1), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) and the cloudy mode is selected as the production mode, the performance control The CPU 120 causes a "cloudy image" to be displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern. When the CPU 103 is simultaneously executing variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol (the main symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. A variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to a certain second special symbol) is being executed, and in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is being displayed. ), and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a sub symbol) is displayed in a varying manner. Running.

Since the first pending memory number is 2, the performance control CPU 120 displays "2" in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second pending memory number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 displays an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second pending display area 18TM021 displays four second pending displays 18TM020.

In response to the ability to select a presentation mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays a performance mode selection screen at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 to indicate the currently selected performance mode (in this example, [cloudy mode]). In addition to displaying the icon 18TM300, an operation prompting display 18TM210 that prompts the operator to operate the push button 31B is displayed below the icon 18TM300, and the words "select with" are displayed on the right side of the icon 18TM300.

Here, when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, the performance control CPU 120 displays the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) at the upper right and lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. ), a special display 18TM100 is displayed showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled by. The special display 18TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image (the display layer is higher than the background image, and the special display 18TM100 is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it appears in the foreground when viewed from the player).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays a special display 18TM100 at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the characters "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) are shown. is displayed, while a production mode selection icon 18TM300 is displayed, an operation promotion display 18TM210 is displayed below it, and the words "select with" are displayed on the right side thereof. At this time, the production mode selection icon 18TM300, the operation promotion display 18TM210, and the text "select with" have a higher priority than the special display 18TM100 (the display layer is higher than the special image 18TM100, and they are placed in the front as seen from the player). The image is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen clearly. That is, the display priority of each performance image increases in the order of background image<special display 18TM100<[performance mode selection icon 18TM300, operation promotion display 18TM210, text "select with"].

When the second KT state is in progress, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a continuous small win number display indicating the number of consecutive small wins during the second KT state. , A display of the number of prize balls during continuous small hits is displayed, which indicates the number of prize balls that occurred during the period in which small hits occurred continuously during the second KT state. In this example, after the [10R probability variable jackpot] occurs and the transition to the second KT state occurs, it is assumed that three small hits have occurred up to this point, and as shown in Figure 11-11 (B1), A case is shown in which characters such as "3rd time" are displayed as the number of consecutive hits. Also, during the first jackpot game based on [10R guaranteed variable jackpot], 15 balls x 10 balls x 10 rounds = 1500 prize balls are obtained, and for each subsequent small hit, 10 balls x 3 balls = 30 prize balls. was obtained, and 30 x 3 = 90 prize balls were obtained by three small hits, resulting in a total of 1590 prize balls. Based on this, Figure 11-10 ( As shown in B1), a case is shown in which characters such as "1590 pt" are displayed as the number of balls awarded during consecutive small hits.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B2), when the push button 31B is operated (timing T1 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen. Switch the indicated production mode to [Rain mode]. Even after the production mode shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to "Rain mode", the operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting to operate the push button 31B and the text "Select with" on the right side thereof are displayed. to be displayed continuously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B3), when the push button 31B is operated (timing T2 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen. Switch the indicated production mode to [Typhoon mode]. Even after the production mode shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to "Typhoon mode", the operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting to operate the push button 31B and the text "Select with" on the right side thereof are displayed. to be displayed continuously.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B4), the performance control CPU 120 displays a decorative pattern "1" in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5, and a special pattern 18TM050 (an oval object) in the pattern display area 5C. (a small winning symbol with the word "OPEN" shown in the symbol), the decorative symbol "8" is fixed and stopped in the symbol display area 5R, and the second small symbol "8" is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5l2 of the image display device 5. 1”, the second small symbol “0” in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol “8” in the second small symbol display area 5r2 are fixed and stopped (T3 shown in Figure 11-10) timing).

That is, in response to the fluctuating display result of the second special symbol becoming a "small hit", the combination of decorative symbols that informs that the display result is a "small win" as a combination of decorative symbols is fixed and stopped; , the combination of second small symbols corresponding to the combination of decorative symbols is determined and stopped. In addition, in response to being controlled to a small win gaming state, the occurrence of a small win is notified by displaying the words "Small win!!" at the top of the screen. Since the game state is controlled to be a small win game state, the performance control CPU 120 updates the small win consecutive number display to "4th time".

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the performance mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [Typhoon mode] at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, while prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. The promotion display 18TM210 and the words "select with" that were displayed on the right side of it are erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B5), during the period when the game state is controlled to the small winning game state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display area 18TM031. The active display 18TM030 that was displayed on the screen and the four second pending displays 18TM020 that were displayed on the second pending display area 18TM021 are erased, and the character and the message "Small hit attacker is open!" are displayed on the image display device 5. Display the lines.

In addition, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 was open, 3 game balls were won into the special winning hole, and the number of winning balls was further increased by 10 x 3 balls = 30, for a total of 1620 balls. shall be taken as a thing. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B5), the production control CPU 120 displays three "+10" images at the bottom of the screen and updates the small hit continuous prize ball number display to "1620pt". .

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change effect (period T4 to T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), and displays " on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The mode change image 18TM310 in which the characters "MODE CHANGE" are displayed is displayed. The mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern, and the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it appears in the foreground when viewed from the player). . In addition, the mode change image 18TM310 includes the active display 18TM030 of the active display area 18TM031, the first pending display 18TM010 of the first pending display area 18TM011, and the second pending display 18TM020 of the second pending display area 18TM021, that is, the change of the special symbol. The object is being displayed with a higher priority than objects that are compatible with display.

Here, the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image, decorative pattern, pending display, and active display, but is displayed in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1. The first small symbol, the second small symbol displayed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2, the first pending memory number displayed in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015, and The second pending memory number displayed in the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025 has a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310, and from the player's perspective It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen in the foreground. Therefore, during the period in which the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, it becomes difficult to see the first pending display 18TM010 in the first pending display area 18TM011 and the second pending display 18TM020 in the second pending display area 18TM021, while the first The first pending memory number displayed in the pending memory number special display area 18TM015 and the second pending memory number displayed in the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025 are continuously visible.

At this time (at the timing of T4 shown in Figure 11-10), in response to the change in the production mode from the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed next time to the typhoon mode, the background image of the decorative symbol is changed to "Typhoon". image" will be displayed. However, during the period when the production mode change production is executed, the mode change image 18TM310, which has a higher display priority than the background image, is displayed on the entire screen, making it difficult to see the "typhoon image" that is the background image after the change. It is in a state of

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the effect when the performance mode is the typhoon mode, in response to the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) was a "small hit". As a combination of decorative patterns, a decorative pattern "2" is displayed in the pattern display area 5L, a decorative pattern "4" is displayed in the pattern display area 5C, and a decorative pattern "7" is displayed in the pattern display area 5R. , 5C, and 5R, an effect image 18TM060 (in this example, a note-shaped image) is superimposed and displayed on each of the numeric symbols displayed on , 5C, and 5R. In addition, as a combination of the second small symbols, the second small symbol "2" is in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol "4" is in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol is "4" in the second small symbol display area 5c2. The second small symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on 5r2. Here, the display priority of each effect image is as follows: background image<[decoration pattern, first pending display 18TM010, second pending display 18TM020, active display 18TM030]<effect image 18TM060<mode change image 18TM310<[first small pattern , the second small symbol, the first pending memory number in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015, and the second pending memory number in the second pending memory number special display area 18TM025].

The mode change image 18TM310 has a higher priority than the background image and decorative patterns (including the effect image 18TM060) (the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative patterns (including the effect image 18TM060), and it is in the foreground as seen from the player. It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it looks like this. Therefore, during the period in which the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the background image and decorative designs (including the effect image 18TM060). Additionally, the player cannot recognize that the background image has been changed from a "cloudy image" to a "typhoon image" (the timing at which the background image is changed from a "cloudy image" to a "typhoon image"). . On the other hand, the second small symbol is displayed with a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310, and it is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it appears in the foreground when viewed from the player). Therefore, it is clearly visible even during the execution period of the production mode change.

Here, when the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, the second small symbol being displayed (the symbol corresponding to the small hit) changes from the small winning symbol "108" corresponding to the cloudy mode to the small winning symbol corresponding to the typhoon mode. The symbol will be changed to a different number symbol combination from the jackpot symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B7), the performance control CPU 120 ends the performance mode change performance (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-10). Corresponding to the end of the presentation mode change presentation, the display of the mode change image 18TM310 in which the characters "MODE CHANGE" are shown ends. When the typhoon mode is selected as the production mode, the production control CPU 120 continues to display the "typhoon image" as the background image of the decorative pattern, so the mode change image 18TM310 with the higher display priority is displayed. Upon completion of the process, the "typhoon image" as a background image of the decorative pattern becomes visible along with the decorative pattern.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the decoration when the production mode is the typhoon mode, based on the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was a "small hit". As a combination of symbols, a decorative symbol "2" is displayed in the symbol display area 5L, a decorative symbol "4" is displayed in the symbol display area 5C, and a decorative symbol "7" is continuously displayed in the symbol display area 5R. An effect image 18TM060 (in this example, a musical note type image) is continuously displayed superimposed on each of the numerical symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and as a combination of the second minor symbols, the second minor symbol The second small symbol "2" is displayed in the display area 5l2, the second small symbol "4" is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "7" is continued in the second small symbol display area 5r2. It is displayed. In FIG. 11-11 (B7), as the display of the mode change image 18TM310 with the higher display priority is finished, the decorative patterns (including the effect image 18TM060) and the The first pending display 18TM010, the second pending display 18TM020, and the active display 18TM030 are back to a clearly visible state again.

Since the first pending memory number is 2, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays "2" in the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second pending memory number is 2. 4, so "4" is continuously displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the active display area 18TM031 continues to display the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the previously executed (most recently executed) variable display, and the second pending display area 18TM021 displays the second pending display. Four 18TM020 are displayed. Further, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays a performance mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [typhoon mode] at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B8), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , starts the variable display of the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern which is the main pattern), and displays the second small pattern (the second special pattern) in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. The information corresponding to the special symbol) has started to be displayed in a variable manner (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-8). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the words "select with" on the right side thereof.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), the production mode is selected according to the player's movement during the variable display of the second special symbol. (Change of production mode) is possible. When the gaming state is in a low probability state (low probability/low base state, low probability/1st KT state), the icon for selecting the production mode is not displayed while the second special symbol is being displayed, and the player cannot select the production mode. It is not possible to select (change the production mode). Also, even when the gaming state is in a high probability state (high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), the period when the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed and only the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed), The icon for selecting the performance mode is not displayed, and the player cannot select the performance mode (change the performance mode).

As shown in FIGS. 11-3 to 11-5, in this embodiment, when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "small win", the small win occurs due to the manner in which the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. The presentation that notifies you of this differs depending on which presentation mode is being controlled. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to (B3), the production mode is activated in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. Can be switched. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), when changing the production mode, the production mode change production is executed, and the mode change is displayed with the characters "MODE CHANGE" displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Image 18TM310 is being displayed.

In this embodiment, in which the combination of decorative symbols that are fixed and stopped when a small hit occurs differs depending on the production mode, if the production mode is changed, the mode change image 18TM310 is not displayed. It is assumed that a configuration (that is, a configuration that does not reduce the visibility of a background image or a decorative pattern) is adopted. In this case, as shown in Figures 11-11 (B1) to (B5), when the production mode is controlled to cloudy mode, the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a "small hit", and the image The special symbol 18TM050 (a small winning symbol with the word "OPEN" displayed on an oval object) is confirmed and stopped in the symbol display area 5C of the display device 5, and after the small winning game is finished, the background image and decorative symbols, etc. While the visibility remains unchanged (background images and decorative designs can continue to be clearly seen), the production mode is set as shown in Figure 11-11 (B7). It will be changed to typhoon mode. As a result, as well as changing the background image, the decorative pattern in the stopped state is also changed (a combination of number patterns with the effect image 18TM060 superimposed is displayed), causing the sudden screen (decorative pattern, background image) This confuses players.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), when changing the production mode, by superimposing the mode change image 18TM310 on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the symbol display area of the image display device 5 is By reducing the visibility of the entire screen including 5L, 5C, and 5R, the visibility of the decorative patterns in the production mode before the change is reduced, and then the visibility of the decorative patterns in the production mode after the change is improved. Therefore, even in this embodiment, where the decorative patterns are different between the performance mode before the change and the performance mode after the change, it is possible to prevent confusion among players due to switching of the screen (decorative design, background image). It can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 11-9 (A1) to (A4), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) and the cloudy mode is selected as the performance mode, the performance control 11-11 (B1) to (B5), the gaming state is in the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). ), when the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 displays a "cloudy image" as the background image of the decorative pattern. This "cloudy image" as a background image is a common background image in the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) and the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 (A1) to (A4), when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), the upper right of the screen and the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 Although the special display 18TM100 with the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is not superimposed on the part, the special display 18TM100 shown in FIGS. As shown in B5), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state), the high accuracy/second KT state ( A special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the small hit RUSH state is displayed in a superimposed manner. According to such a configuration, the background image can be shared between the high accuracy/first KT state and the high accuracy/second KT state, and the high accuracy/first KT state and the high accuracy/second KT state can be specified. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to (B5), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) and the cloudy mode is selected as the performance mode. , a special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed at the upper right and lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. ing. Even after the production mode is changed, as shown in Figures 11-11 (B7) to (B8), the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the production mode When the typhoon mode is selected, the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) are displayed at the top right and bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 shown is displayed. That is, since this special display 18TM100 is common regardless of the performance mode, in this embodiment which can be controlled to multiple types of performance modes, the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). It can be made clearer that

As shown in Fig. 11-9, when the gaming state is controlled to high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), as shown in Fig. 11-11, the gaming state is controlled to high probability/second KT state (small winning state). RUSH state), when the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated by the player during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the production mode at the bottom left of the screen is activated. The display of [Cloudy mode] shown in the selection icon 18TM300 is switched in the order of [Rain mode] display → [Typhoon mode] display. Then, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the [Typhoon mode] shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 at the bottom left of the screen is different from the production mode currently being controlled (cloudy mode). Based on this, the performance mode is changed from the currently controlled performance mode (cloudy mode) to the performance mode (typhoon mode) shown in the performance mode selection icon 18TM300. In this way, when the gaming state is controlled to high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state), when the gaming state is controlled to high certainty/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the second special During the period in which the variable display of symbols is being executed, the game can be controlled to any one of a plurality of performance modes based on the player's actions, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(Jackpot countdown performance)
As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol simultaneously and in parallel. Further, when the gaming state is the high accuracy/second KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. In this embodiment, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is a "big hit", the CPU 103 displays a second special symbol whose display result is a "miss" or a "small hit". When the fluctuating display of symbols is started, the performance control CPU 120 may execute a jackpot countdown performance corresponding to the fluctuating display of the first special symbol whose display result is a "jackpot". In addition, when the display result is a "big hit" and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display result of the second special symbol that is started will be a "miss" or a "small hit". .

When the jackpot countdown performance is executed, a countdown display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 until the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is a "jackpot" ends. The countdown display has a higher priority than the background image and the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, which is the main pattern) (the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern, and it is placed in the front as seen from the player). The images are displayed in a superimposed manner so that they can be seen clearly. That is, by executing the jackpot countdown effect, the countdown display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern which is the main pattern is reduced, and the sub-symbol is It is possible to draw attention to the fact that the variable display result of the first special symbol is a "jackpot". In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the high accuracy/second KT state, it is possible to control to any one of the performance modes selected from a plurality of types of performance modes, but the jackpot countdown performance can be controlled in any one of the performance modes. It is commonly executable even when controlled by a mode. According to such a configuration, in the present embodiment in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, the performance regarding the jackpot notification corresponding to the special symbol that is the sub symbol is It can improve your interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is a "big hit", the CPU 103 displays a second special symbol whose display result is a "miss" or a "small hit". Although an example has been shown in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the jackpot countdown performance at the timing of starting the variable display of , the jackpot countdown performance may be executed at other timings. For example, when the CPU 103 is executing (i) a variable display of a second special symbol in which the display result is a "miss" or a "small hit", (ii) a first special symbol in which the display result is a "jackpot"; When the fluctuating display of symbols is started, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether (i) the display result is a "miss" while the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is being executed where the display result is a "jackpot" (ii). Or, at the timing when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that results in a "small hit" ends, and (iii) the fluctuating display of the next second special symbol that results in a "miss" or "small win" starts, A jackpot countdown performance may also be performed.

As described above, in the above embodiment, as an effect of switching the production mode, each player can play the small hit RUSH in a production mode that suits his/her preference, thereby improving interest. In addition, since the performance mode can be switched not only during the period when the jackpot game state is controlled but also during the variable display of special symbols, the convenience for the player can be improved. Furthermore, in a situation where the small hit RUSH continues for a relatively long time, if there is no change in the performance mode, the game will become monotonous and the interest will decrease even during the period when advantageous value is given. Since the performance mode can be switched, the monotony of the game during the small win RUSH can be eliminated and the interest during the period in which advantageous value is given can be further increased.

(Other features and variations)
(1) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. (Small hit RUSH state)), the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, so mainly [10R probability variable jackpot], [2R probability variation jackpot], [6R probability variation jackpot] , and [2R normal jackpot] occurs, and when [2R probability variable jackpot] occurs, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) and the next jackpot occurs. Although we have shown an example in which the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until the [2R probability variable jackpot] occurs, the game state is not limited to this type. You can.

For example, if a [2R variable probability jackpot] occurs while being controlled in the KT state, after the end of that jackpot game, the system shifts to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) and the next jackpot occurs. The high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) is maintained until the variable display is completed 50 times. If the next jackpot does not occur and the 50th variation display ends, the 51st variation display will move to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) until the next jackpot occurs. The game state may be such that the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state) is maintained. In addition, when [2R probability variable jackpot] occurs, the gaming state shifts to high probability/first KT state (probability variation state), but as a background image, "Night In other words, the background image may be the same as that in the low-accuracy/first KT state (time saving state).

At this time, if a [2R variable probability jackpot] occurs, after the end of that jackpot game, the state shifts to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), and if the next jackpot does not occur after 50 variable displays. In this case, the RUSH suggestion effect of the above-mentioned success mode may be executed in the 50th variation display, and the state may be shifted to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) from the 51st variation display. In addition, when [2R normal jackpot] occurs, after the end of the jackpot game, it will shift to the low probability/first KT state (time saving state), and if the next jackpot does not occur after 50 fluctuation displays. may execute the RUSH suggestion performance in the failure mode described above at the 50th fluctuating display, and transition to the low certainty/non-KT state (normal state) from the 51st fluctuating display.

In this way, when controlled in the KT state, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is the same in the case where [2R probability variable jackpot] occurs and the case where [2R normal jackpot] occurs (both are 2 rounds). Since a common "night image" is displayed as the background image in any game state to which the jackpot game transitions after the end of the jackpot game, it is difficult for the player to grasp which game state the player is in. It has become difficult. Then, when the next jackpot does not occur in the 50th variation display, if the previous jackpot was [2R guaranteed strange jackpot], a success-like RUSH suggestion effect is executed in the 50th variation display. , if the previous jackpot was a [2R normal jackpot], a failure mode RUSH suggestion effect will be executed in the 50th variable display. According to such a configuration, when a [2R definite variable jackpot] or [2R normal jackpot] occurs, it is not possible to grasp which gaming state is being controlled until the 50th variable display is executed. This makes it difficult to prevent the player from losing interest in the case where the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is two. Furthermore, by executing the RUSH suggestion effect at the time of the 50th variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the KT state (low certainty/first KT state, high certainty/first KT state).

(2) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 to 11-5, when the control is in the high accuracy/second KT state (small win gaming state), the occurrence of a small win is handled. We have shown an example in which the manner in which the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped differs depending on the production mode, but it is not limited to this type of production. A winning sound performance, a winning effect performance, an addition performance, etc. when a game ball wins a prize in a special winning hole during a period when a special variable winning ball device 17 in a winning game state is open may be varied depending on the performance mode.

For example, the winning sound production can be performed by reproducing and outputting a sound effect at the timing when a game ball enters the special winning hole during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small winning game state is open. This is a performance to notify that a game ball has won a prize. At this time, when the production mode is cloudy mode, sound effect A is played back and output as the sound effect, and when the production mode is rain mode, sound effect B is played back and output as the sound effect, and the production mode is In the case of the typhoon mode, sound effect C may be reproduced and output as the sound effect.

Further, for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 includes a light guide plate device constituted by a light guide plate and a transparent front decorative plate provided in front of the light guide plate, and by allowing light to enter the light guide plate. , the decorative portion of the front decorative plate may be configured to emit light. For example, the winning effect production is such that when a game ball enters the special winning hole during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small winning game state is open, light is incident on the light guide plate to decorate the front decorative board. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the special variable winning ball device 17 is emitting light by causing the part to emit light, thereby notifying that a game ball has won a prize in the special winning hole. In such a winning effect performance, the aspect of the special variable winning ball device 17 may be changed depending on the performance mode by changing the color of the light incident on the light guide plate depending on the performance mode. For example, when the production mode is cloudy mode, the color of the light that enters the light guide plate is white, and when the production mode is rain mode, the color of the light that enters the light guide plate is blue, and the production mode When the mode is the typhoon mode, the color of the light incident on the light guide plate may be set to red.

In the above-mentioned FIG. 11-3 (A3), when a game ball enters the special winning hole during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small winning game state is open, " An example of executing an addition effect that displays an image of ``+10'' was shown. The mode of this addition effect may be made to differ depending on the effect mode. For example, when the production mode is cloudy mode, an image of "+10" is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the production mode is rain mode, the image of "+10" is displayed on the image display device 5. 5 in a manner that moves from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen (a manner related to the "rain image" of the background image), and if the production mode is typhoon mode, the image of "+10" is displayed on the image display device. 5 may be displayed in a manner in which the images are randomly moved over the entire screen (a manner related to the "typhoon image" of the background image). Further, the aspect (color, font, effect, etc.) of the "+10" image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be changed depending on the production mode.

(3) In the above embodiment, depending on the production mode, the type of decorative pattern, the combination of decorative patterns when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and the presence or absence of an effect image when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Although an example has been shown in which the manner of fluctuating display of the symbols is varied, the manner of fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is not limited to such a format, and may be varied depending on other performance elements.

For example, the speed of fluctuating display of decorative symbols may be varied depending on the presentation mode. For example, when the production mode is cloudy mode, the speed of fluctuating display of decorative symbols is slower, and when the production mode is rain mode, the speed of fluctuating display of decorative symbols is slower than when the production mode is cloudy mode. When the production mode is the typhoon mode, the speed at which the decorative symbols are displayed may be faster than when the display mode is the rain mode. The speed at which the decorative patterns are displayed is faster in the order of cloudy mode < rainy mode < typhoon mode.

Further, for example, the aspect of the decorative pattern itself that is variably displayed may be changed depending on the performance mode. For example, when the production mode is cloudy mode, a white decorative pattern (a pattern with white numbers) is displayed, and when the production mode is rainy mode, a blue decorative pattern is displayed. (designs with blue numbers) may be displayed in a variable manner, and if the production mode is typhoon mode, a red decorative pattern (designs with red numbers) may be displayed in a variable manner. .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the manner in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner depending on the production mode, and the gaming state can be set to a high probability state (high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state). ), it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), as shown in FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5, In the above, an example was shown in which the number of balls awarded during consecutive small hits is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 in a common display mode, regardless of which production mode is being controlled. Similarly, the continuous small win number display may be displayed in a common area of the image display device 5 in a common display mode, regardless of which performance mode is being controlled.

(5) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-6, (i) the jackpot ending period of [6R probability variable jackpot] which is controlled to the high probability/first KT state after the end of the jackpot, and (ii) the end of the jackpot. Although we have shown an example in which the jackpot ending period of [10R certain variable jackpot] or [2R certain variable jackpot] which is later controlled to the high certain/second KT state is a common period, (i) The jackpot ending period shown in (ii) and the jackpot ending period shown in (ii) may be different periods. For example, assuming that the production mode selection period is common (for example, t seconds), in case (i), after the production mode selection period ends, the control is switched to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Since the special display 18TM100 with the word "RUSH" corresponding to the event will not be executed, the period from the end of the production mode selection period to the end of the jackpot ending period will be shortened. (for example, 10 seconds), in the case of (ii), the "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the production mode selection period ends. Since the performance in which the special display 18TM100 with the characters is displayed is executed, the period from the end of the performance mode selection period to the end of the jackpot ending period may be longer than in case (i). (e.g. 30 seconds). In this way, by making the jackpot ending period [(t+10) seconds] shown in (i) different from the jackpot ending period [(t+30) seconds] shown in (ii), the jackpot ending period [(t+30) seconds] shown in (i) can be changed to suit the game state to be controlled. A performance period may be provided.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the production mode can be selected by the player's operation during the jackpot ending period, but the present invention is not limited to this. The performance mode may be selectable by operation, or the performance mode may be selectable by operation by the player during the round period (round performance period).

(7) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the display information such as the background image can be changed by the player's operation. It may also be possible to select the music to be played. For example, when the jackpot game state is controlled to the small win RUSH state after the end of the jackpot game state (fanfare performance period, round performance period, ending performance period), the subsequent small win RUSH is controlled according to the player's operation. It may also be possible to select the music to be played during the playback. Furthermore, even during the small win RUSH, the music to be played during the subsequent small win RUSH may be changeable according to the player's operation. In a situation where the small hit RUSH continues for a relatively long time, if there is no change in the music, the game will become monotonous and the interest will decrease even during the period when advantageous value is given, but it will be played. Since the music can be switched, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game during the small win RUSH, and to further enhance the interest during the period in which advantageous value is given.

(8) In the above embodiment, if the player's selection operation is performed in a high probability state (high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state) and within the variation period of the second special symbol, After executing the production mode change production within the period from the end of the variation period of the second special symbol to the start of the next variation display (variation display of the second special symbol), the next variation display (variation display) 2) The actual production mode (background image) is changed before (or at the same time as) the variable display of special symbols is started. Here, even in the high probability state (high accuracy/first KT state, high accuracy/second KT state), the player selects the production mode during the period when the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. I can't.

(8-1) As shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-11, in the high probability state (high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state) and within the fluctuation period of the second special symbol, When the player performs a selection operation, the production mode name is changed without changing the actual production mode (background image) according to the selection operation before the variation period of the second special symbol ends. The display has been changed to display the name of the production mode that is scheduled to be changed. At this time, the player may be further informed that [the selected performance mode will be controlled from the next variable display]. For example, on the screen in Figure 11-9 (A3), you may display the message "The mode will change to typhoon mode from the next fluctuation." A message may be displayed on the screen that says, "The mode will change to typhoon mode from the next change." Then, the production mode change production is executed within the period until the next variation display (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, and the next variation display (variation display of the second special symbol) starts. The actual presentation mode (background image) may be changed before the presentation is started (or at the same time as the presentation is started).

(8-2) Also, unlike the above example, the player's selection operation is performed in a high probability state (high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state) and within the variation period of the second special symbol. In this case, before the fluctuation period of the second special symbol ends, depending on the selection operation (for example, immediately after the selection operation), the display of the production mode name is changed and the actual production is changed. The mode (background image) may also be changed. In such a production configuration, the period during which the display of the production mode name and the actual production mode (background image) can be changed according to the selection operation is, for example, from the start of variation of the decorative symbols (start of variation of the second special symbol). It may be the period until the first decorative pattern stops (for example, the left decorative pattern stops in the pattern display area 5L), or 2 seconds from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (the start of variation of the second special symbol). It may be a period until the elapsed time.

(9) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-11, in the high accuracy/second KT state, the production mode change operation is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is a small winning symbol. If this is done, the background image in the small winning game state is the background image corresponding to the performance mode before the change. That is, the performance mode is not changed in the small win game state (the performance mode before the small win occurs is maintained), and the performance mode is changed after the small win game state ends. Here, even if the second pending memory number when the small winning game state ends is 0 (even if the second pending memory number is 0 when the performance mode change performance ends), the small winning gaming state The production mode after the completion of is assumed to be changed to the selected production mode. That is, if the second pending memory number when the small winning game state ends is 0 (if the second pending memory number is 0 when the performance mode change performance ends), the small winning game Although the background image after the state ends (the background image after the production mode change production ends) is changed to the background image corresponding to the selected production mode, the change in the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special symbol No display is performed.

(10) In the above embodiment, the execution rate of the pre-read preview performance may be varied depending on the performance mode. For example, regarding the execution rate of the pending change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display (corresponding display corresponding to the variable display that has not been executed) based on the judgment result at the time of starting winning, the cloudy mode has the highest execution rate, and the rain mode has the highest execution rate. The typhoon mode may be the highest, and the typhoon mode may be the lowest. Further, in the above embodiment, the execution rate of the setting suggestion performance may be varied depending on the performance mode. For example, as a setting suggestion effect, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is in an open state, and a small hit is generated based on the occurrence of a winning of a game ball in the big winning hole or the special winning hole. When configured to be able to execute the winning time suggestion effect and the prize pitch number display suggestion effect, the execution rate of these setting suggestion effects is highest in cloudy mode, second highest in rain mode, and highest in typhoon mode. It may be made lower.

Furthermore, the execution ratio may be different for each production mode depending on the type of setting suggestion production to be executed. For example, regarding the execution rate of the suggestion effect when winning a small hit, the cloudy mode is the highest, the rain mode is the second highest, and the typhoon mode is the lowest, but regarding the execution rate of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, the typhoon mode is the highest. may be the highest, the rain mode the second highest, and the cloudy mode the lowest.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described later may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a gaming state control means (CPU 103) that controls the gaming state, and an effect control means (effect control CPU 120) that controls the effect, and has a disadvantageous setting value (for example, 1 A gaming machine ( In the pachinko gaming machine 1), the gaming state control means (CPU 103) controls an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, a special state (small winning gaming state) different from the advantageous state, and It is possible to control the special state (high accuracy/second KT state) in which a gaming value is easily given due to the special state, and the performance control means (performance control CPU 120) can control the special state (high accuracy/second KT state). Based on the player's actions (the player's operation of the push button 31B), one of a plurality of performance modes (cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode) can be controlled. The predetermined effect corresponding to the control of the special state can be changed depending on the effect mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A1) to (A3), the effect mode is cloudy mode). In this case, when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "Small win", special symbol 18TM050 (small win symbol with the word "OPEN" shown on the oval object) is displayed in the symbol display area 5C. As shown in Figures 11-4 (B1) to (B3), when the production mode is rain mode, when the fluctuating display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit", , the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") that is the order of odd-numbered symbols is fixed and stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (C1) to (C3). As shown, when the production mode is the typhoon mode, when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit", the effect image 18TM060 (in this example, a musical note) is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The combination of decorative symbols displayed in a superimposed manner is determined and stopped), and furthermore, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. Based on the decision result of the determining means, a specific production (for example, a cut-in production of pattern CI-3), a suggestive production (for example, a reach production) that suggests that the control will be controlled to the advantageous state. ) (For example, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 15-18, the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7 is executed. and when the suggested effect execution means is set to the unfavorable setting value and it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect execution means executes the specific effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15-21(B), the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, and the variable display If the result is a failure, it is determined that the part (where the cut-in effect cannot be executed in pattern CI-3) is set to the advantageous setting value and that the determining means determines that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state. If not, it is possible to execute the suggested effect in a mode including the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. If the setting value is one of 4 to 6 and the variable display result is off, the cut-in effect can be executed with pattern CI-3), and when the suggested effect is executed, the advantageous A special pattern in which it is once suggested that the state will not be controlled, and then it is announced that it will be controlled to the advantageous state (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect shown in Figure 15-6) and when controlled to be in the advantageous state by the special pattern, the rate at which the suggestion performance in an aspect including the specific performance is executed is the same as the rate at which the suggestion performance in an aspect not including the specific performance is executed. (For example, as shown in Figures 15-21 (A) to 15-21 (E), when performing a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, An example of this is a gaming machine in which the rate at which the cut-in performance is performed in pattern CI-3 is set lower than when the variable display is performed in the variable pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not perform the revival performance.

According to such a configuration, since the performance mode can be selected by the player's actions, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state. In addition, if a suggested effect including a specific effect is executed and it is suggested that the player will not be controlled to an advantageous state, even though the player recognizes that an advantageous setting value has been set, the special pattern may cause the player to be in an advantageous state. By being notified that the game will be controlled, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game due to an error in the recognition.

In addition to the suggestive effects that include specific effects, the system also supports control of special states depending on the type of effect mode, which is controlled to one of a plurality of types based on the player's actions in the special state. The setting value may be suggested based on the mode of the predetermined effect executed. For example, multiple types of predetermined effects that are executed in response to the control of the special state (small win game state) are prepared in each effect mode (for example, when a "small win" occurs in cloudy mode, the symbol Three types of special symbols A, B, and C are prepared as special symbols that are fixed and stopped in the display area 5C), and the mode of the predetermined production is selected by lottery from among multiple types at each timing when the predetermined production can be executed. At the same time, by varying the selection ratio of each aspect of the predetermined effect depending on the set value, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the more the predetermined effect is executed in a specific type of mode. (For example, in cloudy mode, when a "small hit" occurs, it becomes easier for the special symbol C to be fixed and stopped). If this is done, the types of predetermined production modes will become even more diverse, and the players will be able to expect that the set values will be advantageous to the player when a predetermined production is executed in a specific type of mode. Since the feeling of playing the game improves, the player's interest in playing the game can be improved.
In addition, setting values can be suggested using a plurality of elements (for example, two elements: a mode of suggestion that includes a specific effect, and a type of mode of a predetermined effect that is executed in response to control of a special state). For example, if a setting value that is advantageous to the player is suggested in multiple factors, the player can be more confident that the setting value is advantageous to the player, and Even if a favorable setting value is not suggested, if an advantageous setting value is suggested based on other factors, the player can maintain a sense of expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player, thereby increasing his or her interest in gaming. can be improved.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can improve the interest in playing a game in a special state and can reduce the decrease in the interest in playing due to an error in recognition, an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot) a plurality of settings including a disadvantageous setting value (for example, 1 to 3) and an advantageous setting value (for example, 4 to 6) that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous setting value; A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can set any set value from among the values, and a determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 uses a special system shown in FIG. Based on the decision result of the determining means, a specific production (for example, pattern CI-3 Suggestive effect execution means (for example, the variable display shown in FIG. 7 after the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 15-18) that can be executed in a mode including and not including a cut-in effect) a part for executing medium effect processing), and when the suggestive effect execution means is set to the disadvantageous setting value and the determining means has not determined that the control is performed to the advantageous state, The suggested performance including the specific performance cannot be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-21(B), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of 1 to 3) , and if the variable display result is a failure, the part where the cut-in effect cannot be executed with pattern CI-3) is set to the advantageous setting value, and is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. is not determined, it is possible to execute the suggested effect including the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-21(C) to 15-21(E), If the set value is one of 4 to 6 and the variable display result is off, cut-in effect can be executed with pattern CI-3), when the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed. , a special pattern in which it is once indicated that the control will not be controlled to the advantageous state, and then it is announced that the control will be controlled to the advantageous state (the variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect shown in Figure 15-6 (PB1 -5)), and in the case where the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the suggestion effect in the mode including the specific effect is executed is the same as the suggestion in the mode not including the specific effect. lower than the rate at which the performance is executed (for example, as shown in Figures 15-21 (A) to 15-21 (E), a variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival performance. In this case, the percentage of executing the cut-in effect with pattern CI-3 is set lower than when executing the variable display with the variable pattern of Super Reach γ Jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect). It will be done. Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

(Basic explanation as a premise of the characteristic section 208SG of this embodiment)
First, using FIGS. 12 to 14, we will explain the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is the premise of the feature section 208SG, which will be described later, and the points that are different from those in FIGS. 2, 4, and 5 described above. do. Other than these differences, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is the premise of the feature section 208SG, is basically the same as the configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above using FIGS. 1 to 7. The same is true for

FIG. 12 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine, and instead of connecting the frame LED 9 to the performance control board 12 via the LED control board 14, lamp control The main difference from FIG. 2 is that a game effect lamp 909 is connected via a board 9014. Further, the game effect lamp 909 is provided at a location where the frame LED 9 is provided around the game area in FIG. 1, and the game effect lamp 909 is configured to include an LED.

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 12, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 909. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 9014. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 909 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 9014, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The CPU 103, which has executed the game control main process similar to that shown in FIG. 3 described above, receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S9024). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S9025). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S9026). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S9027). The CPU 103 may set the production control command to be transmitted in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S9027, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 13 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S90101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S9027 shown in FIG. 13 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a determined special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the presentation content (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start the round execution in the jackpot gaming state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the opening upper limit period for keeping the big winning hole open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is performed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process that changes the probability in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 208SG)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 15-1 to 15-39.

First, FIG. 15-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components. As shown in FIGS. 15-1 and 15-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 208SG001a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, and a game board (gauge) that constitutes the game board surface. It is composed of a gaming machine frame (underframe) 208SG003 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball firing device and hit into this game area. Furthermore, in the gaming machine frame 208SG003, a glass door frame 208SG003a having a glass window is located between the door open position where the front side of the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is opened and the door closed position where the front side is closed, centering on the left side. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 208SG003a, and when the glass door frame 208SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 208SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk at the gaming parlor into a lock (not shown), and players other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 208SG003 and the glass. Door frame 208SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 208SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is hit relatively weakly (hit to the left) by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 208SG002R is a game area where the game ball is launched downward by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area where a game ball that is hit more strongly (hit to the right) than a game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 208SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, in the left gaming area 208SG002L, a general winning hole 10 is arranged, and in the right gaming area 208SG002R, from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right gaming area 208SG002R, a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L can enter the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R can enter the first winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A. It is possible to win a prize in the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10, and the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is also possible to pass through the passage gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 15-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 208SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game ball flowing down the left gaming area 208SG002L cannot win the second starting prize opening or the big winning opening, and the gaming ball flowing down the right gaming area 208SG002R cannot win the first starting prize opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 15-2 and 15-3, the main board 11 in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment is housed in a board case 208SG201 that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 includes a lock switch 208SG051 for changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a setting value changing state in which the setting value can be changed, and a lock switch 208SG051 for changing the setting value changing state, and a lock switch 208SG051 for changing the setting value changing state. A setting changeover switch 208SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value, and an open sensor 208SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 208SG003 are provided. Note that the setting value change state in the characteristic section 208SG of this embodiment is also a state (setting value confirmation state) in which a clerk at the game parlor or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.

The setting switching main body section provided with operation parts that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052, is housed in the board case 208SG201 together with the main board 11. is exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back side of the board case 208SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 208SG201.

Since the board case 208SG201 having the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate it when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by using the button to open the gaming machine frame 208SG003. Further, the lock switch 208SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a clerk at the game parlor, and therefore can only be operated by the clerk who owns the setting key. The lock switch 208SG051 is also a switch that can be switched ON and OFF, which will be described later, using a setting key. Note that although the feature section 208SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used for both.

Further, a display monitor 208SG029 that can display set values and a base value to be described later is arranged in the board case 208SG201. The display monitor 208SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is placed on the top of the board case 208SG201. That is, the display monitor 208SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 208SG201 when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is open. This is the front when viewed visually, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko game machine 1.

In the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature section 208SG, if the lock switch 208SG051 and the open sensor 208SG09 are ON when the power is turned on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 as a set value change state. Is displayed. At this time, by operating the setting changeover switch 208SG052, the numerical value (setting value) displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 can be updated and displayed.

Then, by turning off the lock switch 208SG051 while any numerical value from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 is set as a new setting value. Ru. Note that, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 sends a setting value designation command, which will be described later, to the performance control board 12 regardless of whether a new setting value has been set (set). By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 can specify the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the setting value designation command.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2, a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area) has a A first special symbol display device 208SG004A capable of variable display of one special symbol, a second special symbol display device 208SG004B capable of variable display of a second special symbol, and a first pending display capable of displaying the number of first pending memories. 208SG025A, a second reservation display 208SG025B that can display the second reservation memory number, a normal symbol display 208SG020 that can perform variable display of ordinary symbols, a regular symbol reservation display 208SG025C that can display the number of ordinary symbols reservations, A round display 208SG131 that can display the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during a jackpot game, in a game state where the game ball is launched towards the right game area 208SG002R, such as a high base state (time saving state) or a jackpot game state. A game information display section 208SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 208SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 208SG133 that lights up when in a variable probability state, and a time saving lamp 208SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time saving state) are all arranged.

The first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B each include an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is a miss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed using a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 208SG004A displays the variable display result with two types of jackpot symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. Derivation and display are possible. In addition, in the case where the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 208SG004B variably displays two types of jackpot symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. Results can be derived and displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic section 208SG of this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 208SG004A The jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 208SG004B may overlap at least in part.

The first hold indicator 208SG025A and the second hold indicator 208SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In the first hold display 208SG025A and the second hold display 208SG025B, if the number of hold memories is one, only the leftmost LED lights up, and as the number of hold memories increases, the LED on the second from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up sequentially. Each time a variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of this embodiment 208SG, the light goes out toward the left).

In addition, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding memory is executed with priority. It looks like this. Therefore, for example, if there is one first special figure holding memory and two second special figure holding memories (only the LED at the left end of the first holding display 208SG025A is lit, and the second holding memory When the left two LEDs of the display 208SG25B are lit), after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory, the first special figure hold A variable display based on memory is performed.

Further, the round indicator 208SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the jackpot types in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment lights up among the segments constituting the round display 208SG131 differs depending on these jackpot types.

Control signals transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 are relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a production control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamps 9. This includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like.

In addition, the production control board 12 in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment includes a first movable body 208SG321 and a second movable body 208SG322 that can operate between the respective origin positions and production positions during variable display etc. An origin detection sensor 208SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 208SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 208SG321, and a second movable body 208SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 208SG322. An origin detection sensor 208SG332 that can detect this is connected.

FIG. 15-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 208SG in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 15-4(A) is just an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 208SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 208SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be set arbitrarily according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in Figure 15-4 (B), the result of determining whether the variable display result is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" (predetermined result) ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is the first gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state where time saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is the first gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state where time saving control is performed (high base state). , time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. Command A1XXH is a big winning opening notification command that notifies that the big winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command of the big winning opening which notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 208SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol pending memory number in order to display the special symbol pending memory number in a specifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol pending memory number in order to display the special symbol pending memory number in a specifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable, non-probable variable, sudden probability) as a winning determination result. In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category that indicates whether the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is a command.

Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for specifying a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores programs and fixed data for game control, and a workpiece for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103. The random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 performs a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102. A fluctuation data read operation to read out the data, a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. Transmission operations such as outputting various signals are also performed.

FIG. 15-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 15-5, in the characteristic part 208SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern are provided on the main board 11 side. Numerical data representing each of the random number MR3 for determination, the random number MR4 for determining the normal figure display result, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Note that although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 15-5, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random numbers The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 15-6 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "small win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "small win" is referred to as a small win variation pattern.

Jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns include normal reach fluctuation patterns in which normal reach reach effects are executed, and super reach fluctuation patterns in which super reach reach effects such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ are executed. There is a variation pattern. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Furthermore, five or more super reach variation patterns may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 15-6, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment, the super reach variation pattern super reach α, super reach β , super reach γ, and super reach δ. In addition, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effects of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ are executed in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment, the super reach The special figure fluctuation patterns are set longer in the order of δ, super reach γ, super reach β, and super reach α.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

However, in the characteristic section 208SG of the present embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ, it is notified that the variable display result is a hit as a reach effect of super reach γ, and then it is notified that the variable display result is a jackpot. A variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 15-6) is provided to execute a revival effect. Therefore, the variation pattern of super reach γ that executes the revival effect is set to have a longer special symbol variation time than the normal variation pattern of super reach γ, and a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern of super reach δ. However, this is an exceptional variation pattern with the highest jackpot expectation (100%).

Note that, as described later, the characteristic section 208SG of the present embodiment distinguishes between the types of these fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is used without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided to determine the type of variation. It is also possible to first determine the type of a fluctuation pattern from a random number value for pattern type determination, and then determine the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characteristic section 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-6, the variation content (performance content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (performance content) may be different depending on the set value that has been set. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 in which the normal reach is off, if the set value is 1, it will be the variation pattern in which the normal reach is out, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect will be used. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern in which a non-reach result is performed twice and a non-reach result, a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous performance is performed three times and a super reach result is used, etc.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 15-7 to 15-14, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table and the like are stored that store a plurality of types of variation patterns.

The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include, for example, the display result determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIGS. 15-7 and 15-8, and the display result determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIGS. 15-9 and 15-10. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in Figure 15-11(A), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 15-11(B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table It includes a table, a small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, a loss fluctuation pattern determination table, a regular pattern display result determination table (not shown), a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 208SG of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value. In detail, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. . The setting value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value is that the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the value for the gaming parlor side. Become.

FIGS. 15-7 to 15-10 are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. Although the characteristic section 208SG of this embodiment uses separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure as display result determination tables, the present invention is not limited to this. , a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In Figure 15-7 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 1, and the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the first special figure that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1237 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

Figure 15-7 (B) shows the first special figure that is selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 1, and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for use. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1346 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

In Figure 15-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 2, and the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the first special figure that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

Figure 15-7 (D) shows the first special figure that is selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 2, and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for use. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1383 are The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

In Figure 15-7 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 3, and the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the first special figure that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1272 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

Figure 15-7 (F) shows the first special figure that is selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 3, and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for use. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1429 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

In Figure 15-8 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 4, and the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the first special figure that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1292 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

Figure 15-8 (B) shows the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 4, and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for use. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1487 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,049 are assigned to "big wins," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

In Figure 15-8 (C), the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the first special figure that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1317 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

Figure 15-8 (D) shows the first special figure that is selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for use. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1556 are The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

In Figure 15-8 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 6, and the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the first special figure that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1346 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

Figure 15-8 (F) shows the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 6, and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for use. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1674 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

In Figure 15-9 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 1, and the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the second special figure that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1237 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

Figure 15-9 (B) shows the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 1, and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for use. In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

In Figure 15-9 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 2, and the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the first special figure that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1253 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

Figure 15-9 (D) shows the second special figure that is selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 2, and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for use. In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1383 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

In Figure 15-9 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 3, and the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the second special figure that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1272 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

Figure 15-9 (F) shows the second special figure that is selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 3, and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for use. In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1429 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

In Figure 15-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 4, and the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the second special figure that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1292 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

Figure 15-10 (B) shows the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 4, and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for use. In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1487 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses."

In Figure 15-10 (C), the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the second special figure that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1317 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Figure 15-10 (D) shows the second special figure that is selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for use. In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1556 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

In Figure 15-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 6, and the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state). It is a display result determination table for the second special figure that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1346 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Figure 15-10 (F) shows the first special figure that is selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 6, and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for use. In the first special figure display result determination table, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1674 are listed. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

As mentioned above, in each display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined for the "jackpot" special figure than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Assigned to display results. As a result, in the probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled in the normal state or the time saving state (in this embodiment) In the characteristic section 208SG, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/300, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/280, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/260, when the setting value is 4, it is 1/240, When the setting value is 5, it is 1/220, and when the setting value is 6, it is 1/200). In the characteristic section 208SG of the embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/200, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/180, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/160, and when the setting value is 4, it is 1 /140, 1/120 if the setting value is 5, 1/100 if the setting value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the variable probability state, the probability that the control will be set to the jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. , a determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-7 to 15-10, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state relative to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state is adjusted according to each setting value. Different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is 1.5 times the jackpot probability in the normal state or time-saving state, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier is 1.5 times the jackpot probability in the normal state or time-saving state.) The magnification of the jackpot probability in the state is approximately 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is 1.625 times compared to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ) may be set.

In addition, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is the same regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in Figures 15-7 and 15-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is treated as a "small hit" regardless of the gaming state or setting value. The probability of determining that the small winning gaming state is controlled is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined by the first feature, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same value, different from those in the graphical display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in Figures 15-9 and 15-10, in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is treated as a "small hit" regardless of the gaming state or setting value. The probability of determining that the small winning gaming state is controlled is set to 1/100.

Note that the feature section 208SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and controlling the small win game state is the same regardless of the setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Furthermore, the characteristic section 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small hit" and is controlled to a small win gaming state according to the variable special figure is different. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and is controlled to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, if we focus on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "small win" in each display result judgment table, we can see the display result for the first special figure when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the characteristic section 208SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Further, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33094, with 32767 as the standard value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the characteristic section 208SG of the present embodiment, when the setting value is 1 in the first special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33094. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the characteristic section 208SG of this embodiment, in the second special pattern display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the characteristic section 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment values that do not fall within the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the standard value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33421. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, the common numerical value range or the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range are determined based on the winning determination value of 1020, regardless of the gaming state and setting value. The judgment value included in the numerical range of consecutive 1 consisting of The variable display result is determined using the determination value included in the numerical value range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result judgment tables, if the variable special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the gaming state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure is different). The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, while the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table is approximately 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each gaming state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot gaming state is determined is the highest. The judgment value is assigned such that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state will be controlled (Jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>Setting value 4>Setting value 3>Setting value 2>Setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot). It is decided that A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol will be a small hit. In other words, the winning of the jackpot and small winning is determined with the probability according to the set value. Note that the "probability" shown in FIGS. 15-7 to 15-10 indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit and the probability (proportion) of a small win. Also, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B It also means deciding whether to use the jackpot symbol or not. In addition, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to control to a small winning gaming state, but stopping at the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small winning symbol.

Note that although the feature section 208SG of this embodiment provides a total of six setting values, 1 to 6, as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more.

FIGS. 15-11(A) and 15-11(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, in Figure 15-11 (A), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when In addition, in FIG. 15-11(B), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table determines whether the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referenced to determine the

Here, the jackpot type in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 15-12. In the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot types include jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends and the transition to a low-probability-high base state occurs; A jackpot B and a jackpot C (also referred to as probability-variable jackpots) are set in which the high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed after the game ends and the game shifts to a high-accuracy/high base state.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state according to "B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Furthermore, the jackpot game state by "Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds).

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" is performed by executing the special figure game a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment), or by executing the special figure game for the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the figure game is executed.

On the other hand, the high accuracy control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot B and jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is jackpot B or jackpot C, the high accuracy control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is a so-called multi-family situation.

In addition, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, a configuration is illustrated in which three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. Less than or equal to four types, or four or more types may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 15-11 (A), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 15-11(B), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In other words, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the winning hole in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. , the jackpot type is determined based on a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is It may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and selects a fluctuation pattern among the aforementioned multiple types according to the predetermined result. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination table includes a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot, which is used when it is predetermined to make a variable display result a "jackpot", and a fluctuation pattern determination table for making a variable display result a "small hit". A fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot, which is used when the variable display result is predetermined, and a fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss, which is used when it is predetermined that the variable display result will be a "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3), and revival performance are executed. The fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach γ jackpot (PB1-4), the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach γ jackpot (PB1-5), and the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach δ jackpot (PB1-6) that do not perform a revival effect. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as the determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 50 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1 -1), 51 to 200 is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 is assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). 401 to 650 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-4) of the super reach γ jackpot that does not perform a revival effect, and 651 to 700 is a variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes a revival effect. (PB1-5), and 701 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-6).

In addition, in the characteristic section 208SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the fluctuation pattern for jackpot is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table 1. Although the example is exemplified in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a jackpot regardless of the setting value set in the gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. , the determination ratio of each variation pattern may be made different for each set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, in the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, for the fluctuation pattern of the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random number value out of the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is the determination value. is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (B), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, out of the range of MR3 judgment values from 0 to 997, from 0 to 997 are small win variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small win in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns of the small win are provided. A variation pattern may be provided.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss includes a fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is one or less in a low base gaming state where time saving control is not implemented, and a low base A variation pattern determination table B for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and a variation pattern for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, there are variation patterns for non-reach misses without shortening (PA1-1), variation patterns for normal reach misses (PA2-1), variation patterns for super reach α misses (PA2-2), and super reach α miss variation patterns (PA2-2). The random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is selected for the fluctuation pattern of reach β deviation (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ deviation (PA2-5). A predetermined random value within the possible range is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in Figure 15-14 (A), in the variation pattern judgment table A for failure (for low base medium total pending memory number of 1 or less), the judgment value of MR3 is 1 to 450 out of the range of 1 to 997. 451 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), 701 to 850 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α variation patterns. 851 to 930 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) where super reach β is off, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the variation pattern where super reach γ is off (PA2). -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-5) in which the super reach δ is off.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table B for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 2 to 4, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super Variation pattern of deviation in reach α (PA2-2), variation pattern in deviation of super reach β (PA2-3), variation pattern in deviation of super reach γ (PA2-4), variation pattern of deviation in super reach δ (PA2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random value within the possible range of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in Figure 15-14 (B), in the variation pattern judgment table B for failure (for low base medium total pending memory number of 2 to 4), the judgment value of MR3 is 1 to 997 in the range of 1 to 997. 500 is assigned to the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 is super reach α deviation. 851 to 930 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-3). PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ deviation variation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table C for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 5 to 8, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super Variation pattern of deviation from reach α (PA2-2), variation pattern of deviation from super reach β (PA2-3), variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ (PA2-4), variation pattern of deviation from super reach δ (PS2-5) A predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in Figure 15-14 (C), in the variation pattern judgment table C for failure (for low base medium total pending memory number of 5 or more), the judgment value of MR3 is 1 to 550 out of the range of 1 to 997. 551 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 850 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α variation patterns. 851 to 930 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) where super reach β is off, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the variation pattern where super reach γ is off (PA2). -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-5) in which the super reach δ is off.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table D for failure, the variation pattern for shortening non-reach failure (PA1-4), the variation pattern for normal reach failure (PA2-1), and the fluctuation pattern for super reach α failure, which correspond to the time saving control. (PA2-2), variation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3), variation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4), and variation pattern of super reach δ deviation (PA2-5). A predetermined random value within the possible range of the random value MR3 is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in Figure 15-14 (D), in the variation pattern judgment table D for miss (high base medium), out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, from 1 to 550 is a non-reach variation. The range from 551 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) where normal reach is off, and the range from 701 to 850 is assigned to the variation pattern where super reach α is off (PA2-2). The range from 851 to 930 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3), and the range from 931 to 970 is assigned to the variation pattern of variation of super reach γ (PA2-4). 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ deviation variation pattern (PA2-5).

In this way, when using the losing variation pattern determination tables A to D, the ratio of determining non-reach variation patterns and normal reach variation patterns is set higher than the ratio of determining super reach variation patterns. In addition, when using fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for failure, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table, 701 to 850 of the determination values are fluctuation patterns for failure of super reach α, and 851 to 930 are fluctuation patterns for failure of super reach β. The variation pattern from 931 to 970 is assigned to the variation pattern where super reach γ is off, and from 971 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern where super reach δ is off.In other words, if the variable display result is off, the super reach is Since the variation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being degraded due to the variable display not being executed based on the super reach variation pattern.

In the characteristic section 208SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns for failure include a fluctuation pattern for super reach α, a fluctuation pattern for super reach β, a fluctuation pattern for super reach γ, and a fluctuation pattern for super reach δ. Although the respective determined ratios are completely the same between the set values, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the super reach α and the variation pattern of the super reach β are illustrated. The determination ratios of the pattern, the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ deviation may be different for each set value.

Note that although the characteristic section 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a failure, the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is not the same, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, or the percentage of variation between non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination ratios may be the same.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and furthermore, the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. The fluctuation time of the outlier fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see Figure 15-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, by determining a non-reach variation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the retained memories are more easily digested, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By making a starting win when you are in a position, you will be less likely to receive a wasteful starting winning that is not stored in your memory, and if the number of held memories decreases, the fluctuation time will be long. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, thereby making it possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 208SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-14(A) to 15-14(C), fluctuation pattern determination tables for failure that differ depending on the total number of pending memories are used to Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for loss depending on the number of reserved memories of the special symbol, and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute a reach effect for each determined variation pattern and which reach effect to execute. , the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the reach performance based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, variable display results, etc., and which reach performance to execute. You may decide by drawing lots whether to do so or not.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 15-1 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a regular figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It includes a setting section and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 208SG004A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 208SG004B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern holding storage section stores the holding information of the normal pattern game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 208SG020 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and stores the normal figure display result judgment data extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting section, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and are periodically counted according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The effect control flag setting section includes a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values for each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section. The reception command buffer at the time of starting a winning is a storage area (corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the first special figure reserved memory. A storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed is provided. In addition, the start winning command buffer has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special figure reserved memory. (an area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") and a storage area (an area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning prize designation command (first starting opening winning prize designation command or second starting opening winning prize designation command) or pending storage number notification command ( A set of commands such as a first pending memory number notification command or a second pending memory number notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning are associated with these commands and are used to store the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the data separately from the figure pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. They are shifted one by one to the upper position.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory in the command buffer received at the time of starting winning at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening. Then, at the time of starting winning into the second starting winning opening, commands are stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending storage of the starting winning receiving command buffer. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when a command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the suffix "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. I'm going to go there.

Next, a description will be given of the processing executed by the CPU 103 in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment. FIG. 15-15 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting prize winning determination process, as shown in FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether the first starting port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (208SGS502). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (208SGS502; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (208SGS503).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 208SGS501a (208SGS501a; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in 208SGS502 (208SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (208SGS501b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (208SGS501b; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (208SGS505). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at 208SGS505 (208SGS505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (208SGS506).

In addition, if the second starting port switch is not on (208SGS501b; N) or if the second special symbol pending storage number is the upper limit value (208SGS505; Y), the starting winning determination process is ended.

After executing either of the processes of 208SGS503 and 208SGS506, the special figure pending storage number corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (208SGS507). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (208SGS508). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 208SGS508, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted (208SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (208SGS510). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage section.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 208SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 208SGS510, transmission settings for a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (208SGS511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 13 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the process of 208SGS511, winning random value determination process is executed (208SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. (208SGS513). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 13 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 208SGS513, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (208SGS514). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (208SGS514; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS515), and then the process proceeds to 208SGS501b. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (208SGS514; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS516), and then the starting winning prize determination process is performed. end. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 15-16(A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed by the 208SGS 512 in FIG. 15-15 as a winning random value determination process. In this characteristic section 208SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, in the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 14), display is performed according to the gaming state, the special symbol to be variable displayed, and the set value. Select the table for result determination (see Figures 15-7 to 15-10), and use the selected table for display result determination to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as a "jackpot" and enter the jackpot game state. A determination is made as to whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "small win" and control to a small win game state.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value determination process of 208SGS512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole or second starting winning hole). As a result, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol or small win symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode with super reach, etc. conduct. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening, in other words, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to win a jackpot or a small win. Before starting the game, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a “big hit” or “small hit” and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 or the like starts to execute a pre-read preview performance such as a pending display preview performance, as will be described later.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 15-16(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 208SG152, etc. The current gaming state of machine 1 is specified (208SGS521). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in a variable probability state (high probability/high base state) when the variable probability flag is on, and that the state is in a time saving state (low probability/high base state) when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on. It is sufficient to specify that the state is a normal state (low probability low base state) when both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the process of 208SGS521, the CPU 103 specifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (208SGS522). Next, a display result determination table corresponding to the current gaming state, starting port buffer value, and set value is selected and set (208SGS524).

Specifically, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special symbol shown in Figure 15-7 (A) Set the display result judgment table, and if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, set the display result judgment table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 15-7 (B), and set the set value to 2. , and if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, set the display result determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 15-7(C), and if the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is the variable probability state. If so, set the display result determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 15-7 (D), and if the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is normal or time saving, then set the table shown in Figure 15-7 (E). ) is set, and if the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is variable probability, the first special symbol display result determination table shown in Figure 15-7 (F) is set. Set.

In addition, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", if the set value is 4 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result judgment for the first special figure shown in Figure 15-8 (A) is made. Set the table, and if the set value is 4 and the gaming state is variable probability state, set the first special symbol display result judgment table shown in Figure 15-8 (B), and set the set value to 5 and If the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, set the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in Figure 15-8(C), and if the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the variable probability state, The display result determination table for the first special figure shown in Figure 15-8 (D) is set, and when the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is normal or time saving, the table is shown in Figure 15-8 (E). Set the display result determination table for the first special figure, and if the set value is 6 and the gaming state is variable probability, set the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in Figure 15-8 (F). .

In addition, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result judgment for the second special figure shown in Figure 15-9 (A) Set the table, and if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability state, set the second special symbol display result judgment table shown in Figure 15-9 (B), and set the set value to 2 and If the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, set the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in Figure 15-9(C), and if the set value is 2 and the gaming state is the variable probability state, If the second special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 15-9 (D) is set, and the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is normal or time saving, the table is shown in Figure 15-9 (E). Set the second special figure display result determination table, and if the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is variable probability, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 15-9 (F). .

In addition, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", if the set value is 4 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special symbol shown in Figure 15-10 (A) is made. Set the table, and if the set value is 4 and the gaming state is variable probability state, set the second special symbol display result judgment table shown in Figure 15-10 (B), and if the set value is 5 and If the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, set the second special symbol display result judgment table shown in Figure 15-10(C), and if the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the variable probability state, The second special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 15-10 (D) is set, and when the set value is 6 and the gaming state is normal or time saving, the table is shown in Figure 15-10 (E). Set the second special figure display result determination table, and if the set value is 6 and the gaming state is variable probability, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 15-10 (F). .

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (208SGS525) performs processing to determine whether the special figure display result is a "big hit", "small hit", or "miss". In addition, the variable display result determination module compares the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the set variable display result determination table with the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, and determines the random number. If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, the variable display result is determined to be a jackpot, and if the value of the random numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the variable display result is determined to be a small hit. However, if the value of the random number MR1 is outside the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and outside the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined to be a loss.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a jackpot at 208SGS525 (208SGS526). If it is determined that it will not be a jackpot (208SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result has been determined to be a small hit in 208SGS525 (208SGS527). If it is determined that there will be no small hit, that is, if it is determined that it will be a loss in the variable display (208SGS527;N), the first symbol designation, which is a symbol designation command in response to the variable display result being a "loss", is executed. The command transmission setting is executed (208SGS527a), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is set, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (208SGS528).

If the time saving flag is not set (208SGS528; N), select and set the error variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 15-14 and proceed to 208SGS536 (208SGS529); if the time saving flag is set (208SGS528; Y), selects and sets the variation pattern determination table D for failure shown in FIG. 15-14(D), and proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS530).

When it is determined in 208SGS526 that the variable display is a jackpot (208SGS526; Y), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination and the jackpot type determination table (208SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command if it is a jackpot A, a third symbol designation command if it is a jackpot B, and a fourth symbol designation command if it is a jackpot C. Execute the transmission settings for the symbol designation command (208SGS534), and then select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 15-13(A) as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (208SGS535). ), proceed to 208SGS536.

Also, if it is determined in 208SGS527 that there will be a small hit in the variable display (208SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command in response to the variable display result being a "small hit" (208SGS531), selects and sets the small winning variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15-13(B) (208SGS532), and proceeds to 208SGS536.

In addition, in this feature section 208SG, in these fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D, a determination value of 1 to 700 is commonly assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. The Super Reach variation pattern is assigned to 701 to 997.

Therefore, when the variable display result is a loss, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss or the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, the judgment of non-reach and super reach can be made according to the judgment. Even if the number of retained memories changes later, the fluctuation pattern will always be non-reach or super reach, so when determining the starting prize, use the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing or the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss to determine the fluctuation pattern. It is designed to judge.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS529, 208SGS530, 208SGS532, and 208SGS535, randomization is performed using each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the numerical value MR3 (208SGS536). In this feature section 208SG, as shown in FIG. 15-16(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach and small win), It is only necessary to provide a random number MR3 and determine whether or not the variable category is determined as such based on the random value MR3.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 208SGS536 to the production control board 12 (208SGS537), and then the winning random value determination process is ended.

Note that the symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

Next, the processing executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 15-17 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG.

In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in 208SGS271 (208SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (208SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (208SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer for one buffer number. (208SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

After executing 208SGS272 or 208SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the variable pattern designation command from the variable pattern designation command storage area (208SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (208SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of this embodiment, if the received display result designation command is a second variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot A, for example, a decorative pattern with an even number of three symbols as a stop symbol is used. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot B, for example, a decorative pattern with three symbols arranged in odd numbers other than "7" or "3" as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). Then, if the received display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged as "7" or "3" as the stop symbol (jackpot Decide on the pattern). In addition, if the received display result designation command is a fifth variable table result designation command indicating a small win, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" or "246", three consecutive even numbers (or Decide on the combination of decorative patterns (small winning patterns) such as (odd numbers). When the received display result designation command is a first variable display result designation command indicating a loss, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (loss symbols) different from the above-mentioned jackpot symbols and small win symbols is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. It is only necessary to decide the stop pattern of the decorative pattern. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

After executing 208SGS276, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (208SG277). Whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern may be determined from the variation pattern designation command read in 208SG275. If the variation pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach variation pattern (208SG277; Y), a cut to determine whether or not to perform a cut-in production, which will be described later, during the reach production and the production pattern of the cut-in production. The in effect determination process (208SGS278) is executed and the process proceeds to 208SGS279. Further, if the variable display variation pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (208SG277; N), the process proceeds to 208SGS279 without executing the process of 208SGS278.

Then, in 208SGS279, the performance control CPU 120 executes a preview performance determination process for determining whether or not to execute a preview performance, which will be described later, in the variable display and the performance pattern of the preview performance (208SGS279). In addition, as shown in Figures 15-27 to 15-29, the preview performance is a performance that can be executed during the variable display in the non-reach variation pattern, and the variable display starts in the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. This is a production that can be executed during the period from when the game reaches reach.

After executing 208SGS279, the production control CPU 120 selects a production control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (208SGS280). Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (208SGS281).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control is executed for the device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) (208SGS282). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the feature section 208SG in this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 Alternatively, the variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time (variable display time) specified by the variable pattern designation command (208SGS283). Also, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (208SGS284). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is ended (208SGS285).

15-18 to 15-20 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 15-17. In the cut-in performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern is a super reach α or super reach β variation pattern (208SGS301). If the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is ended, and if the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach γ or super reach δ (208SGS301; N) further determines whether the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern (208SGS302).

If the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ fluctuation pattern (208SGS301; Y), it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5, that is, a super reach γ fluctuation pattern for performing a revival effect (208SGS303). . When the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 (208SGS303; Y), the production control CPU 120 specifies the jackpot type (208SGS304), and determines whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305). .

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305; Y), the execution or non-execution of cut-in production and production pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS306), and 208SGS308 Proceed to. In addition, in 208SGS306, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (A), based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot A or jackpot B, the cut-in effect is not executed. is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Note that the cut-in effect in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment is to display an image of the push button 31B on the image display device 5 during the reach effect of super reach γ, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-31. Then, the player is prompted to operate the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to the pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-23 and 15-31, if the production pattern is pattern CI-1, the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with a blue effect on the image display device 5, and the production pattern is If the pattern is CI-2, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and if the production pattern is pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed with a gold effect on the image display device 5. If the production pattern is pattern CI-4, the cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed on the image display device 5 together with a rainbow-colored effect.

Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS305; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in performance and the performance pattern based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS307), Proceed to 208SGS308. In addition, in 208SGS307, as shown in Figure 15-21 (A), based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is set to 10%. Determined by the ratio of In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

After executing 208SGS306 or 208SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS308). When it is decided to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS308; Y), the determined effect pattern is memorized and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start wait timer (208SGS309, 208SGS310 ), the cut-in effect determination process ends.

In addition, if the variation pattern in 208SGS303 is a super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) that does not execute a revival production (208SGS303;N), the production control CPU 120 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The specified setting value is specified (208SGS311), and it is determined whether the specified setting value is one of 1 to 3 (208SGS312). Note that the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified based on the setting value designation command received from the CPU 103.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a cut-in effect in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts the value of the cut-in effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed. If the cut-in performance start wait timer times out, a process table for cut-in performance is set in accordance with the determined performance pattern. From then on, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps, 9, etc.) to execute the cut-in effect.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 1 to 3 (208SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display result is a jackpot (308SGS313). In addition, whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot can be determined by determining whether the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ jackpot. When the variable display result is a jackpot (208SGS313; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS314), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS315).

If the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS3315; Y), the cut-in effect is executed based on the setting value being one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. 208SGS3316), and executes the processes 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. In addition, in 208SGS316, as shown in Figure 15-21 (B), the cut-in is performed based on the fact that the setting value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot A or jackpot B. Decide whether or not to perform the performance at a rate of 10%. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS315; N), the production control CPU 120 controls the cut-in production based on the set value being one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. It determines whether to execute or not and the effect pattern (208SGS317), and executes the processes 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. In addition, in 208SGS317, as shown in Figure 15-21 (B), the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot C. Decide on execution at a rate of 10%. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure in 208SGS313 (208SGS313; N), the production control CPU 120 performs a cut-in based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and that the variable display result is a failure. It determines whether or not to perform the effect and the effect pattern (208SGS318), and executes the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. In addition, in the 208SGS318, as shown in Figure 15-21 (B), based on the fact that the setting value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is a failure, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is set to 55%. Determine by percentage. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in 208SGS312 is any one of 4 to 6 (208SGS312;N), the production control CPU 120 determines that the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4. It is determined whether or not (208SGS221). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4 (208SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display result is a jackpot (208SGS322). In addition, whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot can be determined by determining whether the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ jackpot.

When the variable display result is a jackpot (208SGS322; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324).

If the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in production and the production pattern based on the setting value being 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. is determined (208SGS325), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS325, as shown in Figure 15-21 (C), based on the setting value being 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS324; N), the execution or non-execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the fact that the setting value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot C ( 208SGS326), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in the 208SGS326, as shown in FIG. 15-21(C), based on the fact that the setting value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

If the variable display result is a failure in 208SGS322 (208SGS322; N), it is further determined whether the gaming state is a high probability high base state (208SGS327). Note that the gaming state may be specified from the gaming state designation command received from the CPU 103.

If the gaming state is a high-accuracy, high-base state (208SGS327; Y), cut based on the fact that the setting value is 4, the variable display result is off, and the gaming state is a high-accuracy, high-base state. It determines whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern (208SGS328), and executes the processes 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. In addition, in the 208SGS328, as shown in Figure 15-21 (C), the cut is made based on the setting value being 4, the variable display result being off, and the gaming state being in the high-accuracy-high-base state. Decide whether or not to perform the in-effect at a rate of 40%. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS327;N), the setting value is 4, the variable display result is off, and the gaming state is a low probability high base state. Based on the state or low probability low base state, whether or not to perform a cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS329), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS329, as shown in Figure 15-21 (C), the set value is 4, the variable display result is off, and the gaming state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state. Based on this, it is decided at a rate of 59% whether or not to perform the cut-in effect. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in 208SGS321 is not 4 (208SGS321;N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 or not. (208SGS330). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5 (208SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display result is a jackpot (208SGS331). In addition, whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot can be determined by determining whether the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ jackpot.

When the variable display result is a jackpot (208SGS331; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS332), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS333).

If the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS333; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in production and the production pattern based on the setting value being 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. is determined (208SGS334), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS334, as shown in Figure 15-21 (D), based on the setting value being 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS333;N), the execution pattern and whether or not to perform a cut-in effect are determined based on the setting value being 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (208SGS333;N). 208SGS335), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In the 208SGS335, as shown in FIG. 15-21(D), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

If the variable display result is a failure in 208SGS331 (208SGS331; N), it is further determined whether the gaming state is a high probability high base state (208SGS336). Note that the gaming state may be specified from the gaming state designation command received from the CPU 103.

If the gaming state is a high-accuracy, high-base state (208SGS336; Y), cut based on the fact that the setting value is 5, the variable display result is off, and the gaming state is a high-accuracy, high-base state. It determines whether or not to perform the in-effect and the effect pattern (208SGS337), and executes the processes 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. In addition, in the 208SGS337, as shown in Figure 15-21 (D), the cut is made based on the set value being 5, the variable display result being off, and the gaming state being in the high-accuracy-high-base state. Decide whether or not to perform the in-effect at a rate of 35%. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS336;N), the setting value is 5, the variable display result is off, and the gaming state is a low probability high base state. Based on the state or the low probability low base state, whether or not to perform a cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS338), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS338, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (D), the set value is 5, the variable display result is off, and the gaming state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state. Based on this, it is determined at a rate of 58% whether or not to perform the cut-in effect. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in 208SGS330 is not 5 (208SGS330;N), the performance control CPU 120 assumes that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the variable It is determined whether the displayed result is a jackpot (208SGS339). In addition, whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot can be determined by determining whether the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ jackpot.

When the variable display result is a jackpot (208SGS339; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS340), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341).

If the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in production and the production pattern based on the setting value being 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. is determined (208SGS342), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS342, as shown in Figure 15-21 (E), based on the setting value being 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS341; N), the execution or non-execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the fact that the setting value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot C ( 208SGS343) and 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in the 208SGS343, as shown in FIG. 15-21(E), based on the fact that the setting value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

If the variable display result is a failure in 208SGS339 (208SGS339; N), it is further determined whether the gaming state is a high probability high base state (208SGS344). Note that the gaming state may be specified from the gaming state designation command received from the CPU 103.

If the gaming state is a high-accuracy, high-base state (208SGS344; Y), cut based on the fact that the setting value is 6, the variable display result is off, and the gaming state is a high-accuracy, high-base state. It determines whether or not to perform the in-effect and the effect pattern (208SGS345), and executes the processes 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. In addition, in the 208SGS345, as shown in Figure 15-21 (E), the cut is made based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is off, and the gaming state is in the high-accuracy, high-base state. Decide whether or not to perform the in-effect at a rate of 30%. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 30%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS344;N), the setting value is 6, the variable display result is off, and the gaming state is a low probability high base state. Based on the state or low probability low base state, whether or not to perform a cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS346), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS346, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (E), the set value is 6, the variable display result is off, and the gaming state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state. Based on this, it is decided at a rate of 57% whether or not to perform the cut-in effect. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the super reach δ is a variation pattern (PS2-5 or PB1-6) in 208SGS302 (202SGS302;N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display result is a jackpot (208SGS351) . In addition, whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot can be determined by determining whether the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ jackpot.

When the variable display result is a jackpot (208SGS351; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS352), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353; Y), the execution or non-execution of cut-in production and production pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS354), and 208SGS308 ~208 Execute the processing of SGS310. In addition, in the 208SGS354, as shown in FIG. 15-22, based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B, the non-execution of cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS353; N), based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot C, the presence or absence of cut-in production and the production pattern are determined (208SGS355), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is performed. Execute. In addition, in the 208SGS355, as shown in FIG. 15-22, based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure in 208SGS351 (208SGS351;N), based on the fact that the variable display result is a failure, it is determined whether or not to perform a cut-in effect and the effect pattern (208SGS356), and 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 Execute the process. Note that, as shown in FIG. 15-22, the 208SGS 356 decides not to perform the cut-in effect at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the variable display result is a failure. In addition, to execute the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment, when performing variable display with a variation pattern of super reach γ and super reach δ, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22, cut-in When no effect is executed, the proportion of variable display results that become jackpots (jackpot expectation) is lowest, and when the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-1, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-2. When the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, and when the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-4, the variable display result is set so that the probability of hitting the jackpot increases in this order. (Jackpot expectation level in cut-in performance: non-execution < pattern CI-1 < pattern CI-2 < pattern CI-3 < pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in performance is executed in pattern CI-4, it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot and the jackpot type will be jackpot C, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, as shown in Figures 15-21, 15-22, and 15-24, when performing a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach γ or super reach δ, cut-in effects are performed in pattern CI-3. The execution rate is set to the lowest (0%) when the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern is super reach γ off and super reach δ off. If the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that performs a resurrection effect, and the setting value is one of 1 to 3, and the fluctuation pattern is a par reach γ jackpot or super reach δ jackpot that does not perform a resurrection effect, the setting value is 4 and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not perform a resurrection effect, the setting value is 5 and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not perform a resurrection effect, the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation pattern It is set so that the rate of executing the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 increases in the order in which is a super reach γ jackpot without executing the revival effect.

Also, if we pay attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is the super reach γ fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not perform a revival effect, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1 to 3, While it is confirmed that the variable display result will be a jackpot (any of jackpot A to jackpot C) when the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is 4 to 6, the variable display result may be off even if the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3. In other words, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6, the cut-in value is lower than when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 1 to 3. The expected level of jackpot when the effect is executed in pattern CI-3 is set low. Therefore, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, when the reach effect of super reach γ is executed, if the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is off, the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is confirmed that the setting value set to is one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, if we pay attention to the variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes a revival effect (PB1-5), the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 than the variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes a resurrection effect (PB1-4). The rate of execution in pattern CI-4 and pattern CI-4 is set low. For this reason, in the case where a variable display is executed in a variable pattern of Super Reach γ Jackpot that does not execute a revival effect, the pachinko game machine Even though the player recognized that the setting value set to 1 was confirmed to be one of 4 to 6, a revival effect was later executed and a jackpot was announced, resulting in pachinko This prevents players from being disappointed because it is unclear whether the setting value set in the gaming machine 1 is one of 4 to 6.

Also, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is the super reach γ fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, Note that when the variable display result is a jackpot, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 is set to be the same regardless of the setting value, but when the variable display result is a miss. , the higher the setting value is, the higher the rate at which cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 (the execution rate of pattern CI-3 at the time of failure when setting value 4 to 6: setting value 4< Setting value 5 < Setting value 6).

Therefore, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, the higher the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more likely the cut-in effect will be executed in pattern CI-3 and the variable display result will be off. This increases the frequency with which the pachinko game machine 1 is set, making it possible for the player to expect that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. There is.

Also, regarding the case where the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is the super reach γ fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect. If the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are the same and the variable display result is off, then if the gaming state is in the high-accuracy, high-base state, the gaming state is in the low-accuracy, high-base state or low-accuracy. Cut-in effects are set to be executed in pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the low base state.

For this reason, in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the high-accuracy high base state, and the variable display result is off, so that the gaming state becomes low-accuracy. By setting one of the settings 4 to 6 in the pachinko game machine 1 even after the transition to the low base state, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game. ing.

Also, as shown in Figures 15-21 (B) to 15-21 (E), if we pay attention to the cases where the variable display results are off, the higher the setting value set in Pachinko gaming machine 1, the more the cut-in The performance execution rate is set high. In other words, in this feature section 208SG, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed when the variable display result is a failure is itself a suggestion that one of the setting values 4 to 6 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the cut-in performance is executed in a performance pattern with high expectations for a jackpot, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the cut-in performance itself is executed. It is possible to improve the game's interest.

Furthermore, the determination ratios of performance patterns for cut-in performances shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22 are merely examples, and the determination ratios for performance patterns for these cut-in performances will vary depending on the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. It may be made different from the characteristic part 208SG as appropriate. However, if the determination ratio of the performance patterns of these cut-in performances is changed as appropriate, the tendency of the jackpot expectation level of each performance pattern (jackpot expectation level in cut-in performances: non-execution < pattern CI-1 < pattern CI-2 <Pattern CI-3<Pattern CI-4) itself is maintained to prevent the player from misunderstanding the jackpot expectation level according to the performance pattern of the cut-in performance when executing the cut-in performance. is desirable.

Furthermore, in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22, when performing a variable display in a variable pattern of super reach γ and super reach δ, Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. When performing a variable display with a variable pattern of reach γ or super reach δ, a cut-in effect may be performed without fail during the variable display. In addition, in the case where the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of 4 to 6, When the variable display result is a failure, the proportion allocated to non-execution of the cut-in effect (see Figures 15-21 (C) to 15-21 (E)) is changed to pattern CI-1 with low jackpot expectation or By assigning it to both pattern CI-1 and pattern CI-2, the rate at which cut-in effects are executed in pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to differ from the main feature section 208SG. By doing this, while improving the interest by executing cut-in effects during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, it is possible to prevent excessive cut-in effects from being executed in pattern CI-3. This can prevent the player from easily recognizing that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6.

FIG. 15-25 is a flowchart showing the preview effect determination process in FIG. 15-17. In the preview performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (208SGS361). Then, it is determined whether the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362). If the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362; Y), the preview effect determination process is ended, and if the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss (208SGS362; N), it is further decided to execute a cut-in effect. In other words, it is determined whether any performance pattern of the cut-in performance is stored (208SGS363).

If it has been decided to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether the stored effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364 ). If the stored effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364; Y), the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4. Based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern, whether or not to execute the preview performance and the performance pattern are determined (208SGS365).

On the other hand, if it has been decided not to perform the cut-in effect (208SGS363;N) or if the stored effect pattern is pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (208SGS364;N), the variable display result is It is determined whether it is a jackpot (208SGS366). When the variable display result is a jackpot (208SGS366; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS367), and based on the specified jackpot type, whether or not to execute a preview performance and the performance pattern are determined (208SGS368).

Further, if the variable display result is a failure (208SGS366; N), the presence or absence of execution of the preview performance and the performance pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern (208SGS369).

Specifically, in the process of the 208SGS365, as shown in FIG. 15-26(A), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined that the preview effect will not be executed at a rate of 15%. In addition, for the execution of the preview performance, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 55%, pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, if the variable display result is a failure and the variation pattern is a super reach (super reach is a failure), non-execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, to execute the preview performance, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 20%, pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the variable display result is a failure and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach is off), non-execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, to execute the preview performance, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is a failure and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach), non-execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 95%. In addition, to execute the preview performance, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 0%, pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is a failure is defined as This is a case where the set value is one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the super reach γ is off (PA2-4).

As shown in FIGS. 15-26(C) and 15-30, pattern YE-1 is a production pattern that displays the image 208SG005s of character A on the image display device 5 with a blue effect, and pattern YE-2 is , is a production pattern in which the image 208SG005t of character B is displayed on the image display device 5 with a red effect, and pattern YE-3 is a production pattern in which the image 208SG005u of character C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a gold effect. , pattern YE-4 is a production pattern that displays the group image 208SG005v of characters A to C on the image display device 5 together with a rainbow-colored effect.

Further, in the process of 208SGS368, as shown in FIG. 15-26(B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, non-execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, for the execution of the preview performance, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 45%, pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot C, non-execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, for the execution of the preview performance, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, in the processing of 208SGS369, as shown in Figure 15-26 (B), if the variable display result is off and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (super reach is off), the non-execution of the preview effect is set to 50%. Determine by percentage. In addition, for the execution of the preview performance, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Also,
Further, if the variable display result is a failure and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach is off), non-execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, to execute the preview performance, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is a failure and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach), non-execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 95%. In addition, to execute the preview performance, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 0%, pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, when the preview performance is not executed during the variable display, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is set to be lowest, and the preview performance is patterned. Variable display in the following order: when executed on pattern YE-1, when the preview effect is executed on pattern YE-2, when the preview effect is executed on pattern YE-3, and when the preview effect is executed on pattern YE-4. It is set so that the probability of the result being a jackpot is high (Jackpot expectation level of preview performance: Not executed with preview performance < Executed with pattern YE-1 < Executed with pattern YE-2 < Executed with pattern YE-3 < Pattern (Executed on YE-4).

In particular, as shown in Figure 15-26 (B), when it has been decided not to perform the cut-in effect, or if the cut-in effect is a pattern CI-3 with a lower jackpot expectation than pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4. 1 or pattern CI-2, there is a case where the preview performance is executed in pattern YE-4 only when the jackpot type is jackpot C. Therefore, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, in addition to determining whether or not the preview performance will be executed in pattern YE-3, the game also determines whether or not the preview performance will be executed in pattern YE-4. It is possible to attract people's attention.

In addition, as shown in Figure 15-26 (A), pattern CI-3, which has a higher jackpot expectation than pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2 as a production pattern for cut-in production, or variable display results have already been shown to be a jackpot. In the case that pattern CI-4 has been determined, in which it is determined that the jackpot type will be jackpot C, YE-3 or YE-4 will be used as the performance pattern for the preview performance regardless of the variable display result or fluctuation pattern. It is set so that it will never be executed. Therefore, when the variable display result becomes a jackpot, the cut-in effect can be executed only with pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2, so the cut-in effect can be started when the variable display result becomes a jackpot. This prevents the player from being recognized at a timing earlier than the timing (start timing of the preview performance). Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is a miss, both the preview performance and the cut-in performance are not executed in a performance pattern that has a high expectation of a jackpot, so the player is overly concerned about the variable display result being a jackpot. This prevents you from having high expectations.

After executing any one of the processes 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the preview performance (208SGS370). If it has been decided to execute a preview performance (208SGS370; Y), the performance pattern determined by the processing of any one of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, or 208SGS369 is memorized (208SGS371), and a timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance is set to execute the preview performance. The performance determination process ends (208SGS372). If it has been decided not to perform the preview performance (208SGS370; N), the preview performance determination process is ended without executing the processes of 208SGS371 and 208SGS372.

In addition, when it is decided to execute the preview performance in the preview performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 increments the value of the preview performance start wait timer by 1 every time the variable display performance process (S172) is executed, and When the performance start waiting timer times out, a process table for preview performance is set in accordance with the determined performance pattern. From then on, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9 etc.) to execute the preview effect.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the cut-in effect and the preview effect within the variable display start setting process, the non-reachable In the variable pattern that is out of reach, the preview effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 during the variable display, and in the variable pattern that is out of normal reach, the preview effect can be executed in pattern YE-1 during the period before the reach during the variable display. 1 and pattern YE-2, and in the fluctuation pattern where super reach α is off or super reach β is off, the preview effect can be executed in the period before the reach during the variable display in pattern YE-1 to pattern YE- 3 is executable. In addition, in the variation pattern of the normal reach being off, the super reach α being off, and the super reach γ being off, the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 15-28, in the fluctuation patterns where super reach γ is off or super reach δ is off, preview effects can be executed in patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before reach. , cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-3 in the period after reach. However, if it is determined that the cut-in effect is to be executed in pattern CI-3, the preview effect can only be executed in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

In addition, as shown in Figures 15-29 (A) and 15-29 (B), in the variation pattern of the Super Reach γ jackpot that does not perform a revival performance, the preview performance is performed in the period before the reach in patterns YE-1~ It is possible to execute pattern YE-4, and cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-4 in the period after reach. However, if it is determined that the cut-in effect is to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4, the preview effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when variable display is executed in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 15-30 to 15-32. First, as shown in FIGS. 15-30(A) to 15-30(E), if execution of the preview effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the preview effect is displayed in pattern YE- on the image display device 5. It is executed in one of patterns 1 to YE-4. Specifically, when the preview effect is executed with pattern YE-1, the image 208SG005s of character A is displayed with a blue effect on the image display device 5, and when the preview effect is executed with pattern YE-2, the image 208SG005s of character A is displayed with a blue effect. , when the image 208SG005t of character B is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5 and the preview effect is executed in pattern YE-3, the image 208SG005u of character C is displayed with a golden effect on the image display device 5. , when the preview effect is executed in pattern YE-4, a group image 208SG005v of characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 together with a rainbow-colored effect.

At this time, the player expects a jackpot depending on which character's image 208SG005s, 208SG005t, 208SG005u, or 208SG005v the image displayed on the image display device 5 is, and the color of the effect displayed together with the image of these characters. It is possible to recognize the degree.

As mentioned above, if the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the preview effect will only be executed in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It is possible.

If the variable display is a variable display of super reach γ, after the decorative symbols are displayed in the combination of reach as shown in Figures 15-31(A) to 15-31(C), super reach γ's reach effect (in this feature section 208SG, a battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15-31(D), when the cut-in effect execution start timing is reached during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the display of the image of the push button 31B is started on the image display device 5, and the player A prompt notification is provided to prompt the user to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the push button 31B operation acceptance period, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the push button 31B operation acceptance period. When the reception period has elapsed, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 together with a cut-in image according to the production pattern of the cut-in production.

Specifically, if the cut-in production pattern is pattern CI-1,
The cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with a blue effect on the image display device 5, and when the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with a red effect, When the in effect is executed with pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed on the image display device 5 with a golden effect, and when the preview effect is executed with pattern YE-4, the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed on the image display device 5. The cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed with a rainbow-colored effect.

At this time, the player can determine which of the cut-in images 208SG005w, 208SG005x, 208SG005y, or 208SG005z the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5 is, and the color of the effect displayed together with these cut-in images. It is now possible to recognize the expected level of jackpot.

Then, as shown in Figures 15-32 (A) and 15-32 (B), if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (a fluctuation pattern in which the super reach γ is off), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ is When an ally character loses to an enemy character as a reach performance result (battle performance result), it is reported that the variable display result is a failure, and the variable display ends. Also, as shown in Figures 15-32 (A) and 15-32 (C), if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern that does not perform revival effect) When the ally character wins over the enemy character as a reach performance result (battle performance result) of super reach γ, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the variable display ends.

In addition, as shown in Figure 15-32 (A), Figure 15-32 (D) to Figure 15-32 (F), the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (Super reach γ jackpot that executes revival effect). (variation pattern), it is reported that the variable display result is once lost due to an ally character being defeated by an enemy character as a reach performance result (battle performance result) of super reach γ. Then, when the resurrection performance is executed, the variable display result is once again announced as a jackpot when the ally character turns around and wins against the enemy character as the reach performance result (battle performance result) of Super Reach γ, The variable display ends.

Although not particularly shown, if the variable display is a variable display of Super Reach δ, after the decorative pattern is displayed in the combination of Reach, the combination of the friendly character and enemy character will be displayed in the same way as the reach effect of Super Reach γ. A battle performance in which the two men fight is executed. When a cut-in performance is executed during the battle performance, the cut-in performance is executed in pattern CI-3, so that the variable display result always becomes a jackpot. In addition, the battle performance as a reach performance of Super Reach δ may be the same as the battle performance as a reach performance of Super Reach γ, but some characters and battle developments may be different. It's okay.

As described above, in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. -3, it is confirmed that the variable display result will be a jackpot, while if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in effect will not be executed. There is a case where the variable display result is incorrect when executed in pattern CI-3. In other words, if the cut-in effect is executed with pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is off, it is confirmed that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6. , when the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, and it is now possible to improve the interest in the game. There is.

In addition, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-21, as a variable pattern that allows cut-in performance to be executed during reach performance, after once notifying that the variable display result is a loss, Super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that executes a resurrection effect and informs that the variable display result is a jackpot (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that executes a resurrection effect, PB1-5) and super reach that does not execute a resurrection effect There is a variation pattern of γ jackpot (PB1-4), and when performing a variable display in the variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that executes a revival effect, there is a variation of super reach γ jackpot that does not execute a revival effect. The rate at which cut-in effects are executed using pattern CI-3 is set lower than when variable display is executed using patterns. Therefore, if the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of Super Reach γ and the variable display is notified that the player has missed the set value of the pachinko game machine 1. Even if it recognizes that the value is one of 4 to 6, the resurrection effect is executed and the variable display notifies that it is a jackpot, so that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 becomes 4 to 6. It is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game due to an error in the recognition that one of the following is the case.

In the characteristic section 208SG of the present embodiment, as the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the disadvantageous setting values are 1 to 3 and the advantageous setting values are 4 to 6, which are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the determination ratio of the performance pattern of the cut-in performance and preview performance is varied depending on whether the setting value is a disadvantageous setting value or an advantageous setting value, the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the unfavorable setting value includes 1 and the advantageous setting value includes 6, the values may be set in any range that does not overlap with each other. Specifically, the disadvantageous setting value may be 1 to 5 and the advantageous setting value may be only 6, or the disadvantageous setting value may be only 1 and the advantageous setting value may be 2 to 6.

In addition, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the suggestion performance in the present invention is explained as a reach performance, but the invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion performance in the present invention is during variable display. Any performance other than the ready-to-reach performance may be used, as long as it is possible to perform it, for example, a pseudo-continuous performance in which temporary stopping and variable display of decorative symbols are repeatedly performed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 15-21(C) to 15-21(E), when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the super reach γ changes. When a variable display is executed in a pattern, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the cut-in effect is most likely to be executed in pattern CI-3, and the pachinko game When the setting value set for machine 1 is 4, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest. Therefore, the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more frequently the cut-in effect will be executed in pattern CI-3 and the variable display result will be off. Since the player can be made to expect what has been set, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 208SG of the embodiment, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed in a variation pattern in which the super reach γ is off. exemplifies a form in which the higher the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the rate at which cut-in effects are executed in pattern CI-3; however, the present invention is not limited to this. Although not limited to this, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and a variable display is executed with a variation pattern in which the super reach γ is off, the pachinko game Regardless of the setting value set in machine 1, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 may be set to be the same rate. By doing this, when a cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 in a variable display where super reach γ is off, the setting value set in pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6. This makes it difficult for the player to identify the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-6, which reach effect to perform or not and whether to perform a revival effect are determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using the jackpot variation pattern determination table 1 regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the rate at which the revival effect is executed during the variable display is the same regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For this reason, the execution rate of the revival effect during the variable display follows the set value that determines the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the revival effect is executed during the variable display. This allows players to increase their enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which which reach effect to perform or not and whether to perform a revival effect are determined in advance in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 can change which reach performance to perform and whether to perform the revival performance after the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern. It may be determined as appropriate from the display results, etc.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 15-6 and 15-22, the variation patterns in the feature section 208SG of this embodiment include the variation patterns (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of super reach δ. is provided, and if the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result will always be a jackpot, so the variations of the super reach effect will increase, and the super reach effect will increase. Since the cut-in performance is executed in pattern CI-3 during the reach-for-reach performance of the reach δ and the player can pay attention to whether or not the variable display result will be a jackpot, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, a variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing a reach effect of super reach δ is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a variation pattern for executing a reach effect of super reach δ may not be provided.

In addition, in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, as effects that can be executed during variable display, there is a preview effect that can be executed during the period from the start of variable display to reach (or until the end timing of variable display), and reach. A cut-in performance that can be executed during the performance is provided. Furthermore, the preview performance can be executed in any one of a plurality of performance patterns (pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-4) having different jackpot expectation levels. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15-26, when the variable display result is a jackpot and the cut-in performance is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4, which is a performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot. When executing a preview performance, the performance pattern is determined from the performance patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, which have high jackpot expectations, so the preview performance is the pattern By executing the game in YE-3 or YE-4, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a jackpot. Therefore, if it has been decided to execute the cut-in effect in pattern CI-4, by executing the preview effect in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2, it is possible to determine whether the variable display result will be a jackpot. It is possible to attract attention until the end of the variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 15-27 and 15-28, the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment performs a preview effect at a timing before the cut-in effect (from the start of the variable display) during variable display 1. By making it possible to execute the variable display result (during the reach period), if the variable display result is a jackpot, the player will recognize that the variable display result is a jackpot from a timing before the cut-in effect is executed. This can prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Note that in the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, a mode is exemplified in which the preview effect can be executed at a timing before the cut-in effect during the variable display of 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the preview effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect during the variable display that is executed before the variable display that executes the cut-in effect. Furthermore, by executing the preview effect during the period from the start of the cut-in effect until the end of the reach effect, variable display results can be displayed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect until the end of the reach effect. It may also be possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is a jackpot, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 15-21 and 15-22, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot type will always be jackpot C if the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C, so the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-4 during variable display. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game is executed. Furthermore, if the cut-in effect is executed with pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the jackpot type will be jackpot A or jackpot B, so the cut-in effect is executed with pattern CI-3 and the variable display result In the case where the result is a loss, it is possible to make the player think that even if the player wins the jackpot, it may have been a jackpot A or a jackpot B, so that the player's interest in the game is reduced when the variable display result is a loss. It is possible to reduce the decrease in

In addition, as shown in Figure 15-26, one of 4 to 6 is set as a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is If the cut-in performance is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot, if the preview performance is executed, the cut-in performance is a performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot. Since the performance pattern is determined from the performance patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, when the preview performance is executed in pattern YE-3 or YE-4, It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a jackpot. For this reason, even though the variable display result does not result in a jackpot, players may be concerned about the variable display result becoming a jackpot due to pattern CI-3 and patterns YE-3 or YE-4 being executed during the same variable display. It is possible to prevent expectations from becoming too high.

In the characteristic section 208SG of this embodiment, any one of 4 to 6 is set as a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, and the cut-in performance is pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with high expectation of a jackpot. As a form of restricting the execution of pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 of the preview effect when the execution has been decided, the execution rate of pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 is set to 0% (the execution rate of pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 is set to 0%). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this example, and any one of 4 to 6 is set as a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. When the cut-in performance is set to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with high expectations for a jackpot, the preview performance will be performed at a lower rate than pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2. It may also be possible to execute with pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4. In other words, in the present claim, ``When the setting value is set to the advantageous setting value and it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect is executed in a mode including the specific effect. "If executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted" means that the preview effect is not executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4, and that the preview effect is not executed in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-4. It also includes a form in which pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4 is executed at a lower rate than when pattern YE-2 is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-21, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) in which the super reach γ is off. In this case, if the setting values are the same, the rate at which cut-in effects are executed in pattern CI-3 in the high-accuracy, high-base state is the same as the rate at which cut-in effects are executed in pattern CI-3 in the low-accuracy, low-base condition, and the low-accuracy, high-base condition. This is set higher than the execution rate in pattern CI-3. For this reason, when the gaming state is in the high-accuracy, high-base state, the cut-in effect is more effective in the variable display of super reach γ than when the gaming state is in the low-probability, low-base state or in the low-probability, high-base state. Since the rate of execution in pattern CI-3 becomes high, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of 4 to 6 in the high probability high base state. In addition, after the player recognizes that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 in the high-accuracy-high base state. Since it becomes easier for the player to continue playing even after the gaming state shifts to the low-probability-low base state, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic section 208SG of this embodiment, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the super reach γ is a variable display with a deviation pattern (PA2-4). When executed, if the gaming state is a high-probability high-base state, the cut-in will be performed at a higher rate than if the gaming state is a low-probability low-base state or a low-probability high-base state if the setting values are the same. Although a form in which the performance can be executed using pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. , and when the variable display is executed with the variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the super reach γ is off, if the gaming state is in the high-accuracy-high base state, the cut-in effect can be executed with pattern CI-3. If the gaming state is a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state, the cut-in performance may be made unexecutable in pattern CI-3.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, in the characteristic section 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-21, when performing a variable display in a variation pattern (PB1-5) in which a revival effect is executed, a variation pattern in which a revival effect is not executed. (PA2-4 and PB1-4) A mode in which cut-in effect can be executed at a lower rate than when executing variable display using pattern CI-3 has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As shown in Figures 15-33 (A) to 15-33 (E) as Modified Example 208SG-1, instead of a variation example 208SG-1, when performing a variable display in a fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) that executes a revival effect. The cut-in effect may be made impossible in pattern CI-3. By doing this, when the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 and it is reported that the variable display result is a failure, the pachinko game machine 1 will set one of 4 to 6 as the set value. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in a game due to a revival performance being executed and a variable display result being reported as a jackpot even though the player recognizes that the game has been set.

In addition, in the feature section 208SG of the embodiment, when performing a variable display with a variation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot that executes a revival effect, a variable display is performed with a variation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute a revival effect. Although we have illustrated an example in which the rate of executing cut-in effects in pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing cut-in effects, the present invention is not limited to this. -34 (A) to Figure 15-34 (D), when performing a variable display in the variation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot that executes a revival effect, the display of a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute a resurrection effect The rate at which cut-in effects are executed using pattern CI-3 may be set higher than when variable display is executed using variable patterns. By doing this, for example, the player places more importance on whether the variable display result is a jackpot than whether the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6. In the case where the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 and it is announced that the variable display result is a loss, a revival effect is further executed and the variable display result is a jackpot. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the notification will be made, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic section 208SG of the embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5 ), the cut-in effect can be executed using pattern CI-3 as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in Figures 15-35 (A) to 15-35 (C), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6, the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect When executing a variable display using the variation pattern (PB1-5), the cut-in effect can be executed using pattern CI-3. In either case, when performing a variable display in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) in which a revival performance is executed, the cut-in performance may be made unexecutable in pattern CI-3. By doing this, when executing the variable display in the Super Reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect, the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the settings in Pachinko gaming machine 1 It is confirmed that the set value is one of 4 to 6, and the revival effect is executed after the variable display result is notified that the variable display result will be off during the reach effect of Super Reach γ during the variable display. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the variable display result will be notified of a jackpot, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In other words, in the feature section 208SG, if the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of Super Reach γ, the settings set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be maintained even if the variable display result is off. By determining that the value is between 4 and 6, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing, but in this feature section 208SG-3, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing. When the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, the variable display result becomes a jackpot, and furthermore, when it is determined that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6, the player This makes it possible to encourage players to continue playing.

Further, in the characteristic section 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-26, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variation pattern in which the super reach γ is off. When the variable display is executed in (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, which is a performance pattern with low jackpot expectation, the cut-in effect is exemplifies a form in which the preview performance can be executed with pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when execution with pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with high expectation of jackpot, is determined, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 15-36 (A) to 15-36 (C) as a modified example 208SG-4, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 4 to 6. , and when the variable display is executed with the variation pattern (PA2-4) that is off the super reach γ, it is decided to execute the cut-in performance with pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot. If so, the preview effect will be executed in pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, which are effect patterns with low jackpot expectations. It may be executable. By doing this, when the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of Super Reach γ, when the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, By executing the preview effect in pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than the previous one, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be incorrect. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not he or she will win the jackpot, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic section 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-21(C) to 15-21(E), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of 4 to 6. , and when the variable display is executed with the variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the super reach γ is off, if the gaming state is a high probability high base state, if the set values are the same, the gaming state is low. Although we have exemplified a form in which pattern CI-3 can perform cut-in effects at a higher rate than in the low-probability base state or the low-probability high base state, the present invention is not limited to this, and modifications As shown in Figure 15-37 as 208SG-5, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6, and the super reach γ is variably displayed in a variation pattern (PA2-4) that is off. When executed, if the gaming state is in the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state, the cut will be made at a higher rate than if the gaming state is in the high probability high base state if the setting values are the same. The in effect may be made executable with pattern CI-3.

By doing this, when the gaming state is in the low-probability low base state or the low-probability high-base state, a higher percentage of players will be affected during the reach performance of Super Reach γ than when the gaming state is in the high-probability high base state. Since the cut-in effect is more likely to be executed in pattern CI-3, for example, the variable display result will not become a jackpot over a long period of time (for example, 1000 variable displays, etc.) in a low-accuracy, low-base state, so that the player When the player's desire to continue playing the game has decreased, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, that is, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6. By informing the player of this, the player's desire to continue playing can be improved, so that the game's interest in the low-probability low-base state and the low-probability high-base state can be improved.

In addition, in this modification example 208SG-5, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed with a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the super reach γ is off. When the gaming state is in the low-probability low-base state or the low-probability high-base state, the cut-in effect will be performed at a higher rate than when the gaming state is in the high-probability high-base state if the setting values are the same. Although a form that can be executed in pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 15-38 as a modified example 208SG-6, it is When the set value is 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ, the gaming state is in the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state In this case, the cut-in effect can be executed with pattern CI-3, while if the gaming state is a high probability/high base state, the cut-in effect may not be executed with pattern CI-3. By doing this, the cut-in performance can be executed with pattern CI-3 during the reach performance of Super Reach γ only when the gaming state is low probability low base state or low probability high base state, so Since it is possible to draw players' attention to the low certainty base state and the low probability high base state, where variable display results are less likely to result in a jackpot than in the high base state, it is possible to increase the gaming interest in these low probability base states and low probability high base states. can be improved.

Further, in the feature section 208SG of the embodiment, a mode in which a cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of super reach γ or super reach δ is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-40 (A) and 15-40 (B) as modification example 208SG-7, during the reach effect of super reach γ and super reach δ, pachinko games are played instead of cut-in effects. It may also be possible to perform a setting value suggestion effect that suggests the setting values set in the device 1. In addition, when making it possible to execute the setting value suggestion performance during the reach performance of Super Reach γ or Super Reach δ in this way, the period (for example , the period from the start of the variable display until reaching the reach), the above-mentioned preview performance may be made executable, and the execution rate of the set value suggestion performance may be made to vary depending on the performance pattern of the preview performance.

Specifically, when the preview effect is executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4, the set value is set at a higher rate than when the preview effect is executed in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It is only necessary to make the suggestive performance executable. By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which performance pattern the preview performance will be executed in, and if the preview performance is executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4, Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the set value suggestion performance is executed during the reach performance, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the set value suggestion performance.

1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Game machine frame 4A... First special symbol display device 4B... Second special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special Variable winning ball device 8L, 8R...Speaker 9...Frame LED
10...General winning opening 11...Main board 12...Production control board 13...Audio control board 14...LED control board 15...Relay board 17...Special variable winning ball device 20...Normal symbol display 21...Gate switch 22A, 22B...Start Mouth switch 23...First count switch 24...Second count switch 30...Ball operating handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 41...Passing gate 100...Microcomputer for game control 101, 121...ROM
102, 122...RAM
103...CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123...Display control unit

Claims (1)

a game area where game media can be fired;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
a performance control means for controlling the performance;
A gaming machine comprising an image display means,
The gaming area includes a first gaming area and a second gaming area,
The gaming state control means is configured to control a normal state, an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a special state different from the advantageous state, a special state in which a gaming value is more likely to be awarded due to the special state, and a different state from the special state. is controllable to a predetermined state;
In the normal state, it is more advantageous for game media to be fired into the first game area than to fire game media to the second game area,
In the predetermined state and the special state, it is more advantageous for game media to be fired into the second game area than to fire game media into the first game area,
The special state is a state in which the execution frequency of the second variable display of the first variable display and the second variable display is higher than the normal state,
The performance control means is
The image display means is capable of controlling one of a plurality of types of performance modes based on the player's actions in the special state and the predetermined state, and displays a notification display to notify the selected performance mode. It is possible to display the
A predetermined effect can be executed when controlled in the special state,
It is possible to vary the aspect of the predetermined performance that is executed when a gaming value is given depending on the performance mode,
When controlled to the special state, a background image that can be displayed when controlled to the predetermined state and a special display that is not displayed when controlled to the predetermined state are displayed on the image display means. It is possible to
The notification display can be displayed in common when the special state is controlled and when the predetermined state is controlled,
When controlled to the special state, the notification display can be displayed superimposed on a part of the special display,
The special display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with a pending display area in which a pending display indicating the number of pending executions of the second variable display is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images